JP2020073205A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: As game sections, a normal section and an advantageous section are provided. In the advantageous section, a shift to an ART state can occur, but in the normal section, a shift to the ART state does not occur. During the normal section, if shift lottery processing for the advantageous section becomes a shift lottery winning, a shift is made to the advantageous section, and during the advantageous section, through becoming a shift lottery winning or the like to a genuine precursory state, a shift to the ART state occurs. In doing so, if a number of games performed in the advantageous section becomes an upper limit number of games, the advantageous section is terminated and the ART state is also terminated. Further, if the number of games performed in the advantageous section becomes equal to or more than an ending corresponding number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games, an ending presentation is started.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-045989, A

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The above problem is not limited to the pachinko game machine and the slot machine, but is a problem applicable to other game machines.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a section setting means for setting a game section to a second section which is more advantageous to the player than the first section,
First state setting means for setting a first expected state in which a benefit is provided after the end of a plurality of games,
Second state setting means for setting a second expected state that continues for a plurality of games and is not granted the privilege after the end,
Expected production control means for performing expected production that enables the player to expect the privilege to be given in each of the games in the first expected state and the second expected state,
Equipped with
It is characterized in that the section setting means includes means for making the second section in the second expected state.

  According to the present invention, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be visually recognized from a display window part, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. (A) It is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display unit. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in an image display apparatus, and the display content of the stop order in a dual-purpose display part. FIG. 9 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the master MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by the main MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a configuration of a random number circuit group provided on the main control board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a 1st-12th shared random number circuit and a 1st-4th dedicated random number circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the random number acquisition process performed in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the winning combination executed in the main MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a normal mode lottery table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relationship between a reel stop order and a winning mode to be established when a normal mode lottery table is selected. It is an explanatory view for explaining a first RT mode lottery table. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the winning mode established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. It is an explanatory view for explaining a second RT mode lottery table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relationship between a reel stop order and a winning mode that is established when the second RT mode lottery table is selected. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the index value from which the winning probability differs among the setting values of "1"-"6". It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an offset table. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the winning data performed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by the main side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a game state and a game section existing in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st control processing of the game section performed by the master side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process performed by the main MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the information processing which is executed with production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer lottery process for false omen states performed by the master MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the corresponding processing at the time of the end of the game performed in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game section performed by the master side MPU. (A) ~ (f) is a time chart showing how the transition to the advantageous section and the return to the normal section are performed. It is a flowchart showing a transition lottery process for a chance state executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for chance states performed in the main MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing for usual which is executed with production side MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing for the false aura state which is executed with production side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(f) a false omen effect and a chance effect are performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the false sign production | presentation on an image display apparatus, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the chance production on an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonuses performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart showing a bonus process at the start of the game which is executed by the main MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of the game start during a bonus performed by the master MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus states performed by the master MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state process performed by the main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the memory area of main side RAM, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the memory area of production side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process performed in the main MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining (a) A loop lottery table, (b) an explanatory view for explaining various continuous lottery tables, and (c) an explanatory view for explaining B loop lottery table. .. It is a flowchart which shows the process for A loops performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for B loops performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state process performed by the main MPU. (A) ~ (h) It is a time chart for explaining the outline of the effect that occurs in the ART state. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing for non-normal which is executed with production side MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for direct addition production which is executed with production side MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for A loop production which is executed with production side MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the selection processing of the special addition production which is executed with production side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of special addition effect. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for special addition production which is executed with production side MPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that an expected production and a special addition production are performed when A loop occurs. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for B loop production which is executed with production side MPU. (A) ~ (c) is a time chart showing how the special freeze effect is executed when the B loop occurs. It is the flowchart which shows the stock release processing which is executed with the production side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the image display apparatus in (a)-(c) ART state. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(g) various discharge productions are performed. It is a flowchart which shows the ending corresponding process performed in the main side MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for ending production which is executed with production side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the image display apparatus in the situation where (a), (b) ending production is performed. It is the flowchart which shows the ending production ending processing which is executed with production side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows freeze setting processing performed by a master MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(f) ending production is performed. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing for the profitable maintenance section which is executed with production side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a bonus winning notification image, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the bonus classification notification image. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(i) advantageous maintenance section progresses. It is a flow chart which shows management processing performed in a master MPU. (A) ~ (e) is a time chart showing how the game history management results are displayed using the dual-purpose display unit. It is a flow chart which shows the generation management processing of the pseudo bonus performed by the main side MPU in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management process of the pseudo bonus performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo bonus start process performed by the main MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining (a) initial continuation game number table, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a shift condition game number table. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM. It is a flowchart showing a game start time process during the pseudo bonus executed by the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a 1st additional table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a 2nd additional table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for pseudo bonus progress performed in the master MPU. (A) ~ (f) is a time chart showing how the handling of the number of additional games changes depending on the status of the ART winning flag in the pseudo bonus state. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing for the pseudo bonus which is executed with production side MPU. (A) ~ (g) is a time chart showing how the pre-branch effect and the branch effect are executed in the pseudo bonus state. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st-4th addition table in 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an index correspondence table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(d) 1st-4th compression data. It is a flowchart which shows the addition lottery process performed in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the addition index performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the random number acquisition process performed in the main side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the random number circuit group provided in the main control board in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing for normal which is executed with the production side MPU in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing for the false aura state which is executed with the production side MPU in 7th execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus notification process during ending which is performed by the production side MPU in the eighth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10 which is a type of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a housing 11.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms the outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the inner space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed with a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side of the front door 12 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and the locked state is released by an unlocking operation of the key cylinder 14 by a predetermined key.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12. On the game panel 20, three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R that are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in one-to-one correspondence with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is in a visible state through the corresponding display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R as if moving from top to bottom.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 20, as shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. When the start lever 41 is operated while gaming media such as medals and virtual medals are bet, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are brought into a state in which they can be stopped when a predetermined time elapses after the left reel 32L starts rotating.

  The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and the game medium Until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed corresponds to one game (game time).

  On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 to the hopper device 53 when the acceptance is permitted, and when the acceptance is prohibited. It is guided to the medal receiving tray 59 from the medal discharging port 58 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). Note that the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when the winning corresponding to the addition of the game medium on the activated line is established. There is.

  Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided that is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 52. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals are inserted at one time. A second credit insertion button 48 for inserting and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

  A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as an actual medal.

  Inside the housing 11, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on and off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and the setting states of the slot machine 10 from “setting 1” to “setting 1”. A setting key insertion hole 57 that is operated to change within the range of “setting 6” is provided.

  Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R will be described.

  In FIG. 4, the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is shown. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively, but these numbers can be visually recognized by the main controller 70, which will be described later, from the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol in a different state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the corresponding numbers will be used for description.

  As the symbols, a "bell" symbol (for example, 20th on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), " "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (for example, 9th on the left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol There are seven types (for example, the fifth reel 32L). The numbers and arrangement order of various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that the total of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. Therefore, in a state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

  In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate with a prescribed number of game media being bet and the winning corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the benefit of providing the game media, Either the profit of re-playing or the transition of the gaming state is given.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line in which winning can be achieved. The main line ML is set as a line extending straight. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M and the lower design of the right reel 32R, the upper design of the left reel 32L, the upper design of the middle reel 32M and the upper design of the right reel 32R. Sub-line SL2 tied together, lower reel pattern of left reel 32L, lower reel of middle reel 32M and lower reel of right reel 32R, sub line SL3, lower reel of left reel 32L, middle reel of middle reel 32M and right reel 32R Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols, the winning is not established.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, a correspondence relationship between a combination of winning symbols and a privilege granted when winning is won will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a winning combination of symbols and a privilege given when a winning is achieved.

  The small role prizes for which the game media are provided are the first supplement prize, the second supplement prize, the third supplement prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize and the cherry prize. There is. Specifically, on the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “replay” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the “bell” symbol, It will be the first supplementary prize. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the “bell” symbol, then the second supplement winning Becomes On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the third supplement winning Becomes When one of the first to third supplementary prizes is awarded, the number of game media to be awarded is “1”.

  On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the first bell winning Becomes On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the second bell winning Becomes If any of the first to second bell prizes is awarded, the number of game media to be awarded is “11”.

  On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol, then the first watermelon prize Becomes On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, then the second watermelon prize Becomes When one of the first and second watermelon prizes is awarded, the number of game media to be awarded is “5”. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L becomes the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won even if the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R are both. When the cherry prize is won, the number of game media to be awarded is “2”.

  As a prize to be given a replay privilege that allows the player to play the next game without betting a game medium, a normal replay prize, a first chance replay prize, a second chance replay prize, a first RT replay prize, a There are 2RT replay prize, first falling replay prize and second falling replay prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, or the main line ML. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, a normal replay prize is given.

  On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the first chance replay It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the second chance replay It will be a prize.

  On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the first RT replay prize Becomes On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, then the second RT replay prize Becomes

  On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the first fall replay It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the second fall replay It will be a prize.

  When any one of the above replay prizes is awarded, a replay privilege that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium is given. Specifically, when one of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "3" is bet, the betting of the game medium is unnecessary, and the game of the next game is bet while the game medium of "3" is bet. It becomes possible to start the game.

  Of the above various replay prizes, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay prize, the first falling replay prize and the second falling replay prize not only serve as a trigger for granting the replay prize but also as a trigger for transition to the lottery mode. In this slot machine 10, a plurality of types of lottery modes are set in the lottery process for winning hands (FIG. 16) so that the types of lottery targets and the winning probabilities of the respective winning hands are different. It occurs when a replay prize that is a trigger for shifting to the lottery mode is established. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for shifting to each lottery mode will be described in detail later.

  There are a first BB prize, a second BB prize, a third BB prize, a fourth BB prize, a first RB prize, and a second RB prize as state transition prizes in which only the game status is changed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. If there is, the first BB win. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol, the It will be a 2BB prize. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol, the It will be a 3BB prize. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, It will be a 4BB prize. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the first RB It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the second RB It will be a prize.

  When the first BB prize, the second BB prize, the third BB prize, or the fourth BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Further, when the first RB winning or the second RB winning is established, the game state shifts to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state correspond to bonus states. The bonus state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit number of games is higher than the gaming states other than the bonus state. Specifically, a winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.5) than in other gaming states, and when winning the winning combination, each winning combination is won. The first bell prize will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as that in the other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the net increase expected value of the game medium per unit number of games is higher than in the gaming states other than the bonus state. The number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be smaller than that in the other game states, and in the bonus state, the number of game media per unit number of games is larger than that in the game states other than the bonus state. If the net increase expected value is high, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be larger than that in the other game states.

  The BB state among the bonus states continues for a plurality of games, and ends when the ending condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of execution of the game. Although the ending condition is arbitrary, the ending condition is that the total number of game media provided after the BB state is started in the slot machine 10 is the BB ending reference number (specifically, “350”) or more. Is set as. The end condition may be satisfied when the number of games executed in the BB state becomes the BB end reference number of games.

  The RB state among the bonus states continues for a plurality of games, and ends when the ending condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The ending condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, the ending condition is that the total number of game media given after the RB state is started is equal to or more than the RB ending reference number (specifically, “150”). Is set as. This RB end reference number is smaller than the BB end reference number. Therefore, the BB state is more advantageous for the player than the RB state. The ending condition may be satisfied when the number of games executed in the RB state becomes the RB ending reference number of games. In this case, by setting the RB end reference game number to be smaller than the BB end reference game number, it is possible to make the BB state a more advantageous game state for the player than the RB state.

  Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 as well as an image display device 63 are provided above the front door 12. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right, and when the slot machine 10 has an abnormality, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or the voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or the voice corresponding to the winning result is obtained. The sound output is controlled so that is output. Further, the speaker 62 is subjected to sound output control so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

  The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or the like. It may be another display device having a display surface, or may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is display-controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result of each game is displayed on the display surface. That is, the display effect is executed on the image display device 63.

  On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored at a position below the display window sections 21L, 21M, 21R, and a target to be awarded when winning a small win. In addition to displaying the number of game media, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, a display corresponding to the content of the notification is performed, and further the management result of the game history is notified. There is provided a dual-purpose display section 66 for displaying the following, and an advantageous section display section 67 for displaying corresponding to the fact that the game section is the advantageous section. The credit display unit 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green.

  FIG. 7A is a front view of the common display area 68 in which the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 are provided. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7A, a dual-purpose display section 66 provided by arranging two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b side by side in the horizontal direction and one light emitting section are provided. The advantageous section display section 67 is integrated.

  If any of the small winning awards (first to third supplementary winnings, first to second bell winnings, first to second watermelon winnings or cherry winnings) corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established, the small winning At the end of the game in which the winning combination has been achieved, the number of game media provided corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. Specifically, when any of the first to third supplementary prizes is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. Notifies that the game medium of "1" has been added. When one of the first to second bell prizes is established, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, so that the game medium of "11" is It is notified that it has been granted. When any of the first and second watermelon prizes is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is informed that the game medium of “” has been added. Further, when the cherry winning is achieved, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "2" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, whereby the game medium of "2" is given. Is notified. On the other hand, even if a winning that is not given a game medium such as any replay winning, any BB winning, and any RB winning is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. In this case, the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in the non-display state. The display of the number of game media provided on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is ended when the game media is bet to start the next game of the displayed game, and each segment is displayed at the timing of betting. The containers 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. Is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. A stop order in which the stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary, and a first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is arbitrary. And a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are optional.

  The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 includes the second RT replay winning data when the winning combination including the first bell winning data is won in the winning combination lottery process, the second RT replay winning data is winning when the winning combination including the first RT replay winning data is won. It may be executed when a winning combination is won, when a winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, or when winning a winning combination including the second falling replay winning data. Specifically, when the winning combination including the first bell winning data is won, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination of this time among the above-mentioned stop orders, the first bell winning is achieved. Is established. Then, when the first bell prize is established, the game medium of “11” is awarded to the player as already described.

  When the winning combination including the first RT replay winning data is won, the first RT replay winning is achieved when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time among the above-mentioned stopping orders. When the first RT replay prize is established, the lottery mode is shifted to the first RT mode more easily than in the normal mode to win a winning combination including any replay winning data (that is, any replay prize is easily established). .. In addition, when the winning combination including the second RT replay winning data is won, the second RT replay winning is achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time among the respective stopping orders. .. When the second RT replay prize is established, the lottery mode is easier to win the winning combination including any replay win data than the first RT mode (that is, any replay prize is easily established), and the second RT mode is entered. To do.

  When the winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, the first falling replay winning is avoided when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time among the above-mentioned stopping orders. It When the first falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but by avoiding the establishment of the first falling replay prize, the shift to the normal mode can be avoided. .. In addition, when the winning combination including the second falling replay winning data is won, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination of this time among the above-mentioned stopping orders, the second falling replay winning is won. Avoided. When the second falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but avoiding the transition to the first RT mode by avoiding establishment of the second falling replay prize. You can

  When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the dual-purpose display 66 is kept in the non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. At, a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification target is performed. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7B, and the display content of the stop order of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents of the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set to correspond to a part or all of the notification contents of the stop order in the image display device 63 Good.

  The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is different from the display content to be displayed when the display corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media to be provided or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8A, the image display device 63 has the same number as the number of stop operations required to end the game. Unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 8A, the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. An image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image G1, and an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G2. In the right unit display image G3, the image of "3" corresponding to the stopping order of the right reel 32R is displayed.

  While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8B. "L" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are stopped in the stop order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the dual-purpose display unit 66 performs display regardless of the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Accordingly, even if the display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

  The display range of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the dual-purpose display unit 66 as compared with the image display device 63. In addition, the dual-purpose display unit 66 exists on the opposite side of the image display device 63 side with the display window units 21L, 21M, and 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be visually recognized. As a result, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also reduces the player's attention to the dual-use display unit 66.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are performed. The display is started after the lottery process of the winning combination is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, the display may be started simultaneously or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. Further, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. Is terminated when occurs.

  The dual-purpose display section 66 is arranged on the center side of the common display area 68, whereas the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68. The advantageous section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is the advantageous section of the normal section and the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables a player to win a winning combination when winning a winning combination whose winning target is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a section corresponding to either the section in which the order is notified or the section in which the probability of transition to the ART state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is higher than the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables a player to win a winning combination when winning a winning combination whose winning target is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In the section in which the stop order is not notified, the probability of transition to the ART state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, is lower than the advantageous section, or the section in which the transition to the ART state does not occur.

  When the condition for shifting to the advantageous segment is satisfied in the normal segment and the segment shifts to the advantageous segment, the advantageous segment display unit 67 is turned on to start notification of the advantageous segment. Further, when the transition condition to the normal zone is satisfied in the advantageous zone and the vehicle shifts to the normal zone, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is turned off, thereby ending the notification of the advantageous zone. As a result, it becomes possible to inform the manager of the game hall or the like that it is an advantageous section. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66 collectively provided in the common display area 68 is turned on when the application of the game medium occurs, turned off at the start of the next game, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop order is displayed on the image display device 63, it is turned on and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in the configuration in which the advantageous section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 to prevent it from becoming too conspicuous to the player, the advantageous section display section in the common display area 68 is in an advantageous section. It is possible to positively cause a situation in which only 67 is in a lighting state, and the manager of the game hall can easily confirm the advantageous section display portion 67.

  In addition, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the advantageous period display unit 67 is maintained in the advantageous period, the advantageous period display unit 67 may perform a blinking display in a predetermined cycle in the advantageous period. Further, as the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67, another display device such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that causes the back surface of the housing 11. The main controller 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 81. The MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71. The substrate box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 81. Although the substrate box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the substrate box 81 can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 81. The main controller 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it is possible to visually recognize the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81. The MPU 72 can be viewed through the facing wall portion 82.

  The board box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front and rear. The plurality of case bodies are used to prevent separation of the case bodies and leave a trace of the case bodies when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged in parallel on one side of the substrate box 81 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. As a result, even if the case body is separated by breaking the part of the joint portion 83 while the separation of the case body is prevented by using the part of the joint portion 83, another joint portion 83 is then formed. It becomes possible to prevent separation of the case body again by bringing the case into the connected state. Further, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 83 is destroyed and a trace of the joint portion 83 is left, so that it is possible to visually confirm the joint portion 83 to know whether or not the case body is illegally separated. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to one side of the board box 81 other than the side where the coupling portions 83 are arranged in parallel so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, the trace can be left.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 in the front door 12 in an overlapping manner. The effect control device 90 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. The effect control device 90, like the main control device 70, has a control board housed in a board box.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 72 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and a medal insertion. The inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the mouth 45, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting the operations of the credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49, and the operation of the settlement button 51 are detected. Settling detection sensor 51a, payout detection sensor of hopper device 53, reset detection sensor for detecting operation of reset button 56 provided in power supply device 54, and setting for detecting that a setting key is inserted in setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as a key detection sensor are connected. Signal from the difference is input to the MPU72.

  To the output side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31, a selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a dual-purpose display unit 66, an advantageous section display unit 67, an effect control device 90, etc. are connected. .. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation drive of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after detection by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and guides them to the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when reception is prohibited. It has a function of discharging the medal to the medal tray 59 without being detected. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permission state and the acceptance prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is located at the acceptance permission position. And the position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permitted state and the acceptance prohibited state by switching the output state and the stopped state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

  Further, the MPU 72 executes the drive control of the hopper device 53 when the small winning combination is established and the medals are paid out. Further, when the game medium is added, the MPU 72 displays and controls the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that the number of the game media to which the game medium is added is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous section display unit 67 so as to notify that the advantageous section is an advantageous section when it is. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that the display corresponding to the game management result is performed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command for informing the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 to the effect control device 90. In this case, the display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is executed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, while the direct display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. That is, for the image display device 63 that is the target of the relatively complicated display control, direct display control is executed by the effect control device 90, and the dual-purpose display unit 66 that is the target of the relatively simple display control is executed. With respect to, the display control is directly executed in the MPU 72. As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of the degree of attention to the effect and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72.

  A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power supply unit from an external power supply. The monitored voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. Upon receiving the power failure signal, the MPU 72 executes the processing at the time of power failure, and after power recovery, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with an on-power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power cut in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power supply is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, data is stored and held in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied in the power supply unit during power cut (for example, one or two days). To be done. However, by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized.

  The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and effects. An MPU 92 is mounted on the production control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are also built in.

  It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip. In addition, the backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power supply unit during power cut of the power supply device 54 in a situation where the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. Good.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 and receives various commands from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. To be done.

  Although not shown, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM holds bit map format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the drawing list instructing the content of the image corresponding to each update timing is set to the VDP according to the determined execution content of the effect. Output. The VDP reads the image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display the image corresponding to the display data.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, the ROM 73, and the RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 of the production control device 90 are respectively produced. They are called MPU 92, production-side ROM 93, and production-side RAM 94.

  Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 10.

  In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization process, the interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and further various initializations are performed on the register group and the I / O device in the main MPU 72. Then, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the power is turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), the winning probability is kept. A setting process is executed (step S105). On the other hand, when the reset button 56 is turned on when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), the clearing process (step S104) is executed, and then the winning probability setting process is executed (step S105).

  In the clear processing, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, an area for storing the setting value of the slot machine 10 in the main RAM 74, an area for storing data indicating whether or not in the bonus state, and data for indicating the total number of game media to be imparted in the bonus state are stored. Area, area in which data indicating the game state is stored, area in which data for specifying the ending condition of the ART state is stored, area in which data indicating the game section is stored, data of the management result of the game history are stored Each area of the main RAM 74 including the created area is cleared to "0". As a result, when the clearing process is executed, the game is in the normal gaming state regardless of the state before the power is cut off and becomes the normal section, and the progress of the game is triggered by the occurrence of the abnormality before the power is cut off. If it is in the regulated state, the abnormal state is released. In the clearing process, the area (specifically, the total game number counter 74a and the advantageous game number counter 74b) in which the data of the management result of the game history is stored may be excluded from the target of clearing "0". ..

  In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display portion 65. If the clear process of the main RAM 74 (step S104) is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the credit display unit 65 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clear process (step S104). If is not executed, the display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power is cut off is displayed. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the reset button 56 is operated in the situation where the setting value is "setting 6", the setting value is updated to "setting 1". If the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process is ended. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 65 ends.

  After executing the winning probability setting process, initialization of the advantageous section is executed (step S106). In the initialization process of the advantageous zone, a process of initializing information about the advantageous zone is executed. The content of the initialization process of the advantageous section is the same as that of step S1307, step S1314, and step S1321 described later. As a result, when the winning probability setting process is executed, the game section is definitely the normal section. Note that the specific processing content of the initialization processing of the advantageous section will be described later. After performing the initialization process of the advantageous section, the process proceeds to the normal process (step S107). The normal processing will be described later in detail.

  When the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power recovery process, the main side RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal (step S108). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the setting value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and abnormal when it is "0" or "7" or more. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power failure time process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value in the main RAM 74 is checked to see if the value is normal.

  When a positive determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure process at the previous power interruption was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is restored in the register of the main MPU 72, thereby saving the register of the main MPU 72. The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the production side MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power shutdown (step S114).

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to “0”, whereby all the actuators connected to the output port are cleared. Is turned off (step S116), and error notification processing for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S104).

  Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

  In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1". When the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 and the power failure process is executed.

  The power failure flag is set when the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission is not completed, this process is terminated and the timer interrupt process is resumed to terminate the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared and all the actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  When "1" is not set in the power failure flag in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer is cleared to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process that enables the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 is performed. In step S206, stepping motor control processing for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S207, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not the reading result is normal.

  In step S208, timer subtraction processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S209, a counter process of outputting the result of counting the bet number of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the effect-side MPU 92 is performed. In step S211, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S212, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. In step S213, the game history is managed, and a management process for displaying the contents corresponding to the management result on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is executed. After that, in step S214, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes ends. The details of the management process in step S213 will be described later.

  Next, the normal process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301). After that, a start waiting process is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay prize has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay prizes has occurred, the replay process is performed to set the same number of bets as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. If no replay prize has occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, it is determined whether or not a medal has been inserted or the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the present start waiting process. It is determined whether or not, and if either is done, a medal insertion process for changing the bet number and the like is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. If neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the present start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

  After the start waiting process of step S302, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached the specified number (specifically, “3”) (step S303), and the bet number has not reached the specified number. Then, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the bet number has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). When the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the main line ML is activated, and then the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S305). Even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 by executing the acceptance prohibition process, the medal is ejected to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. After that, a lottery process for winning a winning combination in the current game is executed (step S306), and the value of the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0" (step S306). (S307: YES), a reel control process for driving and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of this time is executed (step S308).

  Then, the medium adding process is executed (step S309). In the medium giving process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for giving the player a number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when giving a virtual medal, a value corresponding to the present small winning a prize is added to the credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number. Drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that a number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage number are paid out to the medal tray 59. In addition, in the medium addition process, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is display-controlled so that the display corresponding to the number of the game mediums which is the object of the present addition is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is continued until a bet on the game media is newly made.

  After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). In addition, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the game hall management computer is executed (step S311). Further, on condition that the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S312: YES), the acceptance permission process is executed (step S313). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

<Structure for lottery>
Next, prior to the description of the winning combination lottery processing in step S306 of the normal processing (FIG. 12), a configuration for performing various kinds of lottery in the main MPU 72 will be described. 13 and 14 are explanatory views for explaining the random number circuit group 100 provided on the main control board 71.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the random number circuit group 100 is provided with first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. The random number circuit group 100 is provided with first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d, respectively. In the random number circuit group 100, a shared clock circuit 104 that inputs a clock signal in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d, respectively. First to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d for individually inputting clock signals are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 14, first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are provided with first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l each having an 8-bit storage area. The values of the first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l are from the shared clock circuit 104 provided in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l as shown in FIG. It is updated by inputting a clock signal to the 12 shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. For example, in the case of the first shared random number circuit 101a, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the first shared random number circuit 101a, and the random number generation circuit receives the clock signal. Thus, the 8-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the first random number counter 106a is updated. For example, in the case of the eighth shared random number circuit 101h, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the eighth shared random number circuit 101h, and the random number generation circuit outputs the clock signal. By receiving the data, the 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the eighth random number counter 106h is updated. The random number generation circuit is provided in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

  The signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is branched into twelve in the main control board 71, and the branched signal paths are among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. It is connected to the corresponding random number circuit. Therefore, the clock signal is input to each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at the same timing. As a result, the update cycle of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is constant at the cycle in which the clock signal is output from the shared clock circuit 104, and the update timing of the random number is also updated from the shared clock circuit 104. It becomes constant at the timing when the clock signal is output.

  The 8-bit random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated by generating random numbers "0" to "255" in a predetermined order and generating all of these random numbers once. It is performed so that one cycle of update is completed. Then, this update cycle is repeated. In this case, the update order of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is different from each other. For example, in the first shared random number circuit 101a, the random number update order is set so that the random numbers increase by 1 in ascending order from "0" to "255", and the second shared random number circuit 101b. Is set to update the random numbers so that the random numbers decrease by 1 from “255” to “0” in descending order, and the third shared random number circuit 101c updates all even numbers in ascending order. The update order of the random numbers is set so that all the odd numbers are updated in ascending order later, and the fourth to twelfth shared random number circuits 101d to 101l have update orders different from these update orders and set to mutually different update orders. Has been done. As a result, even if the random number update cycles and update timings in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are mutually constant as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l have the same configuration. It is possible to prevent each random number from always becoming the same at each update timing.

  Further, when the random number is updated once in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, a new update cycle is started from an initial value different from the initial value of the update cycle. , The manner of selecting the initial value in relation to the number of update cycles is different in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. As a result, it is possible to diversify the random number combination patterns of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at each update timing.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b are respectively provided with a thirteenth random number counter 106m and a fourteenth random number counter 106n each having a 16-bit storage area, and a third dedicated random number counter 106n. The random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d are provided with a fifteenth random number counter 106o and a sixteenth random number counter 106p each having an 8-bit storage area. The values of the thirteenth to sixteenth random number counters 106m to 106p are individually provided to the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d as shown in FIG. It is updated by inputting a clock signal from the circuits 105a to 105d to the corresponding first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d.

  For example, in the case of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the random number generation circuit outputs the clock signal. By receiving the data, the 16-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the thirteenth random number counter 106m is updated. In the case of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, and the random number generation circuit outputs the clock signal. By receiving this, the 16-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the fourteenth random number counter 106n is updated. Further, in the case of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the random number generation circuit concerned outputs the clock signal. By receiving this, the 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the fifteenth random number counter 106o is updated. In the case of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, the clock signal output from the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, and the random number generation circuit outputs the clock signal. By receiving this, the 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the 16th random number counter 106p is updated.

  The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are not individually provided with the clock circuits as described above, but are provided with the shared clock circuit 104 that is common to the first to twelfth random number circuits 101a to 101l. The update cycle of random numbers and the update timing of random numbers in the 12 shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are constant. On the other hand, the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are individually provided with the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d. Specifically, the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is connected to the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b. The route is connected to the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the signal route for transmitting the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is connected to the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d. The signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from is connected to the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d.

  The output cycles of the clock signals in the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d are different from each other. As a result, it is possible to make the update cycle of random numbers and the update timing of random numbers in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d unique. Further, the output cycle of each clock signal of the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d is different from the output cycle of the clock signal in the shared clock circuit 104. Thus, the update cycle of random numbers and the update timing of random numbers in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are made different from the update cycle of random numbers and update timing of random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. Is possible.

  In updating the 16-bit random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, random numbers "0" to "65535" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once. Then, one cycle of updating is completed. Then, this update cycle is repeated. In this case, the update order of the random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is different from each other. For example, the random number update order is set so that the first dedicated random number circuit 102a updates all even numbers in ascending order and then all odd numbers in ascending order, and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b updates all odd numbers in ascending order. The random number update order is set so that all even numbers are updated in ascending order later. As a result, not only the random number update period and the random number update timing but also the random number update order can be made different between the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. Also, the uniqueness of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b can be secured.

  The configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b may have the same random number update order. Even in this case, the initial values when starting the updating of the random numbers when the supply of the operating power to the main control device 70 is started are mutually exclusive in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. By making them different, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain the same random number.

  In updating the 8-bit random numbers in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, random numbers “0” to “255” are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once. As a result, one cycle of updating is completed. Then, this update cycle is repeated. In this case, the update order of the random numbers in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is different from each other. For example, the updating order of the random numbers is set so that the third dedicated random number circuit 102c updates all the even numbers in the descending order and then updates all the odd numbers in the descending order, and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d updates all the odd numbers in the descending order. The update order of random numbers is set so that all even numbers are updated later in descending order. As a result, not only the update cycle of random numbers and the update timing of random numbers but also the update order of random numbers can be made different between the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Also, the uniqueness of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d can be secured.

  The configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d may have the same random number update order. Even in this case, the initial values when starting the update of the random numbers when the supply of the operating power to the main control device 70 is started are mutually exclusive in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. By making them different, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain the same random number.

  The random numbers generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d serve as a start lever of the game in a situation where a new game can be started. When 41 is operated, it is written in the first to 16th latch registers 103a to 103p provided corresponding to the respective random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d. For details of the configuration, as shown in FIG. 13, a latch signal is output to the main MPU 72 when the start lever 41 is operated as a start timing of the game in a situation where a new game can be started. A latch signal output unit 107 for doing so is provided. The signal path for transmitting the latch signal output from the latch signal output unit 107 is branched into 16 lines in the main control board 71, and the branched signal paths are among the first to 16th latch registers 103a to 103p. It is connected to the corresponding register. Thereby, when the latch signal is output from the latch signal output unit 107 based on the operation of the start lever 41, the first to the twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to the fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. The random numbers generated in each are written in the latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d. Then, the random numbers written in the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p are acquired and used as necessary when performing various kinds of lottery in the main MPU 72.

  Here, the random numbers generated in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d and written in the thirteenth to sixteenth latch registers 103m to 103p are such that the kind of lottery process to be used is uniquely determined. There is. Specifically, the 16-bit random number generated by the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and written in the thirteenth latch register 103m is used in a lottery process of a winning combination described later, and is generated by the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. The 16-bit random number written in the 14-latch register 103n is used in a transition lottery process to be described later, and the 8-bit random number generated in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and written in the 15th latch register 103o is described later. The 8-bit random number used in the transition lottery process for the present omen state and generated in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d and written in the 16th latch register 103p is used in the transition lottery process to be described later. It As described above, the random numbers in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are updated in the unique update cycle and the unique update order in the unique update order. In this case, the random numbers of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used in the lottery process of the winning combination, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section, the transition lottery process for the present omen state and the transition lottery process to the ART state. With the configuration, it is possible to perform each of these lottery processes independently while not synchronizing each other.

  In addition, the lottery processing of the winning combination is performed in each game, and in the normal section, the transition lottery processing to the advantageous section is frequently executed in each game. Further, the transition lottery process for the aura and the transition lottery process for the ART state are highly likely to be performed in the game in which the transition lottery process for the advantageous section has been performed, and further, whether or not there is a transition to the ART state is performed. This is a lottery process that decides. In such a situation, the random numbers of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used in each of the lottery processes, so that the results of each of the lottery processes are not synchronized with each other. The lottery process can be strictly performed.

  On the other hand, for the random numbers generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and written in the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l, the type of lottery process to be used is uniquely determined. Instead, it is used in any one of a plurality of predetermined lottery processes. The number of types of the predetermined plural kinds of lottery processing is set to be larger than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. The use order of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is predetermined, and when a predetermined lottery process is executed among a plurality of types of lottery processes, for example, the first shared random number circuit 101a. Is used, the random number written in the first latch register 103a is used. For example, when the eighth shared random number circuit 101h is used, it is written in the eighth latch register 103h. Random numbers are used. That is, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are also used in a plurality of types of lottery processing set as a number larger than the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to reduce the number of random number circuits as compared with a configuration in which a random number circuit is individually set for each of a plurality of types of lottery processing.

  In the configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are also used in a plurality of types of lottery processing in this way, the random number update in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is the same as described above. It is performed with a cycle and the same update timing. The random numbers generated by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are all 8-bit random numbers. Thus, for example, when a predetermined lottery process included in a plurality of types of lottery processes is executed, the random number of the first shared random number circuit 101a is acquired at the first lottery timing and the eighth shared random number at the second lottery timing. Even if the random numbers of the circuit 101h are obtained, it is possible to treat them as being updated in a certain manner. On the other hand, since the random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated in different update orders, they are not completely synchronized. Accordingly, when a plurality of lottery processes among the plurality of types of lottery processes are executed in the same game, it is possible to prevent the random numbers acquired in the plurality of lottery processes from being the same value. .. By the way, the above-mentioned plural kinds of lottery processing include a lottery processing for shifting to a false omen state, a lottery processing for shifting to a chance state, a lottery processing for additional games, a lottery processing for shifting to A loop, and a shift to B loop, which will be described later. Includes lottery processing.

  Next, a random number acquisition process executed by the main MPU 72 to acquire each of the above random numbers will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The random number acquisition process is executed as a process of a common subroutine whenever it is necessary for the main MPU 72 to perform various kinds of lottery.

  When the lottery process to be executed this time is the lottery process of the winning combination, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a becomes the target of using the random number (step S401: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the thirteenth latch register 103m in which the random number of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S402).

  When the lottery process to be executed this time is the transitional lottery process to the advantageous section, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is the target of using the random number (step S403: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the fourteenth latch register 103n in which the random number of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b at the time of operating the start lever 41 for starting the game this time is written (step S404).

  When the lottery process to be executed this time is the transition lottery process for the present omen state, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is a target for using the random number (step S405: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the fifteenth latch register 103o in which the random number of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S406).

  When the lottery process to be executed this time is the transition lottery process to the ART state, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d becomes a target for using the random number (step S407: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the 16th latch register 103p in which the random number of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is written when the start lever 41 for starting the current game is operated (step S408).

  If the lottery process to be executed this time is neither a lottery process of a winning combination, a lottery process of shifting to an advantageous zone, a transition lottery process of a sign state or a transition lottery process of changing to an ART state, the first to twelfth shared random numbers The circuits 101a to 101l are targets for using random numbers (step S407: NO). In this case, first, the value of the random number pointer provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S409). The random number pointer is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which one of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used for the random number, and the numerical information of "0" to "11" is displayed. Can be taken. Then, when the random number pointer is “0”, the first shared random number circuit 101a is a target for using the random number, and when the random number pointer is “1”, the second shared random number circuit 101b is a target for using the random number, When the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c becomes a target for use of random numbers. When the random number pointer is "m", the m + 1th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l use random numbers. The target (m is an integer of 0 or more).

  When the value of the random number pointer after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "11" (step S410: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S411). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is incremented by 1 each time it is used in the lottery process in the numerical range of "0" to "11", and becomes the minimum value when the maximum value of the numerical range is exceeded. It will be looped back. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used for random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuit 101a to be used in accordance with a predetermined order each time the random number is used. 101l to 101l are sequentially changed, and the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in the last order are used, the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in the first order are used again.

  When a negative determination is made in step S410, or when the process of step S411 is executed, the random number of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is the current random number. Numerical value information of random numbers is acquired from the latch register written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the game (step S412). As a result, even if the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared in the lottery process of the number of types exceeding the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, the first to twelfth shared. Within the range of the number of shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, it becomes possible to obtain random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l in each lottery process.

  Further, the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is less than or equal to the number of lottery processes that occur simultaneously in one game among the lottery processes using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. Has become. Thereby, even if a plurality of lottery processes among the lottery processes to be used occur at the same time in one game, the random numbers generated by the different random number circuits 101a to 101l are obtained in the plurality of lottery processes. Is possible.

<Winning lottery process>
Next, the lottery process of the winning combination executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S501). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process of the winning combination, the random number written in the 13th latch register 103m is acquired from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. More specifically, as described above, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a generates random numbers “0” to “65535”, confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The random number written in the thirteenth latch register 103m is acquired by the first dedicated random number circuit 102a at the timing of positive determination.

  After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for judging the winning / non-winning of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S502). In this slot machine 10, six-stage winning probabilities from “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared in advance, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 to perform the ON operation and the predetermined operation. Thus, it is possible to set which of the winning probabilities the lottery process of the winning combination is to be executed. “Setting n + 1” has a winning probability more advantageous to the player than “setting n”. Specifically, since the winning probability of the winning combination that triggers the transition to the BB state is higher in “setting n + 1” than in “setting n”, “setting n + 1” is more player than “setting n”. Will be advantageous to. In addition, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72 even if the setting values are at the same stage: the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Further, as a game state, a bonus state (BB state and RB state) exists in addition to the state of each of the lottery modes. In step S502, the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current lottery mode, and the current game state is selected.

  Taking the case of “setting 3” as an example, a lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-bonus state will be described. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 17, an index value IV is set in the normal mode lottery table, and a winning combination is associated with each index value IV and a point value PV is set. The point value PV defines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a.

  Specifically, for the index value IV = 1, the first bell winning data and the first compensation winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 18, when the first stop (the reel for which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 32L, the second stop target and the third stop target are selected. The first bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the first supplemental prize is surely generated.

  In the present slot machine 10, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed until the specified time (190 milliseconds) has elapsed after the stop buttons 42 to 44 were operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and also to prevent a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the slidable reels 32L, 32M, 32R is limited as described above, one reel 32L, 32M, 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbol may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the phenomenon is also called “missing”). Say). The first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which no dropout occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a corresponding order, The first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first BB prize, the second BB prize, the third BB prize, the fourth BB prize, the first RB prize and the second RB prize are the stop button 42 for the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a winning mode in which a dropout may occur depending on the stop operation timing of ~ 44.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the index value IV = 2 is set with the first bell winning data and the second compensation winning data. When the index value IV = 2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second stop target and the third stop target The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second supplemental prize is surely established.

  For the index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 17, the first bell winning data and the third compensation winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 18, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second stop target and the third stop target The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the third supplemental prize is surely established.

  As shown in FIG. 17, only the first bell winning data is set to the index value IV = 4. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 18, the first bell prize is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. . As shown in FIG. 17, only the second bell winning data is set to the index value IV = 17. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 17, as shown in FIG. 18, the second bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. .

  As shown in FIG. 17, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 5. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 18, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the first watermelon prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. As shown in FIG. 17, only the second watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 18. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 18, as shown in FIG. 18, the second watermelon prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the second watermelon winning combination may not be established depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  As shown in FIG. 17, only cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 6. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 18, the cherry winning can be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, the cherry prize may not be established.

  As shown in FIG. 17, only the third BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 7. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 18, the third BB winning may be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the third BB winning may not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the fourth BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 8. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 18, the fourth BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the fourth BB winning may not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 17, only the first RB winning data is set to the index value IV = 9. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 18, the first RB winning can be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first RB winning combination may not be established.

  As shown in FIG. 17, only the first BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 19. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 19, as shown in FIG. 18, the first BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first BB winning may not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 20. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 20, as shown in FIG. 18, the second BB winning may be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second BB winning may not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the second RB winning data is set to the index value IV = 21. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 21, as shown in FIG. 18, the second RB winning may be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second RB winning combination may not be established.

  Here, the winning data other than the bonus winning data including the first to fourth BB winning data and the first to second RB winning data is erased in the winning game regardless of whether the winning is achieved, Will not be carried over to the next and subsequent games. On the other hand, the bonus winning data is stored and held until the corresponding bonus winning is established even in the games subsequent to the winning game, except when the main RAM 74 is cleared. . In this case, the index value IV corresponding to all the bonus winning data is excluded from the lottery target in the game in which the bonus winning data is carried over. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus winning data from being newly stored even though the bonus winning data is already stored and held, and a plurality of bonus winning data are not accumulated and stored. It becomes possible to do so.

  As shown in FIG. 17, only the first chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 10. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 18, the first chance replay prize is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the second chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 22. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 22, as shown in FIG. 18, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the normal replay win data and the first RT replay win data are set in the index values IV = 11 to 16. In this case, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 18, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop (the reel for which the second stop command is generated) is the middle reel 32M. In the case where the third stop (reel for which the stop command is finally generated) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and otherwise The normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42- The first RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the other cases, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42- The first RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the other cases, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42- The first RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the other cases, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42- The first RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the other cases, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the other cases, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the winning when the index value IV = 3. The respective probabilities of becoming are about 1 / 6.6. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is about 1 / 13.1. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 is about 1/164. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 is about 1/423. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 8 are about 1/437, respectively. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9 is about 1/328. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10 is about 1/655. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 12, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 13, and the winning when the index value IV = 13. The probability of being, the probability of being won when the index value IV = 14, the probability of being won when the index value IV = 15, and the probability of being won when the index value IV = 16 are respectively about 1/41 Is. In addition, the probability of being won when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 16.4. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 18 is about 1/146. Further, the probability of being won when the index value IV = 19 and the probability of being won when the index value IV = 20 are both about 1/437. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 21 is about 1/328. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 22 is about 1/655.

  Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as already described, as the winning data of the index values IV = 11 to 16, the first RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1/41. When the winning is achieved by any one of the index values IV = 11 to 16, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop corresponding to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

  Next, the first RT mode lottery table selected in the case of “setting 3” and the first RT mode will be described. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first RT mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17). ) Is the same. In addition, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 23 to 28 in the first RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table, respectively. Is the same as.

  In this case, the index values IV = 1 to 6, 23 to 24 are set to a role that allows the addition of the game medium, and the index values IV = 1 to 6, 23 to 24 are set. Since the winning data and the respective winning probabilities are the same as the index values IV = 1 to 6 and 17 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table, respectively, the types of winning combinations that allow the game media to be awarded and those winning combinations. The winning probabilities of are the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

  Further, the bonus winning data is set in the index values IV = 7 to 9 and 25 to 27 in the first RT mode lottery table, similarly to the index values IV = 7 to 9 and 19 to 21 in the normal mode lottery table. The winning probability is the same as that in the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. In addition, chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 10, 28 in the first RT mode lottery table as in the index value IV = 10, 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the normal mode. It is the same as the lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each chance replay combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

  The winning combination data set to the index values IV = 11 to 22 is different from that in the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, second RT replay win data is set as win data of index values IV = 11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay win data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 6.8.

  When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42- The second RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and otherwise the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42- The second RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and otherwise the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42- The second RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and otherwise the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42- The second RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and otherwise the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and otherwise the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  In the first RT mode, any one of the index values IV = 11 to 16 wins, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop corresponds to the winning combination. When it becomes, the second RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination becomes the second RT mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, as the winning data of the index values IV = 17 to 22, the first falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 17 to 22 is about 1 / 10.9.

  If the index value IV = 17 is won in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 20, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the first fall replay prize is associated with the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. It certainly occurs regardless of. In the case where the index value IV = 18 is won, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 19, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 20, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 21, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 22, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When the mode is shifted to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination becomes the normal mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, a role that allows the replay prize to be established is set for the index values IV = 10 to 22, 28. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already described, the winning probability of the winning combination (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probability) that enables the establishment of the replay prize in the first RT mode is about 1 / It is 4.1. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 6.7. That is, the first RT mode is a lottery mode having a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

  Next, the second RT mode lottery table selected in the case of “setting 3” and the second RT mode will be described. 21 and 22 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17). ) And the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 19). In addition, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 18 to 23 in the second RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are the index values IV = 17 to 22 and the index value IV in the normal mode lottery table. It is the same as each of the index values IV = 23 to 28 in the 2RT mode lottery table.

  In this case, the index values IV = 1 to 6, 18 to 19 are set to a role that enables the addition of the game medium, and the index values IV = 1 to 6, 18 to 19 are respectively set. The winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV = 1 to 6, 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV = 1 to 6 in the first RT mode lottery table. By being the same as each of 23 to 24, the types of winning combinations that allow game media to be awarded and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Has become.

  Further, the index values IV = 7 to 9, 20 to 22 in the second RT mode lottery table include the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the normal mode lottery table and the index values IV in the first RT mode lottery table. = 7-9, 25-27, the bonus winning data is set, and the winning probability thereof is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Further, the index value IV = 10,23 in the second RT mode lottery table has the same chance as the index value IV = 10,22 in the normal mode lottery table and the index value IV = 10,28 in the first RT mode lottery table. Replay win data is set, and the win probability thereof is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each chance replay combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

  The winning combination data set to the index values IV = 11 to 17 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21, as the winning data of the index values IV = 11 to 16, the second falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. . The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 6.8.

  When the index value IV = 11 in the second RT mode lottery table is won, as shown in FIG. 22, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay prize is the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 It certainly happens regardless of. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 17. The probability of winning at the index value IV = 17 is set higher than the probability of winning other winning combinations, and specifically, the winning is about 1 / 5.5. When this index value IV = 17 is won, the normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, a role that allows the replay prize to be established is set for the index values IV = 10 to 17, 23. Since the winning probabilities of these winning roles are set to the probabilities already described, the winning probability (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probability) of the winning combination that enables the establishment of the replay prize in the second RT mode is about 1 /3.0. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 6.7 and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1 / 4.1. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode having a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first RT mode and the second RT mode may have the same replay probability, and the replay probability is slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode. The configurations may be the same.

  In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 refers to the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination in the BB state or the RB state. The internal lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is stored when the bonus lottery table to be stored is stored and the bonus winning corresponding to the winning combination is not established. Is remembered.

  In the bonus lottery table, about 1 / 1.5 is won for the winning combination, and when the winning combination is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and the reels 32L are reeled. , 32M, 32R with respect to the rotational positions of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first bell winning is achieved. In addition, in the bonus lottery table, the winning role of the first watermelon is won by about 1 / 6.6, and the winning role of the cherry is won by about 1 / 7.8. These first watermelon prize and cherry prize are not established depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By setting the bonus lottery table as described above, in the BB state or the RB state, the first bell prize is basically established in each game, and the game medium of “11” is given. However, since the first watermelon prize or the cherry prize may be established, the game medium of "5" is given when the first watermelon prize is established, and the game medium of "2" is provided when the cherry prize is established. Granted. On the other hand, the BB state ends when the total number of game media added after the BB state is started reaches the BB end reference number (for example, “350”) or more, and the RB state is the RB state. It ends when the total number of game media given since the start becomes equal to or larger than the RB end reference number (for example, "150"). Therefore, the number of games required until the BB state and the RB state are finished varies depending on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination and whether or not the dropout occurs. The bonus lottery table is common among the set values of “1” to “6” that change the advantage of the slot machine 10.

  In the internal lottery table, winning data corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 17, 18, 22 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) are set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV. In addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set to be the total winning probability of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, when the bonus winning combination is in the internal winning state, although the winning combination of the winning combination and the winning combination of the game medium is the same as the normal mode and the replay probability is the same as the normal mode, No bonus winning combination is won, and no winning combination that triggers the transition to the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is won.

  Here, in any of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV and “ There are index values IV having different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6". 23A to 23C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the index value IV having different winning probabilities between the setting values of "1" to "6", and FIG. 23A is the normal mode. 23B shows the case of the first RT mode lottery table, and FIG. 23C shows the case of the second RT mode lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, in the normal mode lottery table, the index values IV = 17 to 22 are index values IV having different winning probabilities between the set values of “1” to “6”, and the index value IV = 1 to 16 are the index values IV having the same winning probability among the setting values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 23B, in the first RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 23 to 28 are index values IV having different winning probabilities between the set values of “1” to “6”, and the index values IV In the case where IV = 1 to 22 are set values of “1” to “6”, the winning probability is the same index value IV. As shown in FIG. 23C, in the second RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 18 to 23 are index values IV having different winning probabilities between the set values of “1” to “6”, and the index values IV IV = 1 to 17 are index values IV having the same winning probability among the setting values of “1” to “6”.

  That is, in any of the lottery tables, the index value IV having the same winning probability between the set values of “1” to “6” is the index value IV of the front range in which the index value IV = 1 becomes a serial number. The index values IV having different winning probabilities between the set values of “1” to “6” are index values IV in the order next to the last index value IV in the front side range to the last index value IV. The index numbers IV in the rear range are serialized. In this way, the index values IV having the same winning probability among the setting values of "1" to "6" are aggregated in the front range, and the index values having different winning probabilities among the setting values of "1" to "6". By consolidating the IVs in the rear range, setting of the index value IV having the same winning probability and the setting of the index value IV having different winning probabilities among the setting values of "1" to "6" in the designing stage of the slot machine 10 It becomes easier to make corrections.

  In each lottery table, although the winning probability is different between the set values of “1” to “6”, the index value IV included in the rear range is different, but is set to each of the index values IV included in the rear range. The winning data and the winning probability are common between the lottery tables. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, the index values IV = 17 to 22 are included in the rear range as shown in FIG. 23A, and in the first RT mode lottery table, FIG. ), The index values IV = 23 to 28 are included in the rear range, and in the second RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 18 to 23 are included in the rear range as shown in FIG. Included in. In this case, the index value IV = 17 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 23 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV = 18 in the second RT mode lottery table are set winning data and The winning probabilities are the same, and the index value IV = 18 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 24 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV = 19 in the second RT mode lottery table. The set winning data and the winning probability are the same, and the index value IV = 19 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. Index The winning value and the winning probability that are set are the same as each other, and the index value IV = 20 in the normal mode lottery table and the index value IV = 26 in the first RT mode lottery table. The index data IV = 21 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same winning data and the same winning probability, and the index value IV = 21 in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. The index value IV = 27 in the second RT mode lottery table and the index value IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same winning data and the same winning probability, and the index value IV = 22 in the normal mode lottery table. And the lottery table for the 1st RT mode That index value IV = 28 and that have been set winning data and winning probability index value IV = 23 in lottery table for the first 2RT mode is identical to each other. As a result, it is possible to make the types of winning combinations having different winning probabilities different between the set values of “1” to “6” in each lottery table, and to make the winning combination of each winning combination in each lottery table. It is possible to make the winning probability of each set value the same.

  By the way, an index value with only the second bell winning data, an index value with only the second watermelon winning data, an index value with only the first BB winning data, and an index with only the second BB winning data. For each winning probability of the value, the index value in which only the second RB winning data is set, and the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set, the winning probability is higher for the larger setting value than for the smaller setting value. It is set to have a high tendency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a large set value is more advantageous to the player than a small set value, for some index values, a large set value wins a smaller set value. The configuration may be set so that the probability tends to be low.

  As already described, the same winning data is set for the index values IV = 1 to 10 included in the front side range in each lottery table, and the winning probabilities are also the same. Accordingly, in each lottery table, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations having the same winning probability among the set values of “1” to “6” and having the same types of winning data set are the same. It becomes possible.

  In the configuration in which the front side range and the rear side range are set as described above, in the front side range, there are a role that enables the addition of the game medium, a role that enables the replay prize, and a role that enables the bonus prize. In addition to being set, also in the rear range, there are set a role that allows the addition of a game medium, a role that enables a replay prize, and a role that enables a bonus prize. That is, the winning combination that allows the game medium to be provided is mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of those winning combinations lose the continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, the winning combination that allows replay winning is mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index value IV of these winning combinations loses continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, the winning combinations that allow bonus winning are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these winning combinations lose continuity between the front range and the rear range. Then, there is a possibility that the processing configuration for grasping the winning combination becomes complicated in various processes after the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination.

  In addition, in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the index value set in the latter half of the front side range is the winning data and the winning data for causing the transition between the lottery modes. Since the winning data for changing the replay probability is set, the first index value IV in the rear range is different in each lottery table. For example, the index value IV in which only the second bell winning data is set is "17" in the normal mode lottery table, "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "18" in the second RT mode lottery table. Become. Further, for example, the index value IV in which only the first BB winning data is set is "19" in the normal mode lottery table, "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. Becomes Further, for example, the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set is "22" in the normal mode lottery table, "28" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "2" in the second RT mode lottery table. 23 ". In this case, if different index values IV are to be treated as the same winning combination in various processes after the execution of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 16), the index value is calculated every time the processing for specifying the relevant winning combination is performed. It is necessary to understand not only the IV but also the current lottery mode, which may complicate the processing configuration.

  In order to eliminate the above inconvenience. In the slot machine 10, the offset table 111 is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the offset table 111.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the winning number information is set in the offset table 111. Numerical value information of "1" to "41" is set as a serial number as the information of the winning number. Then, in the offset table 111, each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, each index value IV of the first RT mode lottery table, and each index value IV of the second RT mode lottery table are "1" to "41". It is associated with information of one of the winning numbers. This association is a role that enables the establishment of a replay prize, and a group of small roles that enables the provision of game media, a group of bonus roles that enables the formation of a bonus prize. Each of the groups of replay roles is formed by the information of the winning numbers which are serial numbers. Further, this association is performed so that it can be handled as information of the same winning number even between the lottery modes in which the winning combinations in which the same type of winning data is set are different.

  Specifically, the group of information of winning numbers that are serial numbers of "1" to "8" is the group of small wins, and the group of information of winning numbers that is serial numbers of "9" to "14" is a bonus. The offset table 111 is set so that the group of the winning number information which becomes the winning combination group and the serial number after “15” becomes the group of the replay winning combination. In addition, in the group of replay roles, the replay roles for which the normal replay winning data is not set in the information of the winning numbers of “15” and “16” are collected, and the information of the winning numbers after “17” is the normal replay. Replay roles for which winning data has been set are aggregated.

  In each lottery table, the index value IV of “1” is set to the first bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data, but the index value IV = 1 is “1” in any lottery table. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the first bell win data and the second supplement win data are set to the index value IV of "2", but the index value IV = 2 is "2" in any lottery table. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the first bell win data and the third supplement win data are set to the index value IV of "3", but the index value IV = 3 is "3" in any lottery table. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, only the first bell winning data is set to the index value IV of "4", but the index value IV = 4 is set to the information of the winning number "4" in any lottery table. Has been done.

  The second bell winning data is set as the index value IV of “17” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “23” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “18” in the second RT mode lottery table. Although only “4” is set, the information of the winning number “5” is set as the index value IV. As a result, it is possible to handle the winning combinations having the same winning data that are set but different index values IV in each drawing table as the same information in various processes after the winning process of the winning combinations (FIG. 16).

  In each lottery table, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV of "5", but the index value IV = 5 is set to the information of the winning number of "6" in any lottery table. Has been done.

  The second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV of "18" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "24" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "19" in the second RT mode lottery table. Although only "7" is set, information of the winning number "7" is set as the index value IV. As a result, it is possible to handle the winning combinations having the same winning data that are set but different index values IV in each drawing table as the same information in various processes after the winning process of the winning combinations (FIG. 16).

  In each lottery table, only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV of “6”, but the information of the winning number of “8” is set to the index value IV = 6 in any lottery table. There is. In each lottery table, only the third BB winning data is set to the index value IV of "7", but the information of the winning number "9" is set to the index value IV = 7 in any lottery table. ing. In each lottery table, only the fourth BB winning data is set to the index value IV of "8", but the information of the winning number of "10" is set to the index value IV = 8 in any lottery table. ing.

  Only the first BB winning data is included in the index value IV of “19” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “25” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “20” in the second RT mode lottery table. However, the information of the winning number “11” is set as the index value IV. As a result, it is possible to handle the winning combinations having the same winning data that are set but different index values IV in each drawing table as the same information in various processes after the winning process of the winning combinations (FIG. 16).

  Only the second BB winning data is included in the index value IV of “20” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “26” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “21” in the second RT mode lottery table. However, the information of the winning number “12” is set as the index value IV. As a result, it is possible to handle the winning combinations having the same winning data that are set but different index values IV in each drawing table as the same information in various processes after the winning process of the winning combinations (FIG. 16).

  In each lottery table, only the first RB winning data is set to the index value IV of "9", but the information of the winning number of "13" is set to the index value IV = 9 in any lottery table. ing.

  Only the second RB winning data is included in the index value IV of “21” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “27” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “22” in the second RT mode lottery table. However, the information of the winning number "14" is set as the index value IV. As a result, it is possible to handle the winning combinations having the same winning data that are set but different index values IV in each drawing table as the same information in various processes after the winning process of the winning combinations (FIG. 16).

  In each lottery table, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV of “10”, but the index value IV = 10 is the information of the winning number of “15” in any of the lottery tables. It is set.

  The second chance replay win is selected for the index value IV of “22” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “28” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “23” in the second RT mode lottery table. Although only data is set, information of the winning number "16" is set as the index value IV. As a result, it is possible to handle the winning combinations having the same winning data that are set but different index values IV in each drawing table as the same information in various processes after the winning process of the winning combinations (FIG. 16).

  For the winning numbers after "17", the index value IV is not standardized in each lottery table, and information of individual winning numbers is set for each index value IV of each lottery table. This is because the types of winning data set in the index value IV associated with the winning numbers of "17" and thereafter are not common between the lottery tables. Specifically, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set in the normal mode lottery table are set with the winning number information of "17" to "22", respectively. ing. In addition, in the first RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the second RT replay winning data are set are information of winning numbers of “23” to “28”, respectively. In addition, the index values IV = 17 to 22 in which the normal replay winning data and the first falling replay winning data are set are information of winning numbers of “29” to “34”, respectively. In addition, in the second RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the second falling replay winning data are set are information of winning numbers of “35” to “40”, respectively. In addition, the index value IV = 17, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, is set with the winning number information of “41”.

  Since the offset table 111 is provided as described above, the combination of the game medium, the combination of the replay winning combination and the combination of the bonus winning combination are mixed in the front range and the rear range. It is possible to handle the winning combination in a state in which the winning combinations are collected for each winning combination in the same group in various processes after the lottery process (FIG. 16). Further, winning combinations in which the same winning data is set but different index values IV are set between the respective lottery tables are treated as the same information in various processing after the winning lottery processing (FIG. 16). It becomes possible. Furthermore, when transmitting the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 16) to the effecting side MPU 92, the information of the winning number may be set in the command for transmitting the result. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the index values IV of the bonus lottery table and the internal lottery table are also included in the offset table 111 in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. The information of the common winning numbers is associated with each index value IV of. In the case of a bonus lottery table, there are an index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set, an index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set, and an index value IV in which only cherry winning data is set. Although set, the index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set is associated with the information of the winning number of “4”, and the index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set is “ 6 ”is associated with the winning number information, and the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set is associated with the“ 8 ”winning number information. Further, in the case of the internal lottery table, as described above, the winning data corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, 18, 22 in the normal mode lottery table are set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV. In addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set to be the total winning probability of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, the index value IV corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, 18, 22 in the normal mode lottery table corresponds to the information of the winning numbers corresponding to those index values IV in the normal mode lottery table. For the index value IV for which only the normal replay winning data is set, the winning number of “41” is set in the same manner as the index value IV = 17 for which only the normal replay winning data is set in the second RT mode lottery table. Information is associated.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination, after selecting the lottery table (step S502), "1" is set to the first lap flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S503). In the lottery processing of the winning combination, the winning probability is different between the index value IV of the front range in which the winning probabilities are the same between the setting values of "1" to "6" and the setting values of "1" to "6". A lottery is performed from the index value IV in the front range among the index values IV in the rear range. In this case, the first lap flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current lottery target is the front range.

  After that, the first reference value is set in the target index counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S504). The target index counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the type of winning combination that is a lottery target. Further, the first reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the front side range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the case of the normal mode lottery table, the index values IV = 1 to 16 correspond to the front side range, so the first reference value is “16”. In the case of the first RT mode lottery table, the index value IV = Since 1 to 22 correspond to the front side range, the first reference value is "22". If the second RT mode lottery table has index values IV = 1 to 17 correspond to the front side range, the first reference value is "17". It will be.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the case of the bonus lottery table, only three index values IV are set, and all the index values IV have a winning probability between the set values of “1” to “6”. Since they are the same, the first reference value is "3". Although not described in detail, in the case of the internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the front range is set as the first reference value.

  After that, the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the winning combination is valid is set (step S505). In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV set to the index value IV that is the current lottery target to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random number acquired in step S501 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV set to the index value IV corresponding to the first reference value is added to this random number to newly create the new determination value DV. The determination value DV is For example, in the case of the normal mode lottery table, the first reference value is "16", so the point value PV set to the index value IV = 16 in the normal mode lottery table is added to the random number acquired in step S501. The determined value is set as the determination value DV.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination currently selected is the target (step S506). In the winning / non-winning judgment of the winning combination, it is judged whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds “65535”. If it does not exceed "65535", the value of the target index counter is decremented by 1 (step S507), and then it is determined whether the value of the target index counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" ( Step S508). When the value of the target index counter is not "0" (step S508: NO), the process returns to step S505, and the winning / judgment is performed for the winning combination corresponding to the value of the target index counter after the update.

  When the value of the target index counter is "0" (step S508: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is the bonus state (step S509). Since the rear range index value IV is not set in the bonus lottery table, if the present state is the bonus state (step S509: YES), it is assumed that no winning combination has been won in this game. The process directly proceeds to step S514.

  If the present state is not the bonus state (step S509: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first-round flag of the main RAM 74 (step S510). That is, it is determined whether the index value IV group for which the winning / judging of the winning combination is completed is in the front range. When "1" is set to the first lap flag (step S510: YES), after the first lap flag is cleared to "0" (step S511), the second reference value is set to the target index counter (step S511). Step S512). The second reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the rear range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the case of the normal mode lottery table, the index values IV = 17 to 22 correspond to the rear range, and in the case of the first RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 23 to 28 correspond to the rear range. However, in the case of the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV = 18 to 23 corresponds to the rear range, so that the second reference value is "6" in any lottery table. In the case of the bonus lottery table, since the index value IV included in the rear range does not exist, the second reference value is not set. Although not described in detail, in the case of the internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the rear range is set as the second reference value. After setting the second reference value, the process returns to step S505 to determine whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the second reference value is won. If a negative determination is made in step S510, it is determined that no winning combination has been won in the game this time, and the process directly proceeds to step S514.

  On the other hand, when the number exceeds “65535” in step S506, the winning number information corresponding to the winning combination currently selected for the lottery is acquired and the winning data corresponding to the winning combination currently selected for the lottery. The acquisition processing of the winning data for setting in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S513). FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the winning data acquisition process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is the index value IV included in the front side range by determining whether or not "1" is set in the first round flag of the main RAM 74 (( Step S601). When "1" is set in the first lap flag (step S601: YES), the value of the target index counter in the main RAM 74 corresponds to the index value IV that has been won this time, so that the processing in step S603 and subsequent steps is performed as it is. Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first lap flag is “0”, it means that the winning combination is the index value IV included in the rear range. When determining whether or not the index value IV included in the rear range is correct, the second reference value is set in the target index counter, and the second reference value is the number of index values IV included in the rear range. Therefore, the index value IV of the winning combination actually obtained this time does not match the value of the target index counter. Then, the difference between the index value IV of the winning combination that has actually been won this time and the value of the target index counter matches the first reference value of the lottery table that was the target of the lottery this time. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step S601, the first reference value of the lottery table which is the target of the lottery this time is added to the value of the target index counter (step S602). In this case, the first reference value added is "16" for the normal mode lottery table, "22" for the first RT mode lottery table, and "17" for the second RT mode lottery table. Becomes

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S601, or if the processing of step S602 has been executed, the offset table 111 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S603). Then, the type of the lottery table that is the subject of the lottery this time and the winning number information corresponding to the current value of the target index counter are read from the offset table 111, and the winning number information is the winning number information in this game. It is stored in the main RAM 74 as (step S604). Of course, if no winning combination is won, the winning number information is not stored in the main RAM 74.

  Then, the information of the winning data included in the winning combination this time is developed in the main RAM 74 (step S605). The same number of winning areas as the winning data existing in the slot machine 10 are set in the main RAM 74, and in step S605, the winning data included in the winning combination among the winning areas is selected. "1" is set in the area corresponding to, and the winning data other than the various bonus winning data such as the first BB winning data, the second BB winning data, the third BB winning data, the fourth BB winning data, the first RB winning data and the second RT winning data. Therefore, the winning area corresponding to the winning data not included in the winning combination this time is cleared to "0". The value of the winning area corresponding to various bonus winning data is set to "1" when the winning combination including the corresponding winning data is won, and the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is not executed until the corresponding winning is achieved. As long as "1" is set, the state is maintained. Then, the winning-corresponding area corresponding to the bonus winning data in which "1" is set is cleared to "0" when the corresponding winning is established or the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is executed. The winning-corresponding area corresponding to the winning data other than the various bonus winning data is cleared to “0” even if none of the winning combinations is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

  Returning to the description of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), when the positive determination is made in step S509, the negative determination is made in step S510, or the process of step S513 is executed, the stop information for reel stop control is displayed. After executing the stop information first setting process for setting (step S514), the effect content determination process is executed (step S515). In the effect content determination processing, processing for determining the content of the outline of the effect executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the current game is executed. As the content of the outline, in the normal game state, the high expectation content, the middle expectation content, and the low expectation content are set so that the expectation that the bonus state or the ART state will occur gradually decreases. ing. In the process of determining the effect contents, the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, the current game section, and the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is used to determine the outline of the effect by lottery.

  Then, the process of transmitting the game start command is executed (step S516). In the transmission process, the information corresponding to the outline content determined in the process of determining the effect content and the winning combination if the winning combination is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 16) this time. The information of the corresponding winning number and the information corresponding to the current lottery mode and the current game state are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has started, and the information of the outline of the production determined by the main side MPU 72 and the winning number is used as the production side MPU 92. It is a command to let the user recognize.

  When the effect MPU 92 receives the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps the outline of the effect in the current game from the game start command. Then, the production-side MPU 92 details the details of the production in a mode according to the content of the outline of the grasped production, the information of the winning number set in the game start command, the information corresponding to the current lottery mode, and the current situation. It is decided based on information corresponding to the gaming state of. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined contents of the effect is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

  Then, in step S517, the first control process for the game section is executed, in step S518, the bonus process at the start of the game is executed, in step S519, the addition process is executed, and in step S520, the notification control process is executed. To execute. Details of these processes will be described later.

  Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S701). In the rotation start processing, a predetermined weight time (eg 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the result of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) in the previous game started to rotate. If it has not elapsed, wait until the wait time has elapsed. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset and the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing such a process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by until they rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, the main side MPU 72 can generate a stop command by illuminating and displaying lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44 when the rotation speeds of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become constant speeds. This is notified to the player or the like.

  Then, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S702). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S702 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued. It is determined (step S703). If the stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S702, and the process of step S702 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When the stop command is generated, the stop command command is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S704). The stop command command is a command for causing the production-side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S705 to S711 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

  In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the base point position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S705). Specifically, the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input confirms the symbol number of the arrival symbol reaching the base point position. Then, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 (step S706).

  In the present slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, a stop mode for stopping the reaching symbol reaching the base point position as it is, Stopping mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, stopped by sliding by two symbols, and stopped after sliding by three symbols, and four symbols Five patterns of stop modes are prepared: a stop mode that stops after sliding. Therefore, in step S706, a value of "0" to "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

  After that, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol which is actually stopped at the base point position (step S707). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol and the symbol number of the stopping symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time are equal (step S708), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S709). Then, it is determined whether or not all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S710). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S711), and the process returns to step S702.

  Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, and by using the stop information. , It is possible to calculate the slip number (specifically, “0” to “4”) for the reaching symbol reaching the base point position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, the slip number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

  As processing for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting processing executed in step S514 of the lottery processing of the winning combination (FIG. 16) and the step S711 of reel control processing (FIG. 26) are executed. The stop information second setting process exists. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning data that has been set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop result of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. To do.

  When it is determined in step S710 that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S712. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the content of the winning data developed in the main RAM 74, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is a combination of corresponding symbols, and if it is a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination, the winning-corresponding process is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved.

  In the prize-winning process, if the prize is a small winning combination, the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that the game medium can be awarded in the medium awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process for executing the re-game setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302).

  After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S713). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not this winning has been established, and also includes data indicating the type of winning when the winning has been established.

<About game state and game section>
Next, a game state and a game section will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a game state and a game section existing in the slot machine 10.

  As gaming states in the slot machine 10, a normal gaming state ST1, a bonus internal state ST2, a BB state ST3, an RB state ST4, a false precursory state ST5, a true precursory state ST6, a chance state ST7, and a preparation state. There are ST8 and ART state ST9. These gaming states ST1 to ST9 do not overlap with each other.

  The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state in which the player stays by executing the clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74. In addition, when the transition to the preparation state ST8 does not occur when the BB state ST3 ends, when the transition to the preparation state ST8 does not occur when the RB state ST4 ends, the false omen state ST5 ends, the chance If the transition to the preparation state ST8 does not occur when the state ST7 ends, and if the ART state ST9 ends without the transition to the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 as a trigger, the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1. Becomes The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state which is less advantageous than the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the preparation state ST8 and the ART state ST9 in terms of the expected value of the game medium to be provided in one game, and the bonus internal state ST2, false The advantages are substantially the same as those of the precursory state ST5, the actual precursory state ST6, and the chance state ST7. Further, as already described, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but in the normal gaming state ST1, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. In addition, when the clear process of the main RAM 74 (step S104) is executed, it is in the normal game state ST1 and becomes the normal mode.

  The bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state in which a bonus winning data corresponding to the bonus winning data is not established in a game in which any bonus winning data is set, and the bonus winning state corresponding to the bonus winning data. It is a game state that ends when is established. In the bonus internal state ST2, the internal lottery table is referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination as already described. In this case, since the role for shifting the lottery mode (that is, the index value IV) is not set in the internal lottery table, the lottery mode does not shift in the bonus internal state ST2. Since the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is the same as when the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) is referred to, it can be said that the bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained in the normal mode. The replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is not limited to this, and may be higher than that in the normal mode. For example, the replay probability in the first RT mode may be the same as that in the second RT mode. The configuration may be the same as the replay probability, the configuration may be the replay probability between the normal mode and the first RT mode, or the configuration may be the replay probability between the first RT mode and the second RT mode, The replay probability may be higher than that in the second RT mode. Further, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be lower than that in the normal mode.

  The contents of the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4 are as already described. In the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4, the transition of the lottery mode does not occur.

  The false predictive state ST5 stays in the normal gaming state ST1 by being transitioned to the false predictive state ST5 in the transition lottery process. The number of continuing games in the false aura state ST5 is determined by lottery in the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability of the short continuing game number is set higher than the winning probability of the long continuing game number. The false omen state ST5 is continued for the determined number of continuous games unless a bonus combination is won, a transition to the main omen state ST6 and a chance state ST7 are performed on the way.

  In the false omen state ST5, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 63, an effect having a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is easily executed. Further, in the false omen state ST5, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the start game side. Specifically, in some continuous games including the final game in the false omen state ST5, an effect in which the same character is displayed among a plurality of games or an effect according to a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect for causing the player to recognize that the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur in the final game is displayed. As described above, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, but in the false sign state ST5, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes.

  The present predictive state ST6 stays in the normal gaming state ST1 or the false predictive state ST5 by transition winning in the transitional lottery process to the regular predictive state ST6. The state shifts to the preparatory state ST8 which is the state before the shift. In addition, when a bonus combination is won in the middle of the main sign state ST6, the main sign state ST6 ends, but after the bonus state corresponding to the bonus part ends, the state shifts to the preparation state ST8. The number of continuing games in this aura state ST6 is determined by lottery in the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability of the long continuous game number is set higher than the winning probability of the short continuous game number. Further, the expected value of the number of continuing games selected in the present precursory state ST6 is longer than the expected value of the number of continuing games selected in the false precursory state ST5.

  In the present indication state ST6, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 63, an effect with a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is easily executed. The effect executed in this case is an effect that can also be executed in the false aura state ST5, but an effect having a higher expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed in the main aura state ST6 than in the false aura state ST5. easy. In addition, in the present indication state ST6, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the start game side. Specifically, in a part of continuous games including the final game in the precursory state ST6, an effect in which the same character is displayed among a plurality of games or an effect according to a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect for causing the player to recognize that the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs in the final game is displayed. Due to the presence of the false precursory state ST5 and the actual precursory state ST6 as described above, when the precursor effect corresponding to these precursory states ST5 and ST6 is executed, the player shifts to the ART state ST9. Will be expected. As described above, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, but in the precursory state ST6, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. The number of continuing games in the precursory state ST6 may be fixed to a predetermined plurality of games such as 10 games.

  The chance state ST7 stays in the normal gaming state ST1 or the false precursory state ST5 by the transition winning in the transition lottery process to the chance state ST7. The chance state ST7 is a gaming state that continues for five games, and when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the combination is a predetermined lottery result, the winning probability corresponding to the lottery result is transferred to the ART state ST9. The transfer lottery process is executed. When the transition to the ART state ST9 is won, the state shifts to the preparation state ST8 which is the state before the transition to the ART state ST9. In this case, when a transition win is obtained in the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9, even if the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 has not been exhausted, preparation is made in the game next to the game that has won the transition. Transition to the state ST8 occurs. Further, when the winning of the bonus combination occurs in the middle of the chance state ST7, the chance state ST7 ends.

  In the chance state ST7, an effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is executed as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 63. Then, an effect indicating that the transition is won is executed in the game in which the transition is won in the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9. As described above, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, but in the chance state ST7, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. The number of continuing games in the chance state ST7 may be determined by lottery from a plurality of kinds of games.

  The preparation state ST8 is a game state in which the player stays as a pre-stage before shifting to the ART state ST9, and can shift from the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the present precursor state ST6 and the chance state ST7. As described above, the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode exist as the lottery modes, but in the preparation state ST8, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. In the preparation state ST8, when the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Then, when the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is awarded. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected number of game media to be provided in one game in the preparation state ST8. Further, in the preparation state ST8, when the winning numbers of “17” to “22” are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay winning is informed, and “23” to When the winning number "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning is notified, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize is notified. In the preparation state ST8, the second RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, whereby the gaming state shifts to the ART state ST9. In addition, in the situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode, a transition to the preparation state ST8 may occur. In this case, the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode, and then the transition to the second RT mode occurs. If so, the state shifts to the ART state ST9.

  The ART state ST9 is a gaming state that shifts when the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST8 as described above. The ART state ST9 ends when the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 becomes "0". In this case, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. When the bonus is won in the middle of the ART state ST9, the state shifts to the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4. In this case, after the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is completed, the state shifts to the preparation state ST8 and finally returns to the ART state ST9.

  As described above, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, but in the ART state ST9, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. In the ART state ST9, when the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Then, when the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is awarded. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected number of game media to be provided in one game in the ART state ST9. In addition, in the ART state ST9, when the winning numbers of “17” to “22” are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize is notified, and “23” to “23”. When the winning number "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning is notified, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If it is, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize is notified, and if the winning number of "35" to "40" is set, the second falling replay prize is set. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of is notified. As a result, in the ART state ST9, the lottery mode is basically maintained in the second RT mode. The second RT mode has a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. That is, the ART state ST9 is a gaming state in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified, and is basically a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected net increase of the game medium in the ART state ST9. In addition, even if the lottery mode is switched from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST9, the ART state is maintained and the ART state is not maintained even in the second RT mode. The remaining number of continuing games in ST9 is subtracted.

  In the configuration in which the various game states ST1 to ST9 exist as described above, the game section is set separately from the game states ST1 to ST9. As a game section, a normal section SC1 and an advantageous section SC2 are set. In other words, in the slot machine 10, as the factors that determine the game situation, the set values of "1" to "6", the lottery modes of the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode, and the various game states ST1 to ST9, The normal section SC1 and the game section of the advantageous section SC2 exist.

  The normal section SC1 refers to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allow the player to win a winning combination when winning a winning combination whose winning target is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a section in which the stop order is not notified, and the probability that the transition condition to the ART state ST9, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is satisfied is lower than that in the advantageous section SC2. More specifically, the transition condition to the ART state ST9 is not satisfied in the normal section SC1. When the clear process of the main RAM 74 (step S104) is executed, the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode are set, and the normal section SC1 is set. Further, when the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the normal section SC1 is also set.

  The advantageous section SC2 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables a player to win a winning combination when winning a winning combination whose winning target is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a section corresponding to at least one of the section in which the stop order is notified and the section in which the probability of transition to the ART state ST9, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is higher than the normal section SC1. In the advantageous section SC2, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allow the winning of the highest number of game media to be awarded among the winning types included in the winning combinations having different winnings depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are formed. It reliably continues until the notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R is executed at least once. Specifically, in the advantageous section SC2, reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are set to winning numbers of "1" to "3" in the lottery processing of the winning combination (FIG. 16) and enable the establishment of the first bell prize. The notification of the stop order is surely continued until it is executed at least once. In addition, the notification of the stop order is executed at least once, so that the minimum end condition is satisfied, and the minimum end condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the first bell prize is actually satisfied. To do. Then, when the notification is executed at least once, the advantageous section SC2 is the end condition determined according to the situation in which the advantageous section SC2 is set, and the number of continuous games of the advantageous section SC2 is the upper limit number of games. It continues until one of the conditions is reached.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4 can be stayed in any of the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the false precursory state ST5, the true precursory state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9 do not stay in the normal section SC1, but only in the advantageous section SC2.

  Next, a specific processing configuration that enables setting of the above-mentioned game states ST1 to ST9 and game sections SC1 and SC2 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. The first control process for the game section is executed in step S517 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for winning combinations. The process of step S517 is executed after the winning / non-winning determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus internal state ST2, the bonus states ST3, ST4, the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S801). When a negative determination is made in step S801, the processing of step S802 and thereafter is executed.

  In step S802, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantage zone flag provided in the main RAM 74. The advantageous section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the advantageous section SC2 in the main MPU 72, and when the advantageous section flag is set to "1", the advantageous section SC2 is advantageous. The case where the value of the section flag is “0” is the normal section SC1.

  If the game section is the normal section SC1 (step S802: NO), the winning number of "4", "6", "8", "15" in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this time It is determined whether it has been set (step S803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the transition lottery processing for the advantageous zone SC2 is executed.

  Specifically, first, the advantageous shift table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S804). In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being transitioned to the advantageous section SC2. By the way, the advantageous transition table is common regardless of the set values of "1" to "6". Thus, the fact that the table is common regardless of the set values corresponds to all lottery processes other than the lottery process (FIG. 16) for winning combinations. Also, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S805). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the transition lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section SC2, the random number written in the 14th latch register 103n is acquired from the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. Specifically, as described above, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b generates random numbers of "0" to "65535", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The random number written in the fourteenth latch register 103n is acquired by the second dedicated random number circuit 102b at the timing of positive determination. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S805 with the advantageous transition table read in step S804, it is determined whether or not the transition to the advantageous section SC2 has been won (step S806).

  When the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won (step S806: YES), the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the value of the advantageous continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Then, "1" is set to the unreported flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S807). The advantageous continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section SC2. The unreported flag is a reel 32L, which is set to a winning number of "1" to "3" in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination after the shift to the advantageous section SC2, to enable the establishment of the first bell prize, This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R has already occurred.

  As described above, the first control process for the game section is executed at the start of the game. In this case, when the transition win is selected in the transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2, the advantageous zone flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the first control process of the game zone. As a result, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs at the start time of the game that has been won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have a configuration in which the game that has won the transition to the advantageous section SC2 transitions to the advantageous section SC2 in the next game, and the game that has won the transition to the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the game after two or more games.

  After setting the transition to the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the extinguished state to the lit state (step S808). As a result, notification of the advantageous section SC2 is started on the advantageous section display unit 67.

  By setting the advantageous section SC2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified. Here, the notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The notification control process is executed in step S520 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). The process of step S520 is executed after the winning / non-winning combination determination is completed at the start of the game.

  In a situation where "1" is set in the advantageous zone flag of the main RAM 74 (step S901: YES), a winning number of "1" to "3" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination. When it is done (step S902: YES), one of the conditions that the game state is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 and that the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" is satisfied. If it is (step S903 or step S904: YES), a process for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is executed.

  Specifically, first, the stop order ascertaining process for the first bell winning is executed (step S905). In the stop order ascertaining process, information about the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize corresponding to the winning number of this time is grasped. Then, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that the display corresponding to the information on the grasped stop order is started on the combined display unit 66 (step S906). The display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is continued until all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game. After that, the bell winning command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S907). Information for allowing the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the first bell winning in the current game is set in the bell winning command.

  Then, the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S908). In this case, when the value of the unreported flag is already "0", that state is maintained, and when the value of the unreported flag is "1", it is changed to "0". As a result, it becomes possible for the main MPU 72 to specify that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that has already made it possible to establish the first bell winning has been executed in the current advantageous zone SC2.

  In the notification control process, when the winning number of any of "17" to "28" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S909: YES), the game state is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9. (Step S910: YES), a process for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize is executed.

  Specifically, first, a stop order grasping process for promotion replay is executed (step S911). In the stop order ascertaining process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize corresponding to the winning number of this time is grasped. Then, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the combined display unit 66 (step S912). The display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is continued until all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game. After that, the promotion replay command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S913). Information for enabling the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize in this game is set in the promotion replay command. To be done.

  In the notification control process, if the winning number of any of "29" to "40" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S914: YES), the game state is the ART state ST9. As a condition (step S915: YES), a process for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning is executed.

  Specifically, first, a stop order grasping process for avoiding a fall replay is executed (step S916). In the stop order ascertaining process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R capable of avoiding the establishment of the first falling replay prize or the second falling replay prize corresponding to the winning number of this time is grasped. Then, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the combined display unit 66 (step S917). The display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is continued until all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game. After that, the fall replay avoidance command is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S918). In the falling replay avoidance command, the production side MPU 92 can specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize or the second falling replay prize in this game. Information is set.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the case where the gaming state is the preparation state ST8 and the winning number of any of “29” to “34” is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, the first A process for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the falling replay prize is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the preparation state ST8, even if a winning number of any of "35" to "40" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, the second falling replay prize is established. The order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid is not notified. Since the condition for the transition from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 is that the second RT replay winning is established, when the transition to the preparation state ST8 occurs in the second RT mode, the establishment of the second falling replay winning is not avoided. As a result, it becomes possible to once fall into the first RT mode and give an opportunity to establish the second RT replay prize.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the notification process executed by the production-side MPU 92. In addition, the notification process is repeatedly executed in the effect-side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

  When a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1001: YES), an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop order command received this time Is set on the image display device 63 (step S1002). However, at this timing, the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1003). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating and become constant-speed rotation, and is set to 0.5 milliseconds, for example. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started.

  In the notification process, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the effect RAM 94 has elapsed (step S1004: YES), the notification start process is executed (step S1005). In the notification start processing, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S1002. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63. The display on the image display device 63 is continued until all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game.

  In the case of the above configuration, after the timing at which the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66 which is directly display-controlled by the main MPU 72, the direct production MPU 92 directly. In the display-controlled image display device 63, notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Accordingly, when the image display device 63 is informing about the winning combination, the dual display unit 66 is sure to execute the informing about the winning combination, and the reels being executed in the image display device 63. In the case of confirming whether or not the notification corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R is due to a fraudulent act by using the display content of the dual-purpose display unit 66, the confirmation can be performed at an arbitrary timing. It will be possible.

  Note that the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 end at the same or substantially the same timing. However, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the dual-purpose display unit 66 is not limited to this, and after the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 is completed. The notification corresponding to may be configured to end, and the order may be reversed.

  Returning to the explanation of the first control process (FIG. 28) of the game section, if the advantageous section flag is set to “1” in the game prior to the current game (step S802: YES), or the current game When "1" is set to the advantageous zone flag in (step S807), it is determined whether or not the current game state is the chance state ST7 (step S809). If it is the chance state ST7 (step S809: YES), the chance state process is executed (step S810). The chance state process will be described later.

  If it is not the chance state ST7 (step S809: NO), is any one of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16)? It is determined whether or not (step S811). If an affirmative decision is made in step S811, the current game state is not the precursory state ST6 (step S812: NO), the transitional lottery process for the precursory state, the transitional lottery process for the chance state, and At least one of the transition lottery processes for the false omen state is executed.

  In detail, first, the transition lottery process for the present omen state will be described. In the transition lottery process, first, the main sign transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S813). In this case, the auspiciousness transition table is set such that the winning number having a low winning probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the aura state ST6. Also, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S814). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the transition lottery process for the present omen state, the random number written in the fifteenth latch register 103o is acquired from the third dedicated random number circuit 102c. More specifically, as described above, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c generates random numbers “0” to “255”, confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). Then, the random number written in the fifteenth latch register 103o is acquired by the third dedicated random number circuit 102c at the timing of positive determination. Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S814 with the main symptom transition table read in step S813, it is determined whether or not the transition to the main symptom state ST6 has been won (step S815).

  When it is determined that the player has won the transition to the present sign state ST6 (step S815: YES), "1" is set to the present sign win flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S816). The main omen winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the main omen state ST6 has been won at the start of the current game, and the main omen winning flag is set to "1". If so, processing for shifting to the precursory state ST6 is executed at the end of the game. That is, the game state shifts to the main symptom state ST6 in the game next to the game that has won the transition to the main symptom state ST6.

  When the transition to the present omen state ST6 has not been won (step S815: NO), the chance state transition lottery process is executed (step S817). Details of the chance lottery transition lottery process will be described later. Then, it is determined whether or not the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won in the current game, or whether or not the current game state is the false precursor state ST5 (step S818). When a negative determination is made in step S818, the transition lottery process for the false aura state is executed (step S819).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the transition lottery process for the false aura state. In the transition lottery process, first, the false sign transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1101). In this case, the false precursor transition table is set such that the winning number having a higher winning probability has a higher probability of being transitional winning to the false precursory state ST5. Also, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S1102). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the transition lottery process to the false precursory state ST5, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is changed to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the written random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, the random number acquired in step S1102 is collated with the false precursor transition table read in step S1101 to determine whether or not the transition to the false precursor state ST5 has been won (step S1103).

  When the shift to the false precursory state ST5 is won (step S1103: YES), "1" is set to the false precursory winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1104). The false omen win flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the false omen state ST5 has been won at the start of this game, and the false omen win flag is set to "1". If so, a process for shifting to the false precursory state ST5 is executed at the end of the game. That is, the game state shifts to the false precursory state ST5 in the game next to the game that has won the transition to the false precursory state ST5.

  By executing each transition lottery process as described above, in the case of the foreboding state ST6 or the chance state ST7, the transition lottery process for the false omen state, the transition lottery process for the foreboding state, and the chance state None of the transfer lottery processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the false precursory state ST5, the true precursory state ST6, or the chance state ST7 from being newly set in a situation where the main precursory state ST6 or the chance state ST7 has already been started.

  On the other hand, even if it is in the false omen state ST5, the transition lottery process for the present omen state and the transition lottery process for the chance state are executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the new transition to the precursory state ST6 or the chance state ST7, which leads to the transition to the ART state ST9, over the execution of the false precursory state ST5, which does not lead to the transition to the ART state ST9. .

  If the false precursory state ST5 has already been set, the transitional lottery process for the false precursory state is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the new false precursory state ST5 from being redundantly executed even though the false precursory state ST5 has already been executed.

  When none of the false omen state ST5, the main omen state ST6, and the chance state ST7, the execution priority of each transition lottery process is the highest in the transition lottery process for the present omen state and the transition lottery process for the chance state is It is the next highest, and the transition lottery process for the false aura state is set to the lowest. Further, in the case of the false precursory state ST5, the execution priority of the transitional lottery process for the present precursory state is set to be higher than that of the transitional lottery process for the chance state. This gives the highest priority to the transition to the precursory state ST6 in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is surely generated, and the priority of the chance state ST7 where the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur to the ART state ST9. It is possible to make the priority higher than the priority of the false precursory state ST5 in which the shift of No. does not occur.

  In the game in which the winning number of any one of “4” to “8”, “15”, and “16” is set, when the transition winning is not obtained in the transition lottery process for the precursory state, it is for the chance state. The transition lottery process is executed, and when the transition lottery process for the chance state does not result in the transition winning, the transition lottery process for the false omen state is executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which any of the false precursory state ST5, the true precursory state ST6, and the chance state ST7 is set.

  Here, the lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section SC2 is executed when one of the winning numbers “4”, “6”, “8”, and “15” is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination. To be done. All of the winning combinations corresponding to the winning numbers have the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section SC2 is executed when a winning combination having no setting difference in winning probability is won. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the set values of "1" to "6" with respect to the transition probability to the advantageous section SC2.

  On the other hand, the transition lottery process for the present omen state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false omen state are “4” to “8”, “15” in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 16). It is executed when any winning number of "16" is set. Among these winning numbers, "4", "6", "8", and "15" are the roles that have the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" as described above. These winning numbers are the same as the winning numbers that trigger the execution of the transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, at least one transition lottery process of the transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process for the present omen state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false omen state is the same. May be executed in a game.

  Among the winning numbers, "5", "7", and "16" have different winning probabilities among the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the transition lottery process for the present omen state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false omen state are executed with the opportunity to win the winning combination having no difference in winning probability, and It is executed when the winning of a winning combination with a probability setting difference occurs. Thereby, with respect to the transition probability to the false precursory state ST5, the transition probability to the main precursory state ST6, and the transition probability to the chance state ST7, there may be an advantage or a disadvantage between the set values of "1" to "6". It becomes possible to

  However, the transition lottery process for the present omen state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false omen state are executed on condition that the game section is the advantageous section SC2. That is, on condition that the game is already started in the advantageous section SC2 or the game has been won in the transition to the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery processing for the present omen state and the transition lottery processing for the chance state And the transition lottery process for the false aura state is executed. Therefore, with respect to the transition to the advantageous section SC2, which is the previous step for causing the transition to the false precursory state ST5, the actual precursory state ST6, or the chance state ST7, it is advantageous between the set values of “1” to “6” or While not causing a disadvantage, there is an advantage or disadvantage between the set values of “1” to “6” with respect to the transition to the false precursory state ST5, the true precursory state ST6 or the chance state ST7 after the transition to the advantageous section SC2. It becomes possible to occur.

  Next, the corresponding process at the end of the game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The corresponding process at the end of the game is executed in step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Since the process of step S310 is executed after the reel control process (step S308), it is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped from rotating in one game.

  First, a bonus process for performing transition control or progress control in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is executed (step S1201). The bonus process will be described later in detail. After that, under the condition that none of the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4 (step S1202: NO), the lottery mode control process is executed (step S1203). In the lottery mode control process, the normal mode is switched to the first RT mode when the first RT replay prize is established in the current game, and the second RT replay prize is established in the current game when the second RT replay prize is established. When the 1RT mode is switched to the 2nd RT mode and the first falling replay prize is established in this game, the 1st RT mode is switched to the normal mode, and the 2nd falling replay prize is established in this game. If so, the second RT mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

  After that, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S1204). Specifically, if the gaming state is one of the normal gaming state ST1, the false precursory state ST5, the main precursory state ST6, and the chance state ST7, the normal process is executed (step S1205), and the gaming state is the preparation state. If it is ST8, the preparation state process is executed (step S1206), and if the game state is the ART state ST9, the ART state process is executed (step S1207). If the affirmative judgment is made in step S1202, or if any of the processes of steps S1205 to S1207 is executed, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S1208). In the second control process of the game section, a process for shifting the game section to the normal section SC1 is executed when the transition condition from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 is satisfied.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second control processing of the game section. As described above, since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the second control process in the game section is also the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. Is executed after all rotations of are stopped.

  In steps S1301 to S1311, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, processing for ending the advantageous section SC2 is executed. Details of these processes will be described later.

  If it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S1303: YES) and the negative determination is made in step S1306, the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 and the value of the advantage maintenance counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether there is any (step S1312). The advantageous maintenance counter, when the ART state ST9 ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, when the advantageous section SC2 is maintained for the number of advantageous maintenance games even after shifting to the normal gaming state ST1, This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining games of the advantageous maintenance game.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, it is determined whether or not the value of the unreported flag in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1313). As described above, the unreported flag is set to a winning number of "1" to "3" in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) after the shift to the advantageous section SC2, so that the first bell winning can be achieved. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has already occurred. Then, when the notification of the stop order has already occurred, the value of the unreported flag is "0".

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1313, initialization processing of the advantageous zone is executed (step S1314). In the advantageous section initialization process, the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the initialization process of the advantageous section, even if the player stays in any of the false precursory state ST5, the main precursory state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8 and the ART state ST9, the game states ST5 to ST9 are continued. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST5 to ST9 including a counter for storing the number of games. Since the process of step S1314 is executed on condition that it is in the normal gaming state ST1, the process of clearing these various data is not executed, but the process of clearing the advantageous zone flag to "0" is executed. After that, the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the lighting state to the extinguishing state (step S1315). Thus, the notification of the advantageous section on the advantageous section display unit 67 is completed.

  As described above, when the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs, the transition to the false precursory state ST5, the actual precursory state ST6, or the chance state ST7 may occur. In this case, the advantageous section SC2 is ended on condition that the normal gaming state ST1 is set, so that the first bell prize can be established in the false precursory state ST5, the real precursory state ST6 or the chance state ST7. Even after the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed, the advantageous section SC2 is maintained.

  Although the details will be described later, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started in the advantageous section SC2, the state shifts to the ART state ST9 more easily than when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started in the normal section SC1. In this case, as described above, when the false predictive state ST5 is maintained, the advantageous interval SC2 is maintained so that the player can expect the false predictive state ST5 to be the true predictive state ST6. Not only the state but also the state in which the degree of expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is high can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the false aura state ST5.

  Further, even in the normal gaming state ST1, if the unreported flag is set to "1", the advantageous section SC2 is not ended. As a result, even if the false precursory state ST5 ends or the chance state ST7 ends without the transition to the ART state ST9, the first bell winning is established after the advantageous section SC2 starts. The advantageous section SC2 is continued until the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the above is executed once. Then, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started in the situation where the advantageous section SC2 continues, the degree of expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 becomes high. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified in the false omen state ST5 or the chance state ST7, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It is possible to plan.

  The processing of steps S1316 to S1322 in the second control processing of the game section is executed in a predetermined bonus internal state ST2. The process will be described in detail later.

  Here, how the transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the return to the normal section SC1 are performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 34 (a) shows the period of the normal section SC1, FIG. 34 (b) shows the period of the advantageous section SC2, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) with no setting difference. FIG. 34 (d) shows the winning combination of the winning combination that is the winning combination of the various transfer lottery processes, and FIG. 34 (d) shows the winning combination of the various winning combinations in the lottery process (FIG. 16). 34 (e) shows the execution period of the main precursory state ST6, and FIG. 34 (f) shows the execution period of the false precursory state ST5.

  First, a case will be described in which a transition to the precursory state ST6 occurs in a game in which the game segment has transitioned to the advantageous segment SC2.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), at the timing of t1 which is the situation of the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, “4”, “6”, “ By setting a winning number of either 8 ”or“ 15 ”(hereinafter, also referred to as a trigger winning number with no setting difference), the transition lottery process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the transition winning is achieved. As a result, at the timing of t1, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b). In addition, at the timing of t1, the transition lottery process for the present omen state is executed with the trigger winning number setting having no setting difference as a trigger, and the transition winning is achieved. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the game state shifts to the present warning state ST6. In other words, in the game in which the game section has shifted to the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the precursory state ST6 also occurs. Then, when the state shifts to the precursory state ST6, the state finally shifts to the ART state ST9.

  Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the false precursory state ST5 occurs in a game after the game in which the game segment has transitioned to the advantageous segment SC2, and the advantageous segment SC2 also ends when the false precursory state ST5 ends. .

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), at the timing of t2 which is the situation of the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is performed with “5”, “7”, “ The winning number of any one of 16 ”(hereinafter, also referred to as a trigger winning number with a setting difference) is won. In this case, the transition lottery process for the advantageous segment SC2 is not executed even if the trigger win number with the setting difference is set in the normal segment SC1. The lottery process is not executed. The chance lottery processing for the chance state is also not executed.

  After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), a winning combination number is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, and the lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section SC2 is executed. As a result of the transition winning in (3), the game section is shifted from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b). However, at the timing of t3, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state and the transition lottery process for the present precursor state have been executed, but none of the transition lottery processes results in a transition win.

  After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), a winning combination number with a setting difference is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). In this case, since the advantageous zone SC2 has already been set, the transition lottery process for the false aura state and the transition lottery process for the main aura state are executed. Then, the transition lottery process for the false auspicious state results in the transition winning, and the state shifts to the false auspicious state ST5 as shown in FIG. 34 (f).

  After that, at the timing of t5, the remaining number of games in the false predictive state ST5 becomes “0”, and the condition for ending the false predictive state ST5 is satisfied, so that the false predictive state ST5 is changed as shown in FIG. It ends and returns to the normal game state ST1. In this case, from t4 timing to t5 timing, the winning number information of any of "1" to "3" has already been set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, and the first bell prize has been established. Since the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the above is notified, the non-notification flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, when the ending condition of the false precursory state ST5 is satisfied at the timing of t5, the ending condition of the advantageous section SC2 is also satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the game section returns from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 at the timing of t5.

  Next, a case will be described in which a transition to the false precursory state ST5 occurs in a game in which the gaming segment has transitioned to the advantageous segment SC2, and the advantageous segment SC2 ends in a game after the game in which the false precursory state ST5 ends. ..

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), at the timing of t6 which is the situation of the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the winning combination number of the winning combination is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination. As a result, the transition lottery process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the transition win is achieved. As a result, at the timing of t6, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b). Further, at the timing of t6, the transition lottery process for the false aura state is executed with the setting of the trigger winning number having no setting difference as described above, resulting in the transition winning. As a result, the game state shifts to the false aura state ST5 as shown in FIG. 34 (f). That is, in the game in which the game section has shifted to the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the false aura state ST5 also occurs.

  After that, at the timing of t7, the number of remaining games in the false precursory state ST5 becomes “0”, and the ending condition of the false precursory state ST5 is satisfied, so that the false precursory state ST5 is changed as shown in FIG. It ends and returns to the normal game state ST1. However, from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, the information of any winning numbers of "1" to "3" has not been already set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, so that the first bell prize can be established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, and the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 remains set to "1". Therefore, even if the ending condition of the false precursory state ST5 is satisfied at the timing of t7, the ending condition of the advantageous section SC2 is not satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the advantageous section SC2 is maintained at the timing of t7.

  After that, at the timing of t8, information of the winning numbers of "1" to "3" is set in the lottery processing of the winning combination (FIG. 16), and the reels 32L and 32M that enable the winning of the first bell prize are set. , 32R is notified of the stop order, the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the game section returns from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 at the timing of t8.

  As described above, the advantageous section SC2 ends together in the game in which the false precursory state ST5 ends in accordance with the timing at which the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is executed. In some cases, the game may end after the game in which the false precursory state ST5 ends. As a result, it is possible to diversify the end timing of the advantageous section SC2, and it is possible to expect the player to maintain the advantageous section SC2 even if the false precursory state ST5 ends. Become. It should be noted that the advantageous section SC2 does not end before the false precursory state ST5 ends. Also in the chance state ST7, the advantageous section SC2 may end together in the game in which the chance state ST7 ends, or the advantageous section SC2 may end in the game after the game in which the chance state ST7 ends. is there.

  Next, a case will be described in which a transition to the false precursory state ST5 occurs in the game in which the game segment has transitioned to the advantageous segment SC2, and further a transition to the main precursory state ST6 occurs in the middle of the false precursory state ST5.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), at the timing of t9, which is the situation of the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), a winning combination number with no setting difference is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination. As a result, the transition lottery process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the transition win is achieved. As a result, at the timing of t9, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b). Further, at the timing of t9, the transition lottery process for the false aura state is executed with the setting of the trigger winning number without the above setting difference, and the transition winning is achieved. As a result, the game state shifts to the false aura state ST5 as shown in FIG. 34 (f). That is, in the game in which the game section has shifted to the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the false aura state ST5 also occurs.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (f), at the timing of t10 in which the false precursory state ST5 continues, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), there is a setting difference in the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 16). The opportunity winning number of is set. In this case, since the advantageous zone SC2 has already been set and the false precursory state ST5 is set, the transition lottery process for the present precursory state is executed. Then, as a result of the transition win in the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, as shown in FIGS. 34 (e) and 34 (f), the false precursor state ST5 is ended midway and the present precursor state ST6 is newly added. Started at. When the state shifts to the precursory state ST6, the state finally shifts to the ART state ST9.

  As described above, even when the false predictive state ST5 is in the middle, when the trigger winning number with the setting difference is set, the transition to the predictive predictive state ST6 occurs, so that the performance corresponding to the predictive states ST5 and ST6 is executed. Even in the middle of the process, the player expects to win the winning combination corresponding to the trigger winning number with the setting difference. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player in the situation where the effect corresponding to the precursory states ST5 and ST6 is being executed.

<Regarding Execution Control of Effects in Precursor States ST5, ST6 and Chance State ST7>
Next, the execution control of the effects in the precursory states ST5 and ST6 and the chance state ST7 will be described. First, the transition lottery process for the chance state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The chance lottery transition lottery process is executed in step S817 in the first control process (FIG. 28) of the game section. Since the first control process of the game section is executed at the start of the game after the winning / non-winning determination of the winning combination is completed, the transition lottery process for the chance state is also executed at the beginning of the game after the winning / non-winning determination of the winning combination is completed. ..

  First, the chance transfer table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1401). In this case, the chance transition table is set so that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being transitioned to the chance state ST7. Also, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S1402). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the transition lottery process for the chance state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S1402 with the chance transition table read in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won (step S1403).

  When the shift to the chance state ST7 is won (step S1403: YES), the chance winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1404). The chance winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won at the start of this game, and when the chance winning flag is set to "1". Performs processing for shifting to the chance state ST7 at the end of the game. That is, the game state shifts to the chance state ST7 in the next game of the game that has won the transition to the chance state ST7.

  Next, the normal process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is executed in step S1205 in the game end process (FIG. 32). Since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the normal process is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Executed.

  When the chance winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1501: YES), it means that the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process of the chance state ST7 is executed. Specifically, "5" is set as information on the number of continuing games in the chance state ST7 in the chance state counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1502). The chance state counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the chance state ST7 and the remaining number of continuous games in the chance state ST7. If a positive determination is made in step S1501, the chance winning flag is cleared to "0".

  After that, a chance start command indicating that the chance state ST7 is started is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S1503). By receiving the chance start command, the production-side MPU 92 starts the production corresponding to the chance state ST7.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the false precursor counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1504). The false omen counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the false omen state ST5 and the number of remaining games in the false omen state ST5. When the value of the false aura counter is 1 or more (step S1504: YES), the end process of the false aura state ST5 is executed to end the false aura state ST5 (step S1505). Specifically, the value of the false sign counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". That is, the chance state ST7 may be started even in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, and when the chance state ST7 is started in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, the false precursory state ST5 is interrupted. Instead, it is ended even if it is on the way.

  When the state shifts to the chance state ST7, an affirmative determination is made in step S809 in the first control process (FIG. 28) of the game section which is executed after the winning / non-winning determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of one game, and the chance state is obtained. Processing is executed (step S810). FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the process for chance state.

  First, it is determined whether or not a winning number of "17" or later is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S1601). It is the situation that the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 17), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 19) and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 21) are set for the winning numbers after “17”. However, at least the normal replay winning data is set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the ART lottery table for replay is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1602). The ART lottery table for replay is common to all winning numbers after "17", and is also common to any of the set values of "1" to "6".

  On the other hand, even if the winning number after "17" is not set in the winning lottery process (Fig. 16), any one of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15" and "16" is won. When the number is set (1603: YES), the ART lottery table corresponding to the winning number is read (step S1604). In this case, the ART lottery table is set such that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being ART winning. Further, this ART lottery table is common among the set values of "1" to "6". Further, the probability of being an ART win set in the ART lottery table corresponding to this win number is set higher than the probability of being an ART win set in the ART win table for replay. Further, in both the replay ART winning table and the ART winning table corresponding to the winning number, the probability of winning the ART is set to be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  When the process of step S1602 or step S1604 is executed, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S1605). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, as described above, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers of "0" to "255", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing of positive determination. Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S1605 with the ART lottery table read in step S1602 or step S1604, it is determined whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won (step S1606).

  When the transition to the ART state ST9 is won (step S1606: YES), the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1607). The ART winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won at the start of the current game, and when the ART winning flag is set to "1". At the end of the game, processing for shifting to the preparation state ST8 is executed. In other words, the game state shifts to the preparation state ST8 that is a stage before the ART state ST9 in the next game of the game that has won the transition to the ART state ST9.

  As described above, in the chance state ST7, when a winning number of “17” or later is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of each game, or “4” to “8”, “15”, “16”. When any one of the winning numbers is set, the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is executed. Then, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed by the transition winning in the transition lottery process. As a result, a player who expects to shift to the ART state ST9 pays attention to the chance state ST7, and expects to shift to the chance state ST7 in the normal gaming state ST1.

  Returning to the explanation of the normal process (FIG. 36), when the value of the chance state counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more and the game state is the chance state ST7 (step S1506: YES), the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set. It is determined whether "1" is set (step S1507). When the ART winning flag is set to "1" (step S1507: YES), the preparation state setting process is executed (step S1508). In the setting process, both the ART winning flag and the chance state counter of the main RAM 74 are cleared to “0”. Further, the information of the main RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1206 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 32) at the end of the game. After that, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is started is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S1509). The production-side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command to start the production corresponding to the preparation state ST8.

  On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the ART winning flag (step S1507: NO), the value of the chance state counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1510). When the value of the chance state counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1511: YES), the chance state ST7 ends and the game state returns to the normal game state ST1. In this case, a chance end command indicating that the chance state ST7 is ended and the game state is returned to the normal game state ST1 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1512). When the production side MPU 92 receives the chance end command, the production corresponding to the return of the chance state ST7 to the normal game state ST1 is started.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the main precursor winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1513). When "1" is set in the main omen winning flag, it means that the transition to the main omen state ST6 has been won at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process of the precursory state ST6 is executed. Specifically, the setting process of the sign signal counter is executed (step S1514). The main sign counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the main sign state ST6 is present and the number of remaining games in the main sign state ST6. In the setting process of the sign signal counter, the number of continuing games in the sign signal state ST6 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the random number circuit designated by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of continuing games selected by this lottery is any of 5 to 10 games, and the winning probability of the long continuing games is set higher than the winning probability of the short continuing games. If the affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the present precursor winning flag is cleared to "0".

  After that, a main sign start command indicating that the main sign state ST6 has started is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S1515). Information on the number of continuing games in the present indication state ST6 which is started this time is set in the present indication start command. The production side MPU 92 starts the production corresponding to the main indication state ST6 by receiving the main indication start command.

  After that, on condition that the value of the false aura counter is 1 or more (step S1516: YES), the termination process of the false aura state ST5 is executed to end the false aura state ST5 (step S1517). Specifically, the value of the false sign counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". That is, the true precursory state ST6 may be started even in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, and when the true precursory state ST6 is started in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, the false precursory state ST5 is interrupted. It is terminated even if it is in the middle instead of being terminated.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1513, the value of the precursor sign counter is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the precursor sign counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1518: YES) (step S1519). Then, when the value of the present precursor counter after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1520: YES), the preparation state setting process is executed (step S1521: YES). In the setting process, as described above, both the ART winning flag and the chance state counter of the main RAM 74 are cleared to “0”, and the preparation state process of step S1206 is executed in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). The information in the main RAM 74 is set so as to be set. After that, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is started is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S1522). The production-side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command to start the production corresponding to the preparation state ST8.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1518, it is determined whether or not the false precursor winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1523). When the false aura winning flag is set to "1", it means that the transition to the false aura state ST5 has been won at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process of the false precursory state ST5 is executed. Specifically, the false sign counter setting process is executed (step S1524). The false omen counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the false omen state ST5 and the number of remaining games in the false omen state ST5. In the false aura counter setting process, the number of continuing games in the false aura state ST5 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the random number circuit designated by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of continuous games selected by this lottery is any of 5 to 10 games, and the winning probability of the short continuous game number is set higher than the winning probability of the long continuous game number. If a positive determination is made in step S1523, the false precursor winning flag is cleared to "0".

  After that, a false sign start command indicating that the false sign state ST5 has been started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1525). Information on the number of continuing games in the false aura state ST5 to be started this time is set in the false aura start command. The production side MPU 92 starts the production corresponding to the false aura state ST5 by receiving the false aura start command.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1523, the value of the false sign counter is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the false sign counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1526: YES) (step S1527). When the value of the false aura counter is 1 or more, the main MPU 72 identifies that the gaming state is the false aura state ST5, and when the value of the false aura counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the false aura It specifies that the state ST5 has ended.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1526, the value of the advantage maintenance counter is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the advantage maintenance counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1528: YES) (step S1529). The advantageous maintenance counter maintains the advantageous section SC2 over the number of advantageous maintenance games even after shifting to the normal gaming state ST1 when the ART state ST9 ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 as described above. This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining games of the number of advantageous maintenance games when the game is performed. The main MPU 72 identifies the advantageous maintenance section when the value of the advantageous maintenance counter is 1 or more, and ends the advantageous maintenance section when the value of the advantageous maintenance counter becomes “0” after subtraction by one. Identify things.

  Next, the normal production control process executed by the production-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 38. It should be noted that the normal production control process is repeated at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the production-side MPU 92 when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1, the false precursory state ST5, the true precursory state ST6, and the chance state ST7. Executed.

  First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main indication effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1701). The main indication effect flag is a flag for the production-side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the main indication state ST6 is being executed. When the value of the sign signal effect flag is "0" (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the sign signal start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1702). When the present precursor start command is received (step S1702: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1703). The false aura effect flag is a flag for the effect MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the false aura state ST5 is being executed.

  When "1" is not set to the false aura effect flag (step S1703: NO), start setting processing of the amenity effect is executed (step S1704). In the start setting process of the main warning production, the information on the number of continuous games in the main warning state ST6 set in the current warning start command received this time is read. Then, the determination table of the main indication effect corresponding to the information on the number of continuous games is read, and the content of the series of main indication effects in the present indication state ST6 is determined by lottery using the determination table of the present indication effect. , The main indication effect table corresponding to the determination result is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The production-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production in accordance with the main indication effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the main indication effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the main MPU 72, the chance state corresponding to the chance state ST7 may be executed although the game state is not the chance state ST7. In such a situation, when the main indication start command is received from the main MPU 72, the start indication processing of step S1704 is executed to end the chance production and start the main indication production. . In this case, the chance effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0".

  When "1" is set to the false aura effect flag (step S1703: YES), it means that the main aura state ST6 is started in the middle of the false aura state ST5. In this case, the indication effect adjustment process is executed (step S1705). In the indication effect adjustment processing, the present indication effect table for causing the present indication effect having continuity of the effect to the content of the false indication effect at that time to be executed is read from the production side ROM 93 and the production side RAM 94. To memorize. In this case, the foreshadowing effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the foreboding state ST6 set in the foreboding start command received this time. By performing the production execution control in the production side MPU 92 in accordance with the main sign production table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image having the content having continuity with the content of the false precursor production that has been executed until then. The display device 63 executes the sign indication effect. When the main sign effect is started in the middle of the false sign effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false sign effect that have been executed so far and the main sign effect to be executed. The precursor effect of the total number of games and the number of games will be executed.

  When the process of step S1704 or step S1705 is executed, "1" is set to the main sign effect flag of the effect side RAM 94, and the value of the false sign effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S1706).

  When "1" is set in the present indication effect flag (step S1701: YES), it is determined whether a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1707). Receiving the preparation start command means that the precursory state ST6 has ended and the state has transitioned to the preparation state ST8. In this case, the preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S1708). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table that enables execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls production execution according to the preparation production table, whereby the preparation production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that it is in the preparation state ST8 by confirming the effect. After that, the value of the main indication effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1709).

  When the preparation start command has not been received (step S1707: NO), update setting processing of the present indication effect is executed (step S1710). In the update setting process, if the timing of updating the foreshadowing effect is due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referred to in the presenting effect production table, which is the current reference target, is set for one game. A process of changing according to a new start is executed. As a result, the execution content of the main predictive effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the main predictive effect.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1702, it is determined whether or not the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1711). The chance effect flag is a flag for the effect MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. When the value of the chance effect flag is "0" (step S1711: NO), it is determined whether or not a chance start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1712). When the chance start command is received (step S1712: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag of the effector RAM 94 (step S1713).

  When "1" is not set in the false aura effect flag (step S1713: NO), a chance effect start setting process is executed (step S1714). In the chance effect start setting processing, a chance effect table that enables execution of the chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. As described above, the chance state ST7 continues for five games unless the transition to the ART state ST9 is won. Therefore, the chance effect table is set with data corresponding to effects that continue for five games. The production side MPU 92 controls production execution according to the chance production table, so that the opportunity production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that it is the chance state ST7 by confirming the effect. After that, "1" is set to the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1715).

  On the other hand, when "1" is set in the false aura effect flag (step S1713: YES), "1" is set in the chance wait flag provided in the effect RAM 94 (step S1716). The chance waiting flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that it is in the state of waiting for the start of the chance effect due to the execution of the false omen effect corresponding to the false omen state ST5. Here, in the case where the main MPU 72 shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, the false precursory state ST5 is terminated in the middle of the transition to the chance state ST7. On the other hand, even if the production-side MPU 92 shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor effect, the main-side MPU 72 does not perform the control corresponding to the chance state ST7 without terminating the false precursor effect in the middle. Even if it is being executed, the fake aura effect is continued. As a result, by giving priority to the transition to the chance state ST7 as the gaming state over the continuation of the false precursory state ST5, while ensuring the profit of the player due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7, a false precursory production is produced as an effect. By continuing it, it is possible to prevent the contents of the presentation from being uncomfortable.

  When "1" is set in the chance effect flag (step S1711: YES), it is determined whether a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1717). Receiving the preparation start command means that the chance state ST7 is shifted to the ART state ST9, and the preparation state ST8 is transitioned to. In this case, the preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S1718). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table that enables execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls production execution according to the preparation production table, whereby the preparation production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that it is in the preparation state ST8 by confirming the effect.

  When the preparation start command is not received (step S1717: NO), it is determined whether or not the information to be referred to in the chance effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is information corresponding to the end timing of the opportunity effect. As a result, it is determined whether it is the timing for ending the chance effect (step S1719). When the number of continuous games is exhausted in the chance state ST7, the main MPU 72 transmits a chance end command, but the production MPU 92 receives the chance end command when grasping the end timing of the opportunity production. Not specified. Further, even if the chance end command is received from the main MPU 72, if the information to be referred to in the chance effect table is not the information corresponding to the end timing of the chance effect, it is not determined to be the end time of the chance effect. . As a result, although the details will be described later, when the execution of the chance effect is delayed because the false precursor effect is being executed, the chance effect is executed over five games which is the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7. It becomes possible.

  If it is the end timing of the chance effect (step S1719: YES), the end effect chance setting process is executed (step S1720). In the finish setting process of the chance production, the normal return production table corresponding to the termination of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal production table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the production side ROM 93 and produced. It is stored in the side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 performs production execution control in accordance with these production tables, whereby the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 end the chance state ST7 and return to the normal game state ST1. After the normal return effect is performed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, the player can confirm that the chance state ST7 has ended and returned to the normal game state ST1 by confirming the effect.

  When the process of step S1718 or step S1720 is executed, the value of the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to “0” (step S1721). If a negative determination is made in step S1719, an opportunity effect update setting process is executed (step S1722). In the update setting process, if the timing for updating the chance effect is due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referred to in the opportunity effect table that is currently the reference target is set as a new range for one game. Execute the process to change according to the start. As a result, the content of execution of the chance effect changes according to the number of continuing games of the chance effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1712, or if the process of step S1716 is executed, the effect control process for the false aura state is executed (step S1723). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the effect control process for the false aura state.

  When "1" is not set to the false precursor effect flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether or not a false precursor start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1802). When the false aura start command is received (step S1802: YES), a false aura effect start setting process is executed (step S1803). In the false omen effect start setting processing, information on the number of continuous games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time is read. Then, the determination table of the false aura effect corresponding to the information on the number of continuous games is read out, and the content of the series of false aura effects in the present false aura state ST5 is determined by lottery using the determination table of the false aura effect. , The false sign effect table corresponding to the determination result is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The effect MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the false sign effect table, so that the false sign effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, "1" is set to the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1804).

  When "1" is set to the false indication effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1801: YES), the information to be referred to in the false indication effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is the end timing of the false indication effect. By determining whether or not it is the corresponding information, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the false aura effect (step S1805). If it is the end timing of the false aura effect (step S1805: YES), it is determined whether or not the chance waiting flag of the effect RAM 94 is set to "1", and thus the start of the chance effect is on standby. Is determined (step S1806).

  When "1" is set to the chance waiting flag (step S1806: YES), a chance effect start setting process is executed (step S1807). In the chance effect start setting processing, a chance effect table that enables execution of the chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls production execution according to the chance production table, so that the opportunity production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that it is the chance state ST7 by confirming the effect.

  Even in the chance effect start setting process triggered by the fact that the chance wait flag is set to "1", the opportunity effect start setting is executed immediately when the chance start command is received from the main MPU 72. Similar to the processing, the chance effect table in which the data corresponding to the chance effect that continues for 5 games, which is the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7, is set is used. Then, as described above, in the situation where the chance effect is being executed, the chance end command is received from the main MPU 72 unless the information to be referred to in the chance effect table corresponds to the end timing of the chance effect. However, the chance production is not finished. As a result, the chance state ST7 is set in the middle of execution of the false aura effect, and the chance effect is kept waiting until the false aura effect is finished, and the chance effect is started after the false aura effect is finished. However, the chance effect is executed over 5 games, which is the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the chance state ST7 continues for 5 games. Become.

  After that, the chance waiting flag of the production side RAM94 is cleared to "0", the chance production flag of the production side RAM94 is set to "1", and the false sign production flag of the production side RAM94 is cleared to "0" (step S1808).

  If "1" is not set in the chance waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 at the end timing of the false omen effect (step S1805: YES, step S1806: NO), is the false omen start command received from the main MPU 72? It is determined whether or not (step S1809). As described above, in the main MPU 72, when the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, the false precursory state ST5 is ended and the chance state ST7 is started, while the production side The MPU 92 continues the false precursor effect. In this case, for example, when the first false omen state ST5 is determined to continue for 10 games, the chance state ST7 is reached one game after, and the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won in the chance state ST7. In the game state of the main side MPU 72 at the stage of executing the seventh game of the false aura effect in the side MPU 92, it is not the false aura state ST5 or the chance state ST7 but the normal game state ST1. Then, when the main MPU 72 decides to shift to the false precursory state ST5 under the situation, the production side MPU 92 newly receives the false precursory start command in the situation where the false precursory production is being executed. .

  When the false aura start command has not been received (step S1809: NO), a false aura effect end setting process is executed (step S1810). In the setting process of the end of the false sign effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false sign state ST5 and returning to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the effect side ROM 93. It is stored in the effect side RAM 94. Execution control of the effect is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables, so that the false sign state ST5 is ended and the normal game state ST1 is restored in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After the corresponding normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, by confirming the effect, the player can know that the precursor effect has ended and the game has returned to the normal game state ST1.

  When the false aura start command is received (step S1809: YES), the adjustment process of the false aura effect is executed (step S1811). In the adjustment process of the false aura effect, a false aura effect table for performing a false aura effect having continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false aura effect at that time is read from the effector ROM 93 and the effect side is read. It is stored in the RAM 94. In this case, the false omen effect production table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time. The effect is controlled by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the false aura effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed in a content having continuity with the content of the false aura effect that has been executed until then. False indication effect is executed on the display device 63. When the false aura effect is started in the middle of the false aura effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false aura effect that have been executed up to that time and the false aura effect to be executed. The precursor effect of the total number of games together with the number of games will be executed.

  If it is not the end timing of the false aura effect (step S1805: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the chance waiting flag of the effect RAM 94 (step S1812). When the chance waiting flag is set to "1" (step S1812: YES), it is determined whether a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1813). As already described, even in the situation where the effect MPU 92 is executing the control for executing the false aura effect, a situation in which the gaming state in the main MPU 72 is the chance state ST7 may occur. In such a situation, the main MPU 72 receives the transition win in the transition lottery process from the chance state ST7 to the ART state ST9. A preparation start command is transmitted to the rendering MPU 92.

  When the preparation start command is received (step S1813: YES), the preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S1814). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table that enables execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls production execution according to the preparation production table, whereby the preparation production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that it is in the preparation state ST8 by confirming the effect. It should be noted that, when the start setting process of the preparatory production is executed in the situation where the false aura effect is being executed, it corresponds to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST9 is won in such a manner as to interrupt the series of stories of the false aura effect. The effect is performed. After that, the false indication effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" and the chance wait flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1815).

  When the chance waiting flag is set to "1" and the preparation start command is not received from the main MPU 72 (step S1812: YES, step S1813: NO), the chance end command is received from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether or not (step S1816). When the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 controlled by the main MPU 72 is exhausted in the situation where the false indication effect is being executed, the main MPU 72 outputs the chance standby flag to "1". Receive the chance end command. When the chance end command is received (step S1816: YES), the chance wait flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1817).

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1812 or when a negative determination is made in step S1816, it is determined whether or not a false precursor start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1818). As described above, in the main MPU 72, when the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, the false precursory state ST5 is ended and the chance state ST7 is started, while the production side The MPU 92 continues the false precursor effect. In this case, for example, when the first false omen state ST5 is determined to continue for 10 games, the chance state ST7 is reached one game after, and the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won in the chance state ST7. In the game state of the main side MPU 72 at the stage of executing the seventh game of the false aura effect in the side MPU 92, it is not the false aura state ST5 or the chance state ST7 but the normal game state ST1. Then, when the main MPU 72 decides to shift to the false precursory state ST5 under the situation, the production side MPU 92 newly receives the false precursory start command in the situation where the false precursory production is being executed. .

  If the false aura effect start command has not been received (step S1818: NO), a false aura effect update setting process is executed (step S1819). In the update setting process, if the timing of updating the false aura effect is reached by newly executing one game, the range to be referred to in the false aura effect table that is currently the reference target of the one game is changed. A process of changing according to a new start is executed. As a result, the execution content of the false aura effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the false aura effect.

  When the false aura effect command is received (step S1818: YES), the adjustment process of the false aura effect is executed (step S1820). In the adjustment process of the false aura effect, a false aura effect table for performing a false aura effect having continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false aura effect at that time is read from the effector ROM 93 and the effect side is read. It is stored in the RAM 94. In this case, the false omen effect production table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time. The effect is controlled by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the false aura effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed in a content having continuity with the content of the false aura effect that has been executed until then. False indication effect is executed on the display device 63. When the false aura effect is started in the middle of the false aura effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false aura effect that have been executed up to that time and the false aura effect to be executed. The precursor effect of the total number of games together with the number of games will be executed.

  Next, how the false aura effect and the chance effect are executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 40 (a) shows the period of staying in the false precursory state ST5, FIG. 40 (b) shows the period of staying in the chance state ST7, and FIG. 40 (c) shows the period of staying in the preparation state ST8. 40 (d) shows the period during which the false aura effect is being executed, FIG. 40 (e) shows the period during which the chance effect is being executed, and FIG. 40 (f) shows the ART state ST9. This indicates the period during which the effect indicating that the winning has been performed is being executed.

  First, a case will be described in which the chance state ST7 shifts in the middle of the false aura state ST5, but the chance state ST7 ends before the false aura effect is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), at the timing of t1, the false precursory state ST5 is started by the control by the main MPU 72, and as shown in FIG. Be started. After that, at the timing of t2, the game state shifts from the false precursory state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72 as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect does not start as shown in FIG. 40 (e), and the false aura effect continues as shown in FIG. 40 (d). To be done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuing games in the chance state ST7 is exhausted at the timing of t3 which is a situation in which the false aura effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 40 (d). The chance state ST7 is ended by the control by the main MPU 72. Even in this case, since the number of continuing games of the false aura effect set at the timing when the transition to the false aura state ST5 occurs at the timing of t1 is not exhausted, the false as shown in FIG. The precursor production is continued. Thereafter, at time t4, the number of continuous games of the false aura effect is exhausted, so that the false aura effect is ended as shown in FIG. 40 (d).

  Next, a case will be described in which the chance transition to the chance state ST7 is made in the middle of the false omen state ST5 and the transition to the ART state ST9 is elected while the false omen effect is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), at the timing of t5, by the control by the main MPU 72, the false precursory state ST5 is started, and as shown in FIG. Be started. After that, at the timing of t6, the game state shifts from the false precursory state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72 as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect does not start as shown in FIG. 40 (e), and the false aura effect continues as shown in FIG. 40 (d). To be done.

  After that, at the timing of t7, the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed in the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72, and the transition win is performed in the transition lottery process. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the game state shifts from the chance state ST7 to the preparation state ST8 under the control of the main MPU 72 as shown in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c). Further, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 40 (d) and 40 (f), the false precursor effect is ended, and the effect indicating that the ART state ST9 is won is started. Then, the effect is executed until the timing of t8.

  As described above, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness by suddenly executing the effect indicating that the player has won the ART state ST9 during the false aura effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, a case will be described in which the chance production is continuously started in the chance state ST7 even at the timing when the false omen production is finished while the false omen state ST5 is being performed.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), at the timing of t9, by the control by the main MPU 72, the false precursory state ST5 is started, and as shown in FIG. Be started. After that, at the timing of t10, the game state shifts from the false precursor state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72 as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect does not start as shown in FIG. 40 (e), and the false aura effect continues as shown in FIG. 40 (d). To be done.

  After that, at the timing of t11 in which the chance state ST7 is maintained in the control by the main MPU 72, the false aura effect is ended as shown in FIG. 40 (d), and thus shown in FIG. 40 (e). The chance production is started. In this case, at the timing of t11, since the predetermined number of games have already been exhausted after the transition to the chance state ST7, the remaining number of continuing games in the chance state ST7 is less than that of five games which is the end reference game number in the chance state ST7. Is also a small number of games. However, the number of continued games of the chance effect started at the timing of t11 is set to 5 games which is the end reference game number of the chance state ST7.

  Then, at the timing of t12, the chance state ST7 ends as shown in FIG. However, at the timing of t12, the number of continuous games for chance production still remains, so the opportunity production is continued as shown in FIG. 40 (e). Therefore, after the timing of t12, the chance effect is executed even though the game state is not the chance state ST7. Then, at the timing of t13, the chance effect is ended as shown in FIG.

  Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 before and after the timing of t11 will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b). FIG. 41A shows a state in which an image corresponding to the false precursor effect is displayed on the image display device 63 at a timing before the timing of t11, and FIG. 41B shows an image after the timing of t11. The state where the display of the image corresponding to the chance effect is started on the display device 63 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the false aura effect, the first character image G4 and the second character image G5 are displayed on the image display device 63, and the first character image G4 and the second character image G5 are displayed. The video is displayed as if they were facing each other. It should be noted that such a moving image display that is confronting each other is also executed in the sign presentation effect. Further, when the precursor effect is finished without the transition to the ART state ST9 being won, a moving image display in which the first character image G4 is finally defeated by the second character image G5 is displayed, and the state shifts to the ART state ST9. In the case where the transition effect is selected and the precursor effect is finished, the moving image display is finally performed so that the first character image G4 wins the second character image G5.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), in the chance effect, the image display device 63 displays a suggestion image G6 suggesting that the chance state ST7 is present, and at the same time, the number-of-games image G7 indicating the remaining number of continuous games in the opportunity effect. Is displayed. In this case, in the control by the main MPU 72, the chance effect is started at the timing when it shifts to the chance state ST7, and in the situation where the control by the main MPU 72 is the chance state ST7, the false aura effect is ended and the false effect is generated. In any case where the chance effect is started following the precursor effect, an image showing five games, which is the end reference game number in the chance state ST7, is displayed as the game number image G7. As a result, since the game in the chance state ST7 has already been digested in the situation where the false omen effect is being executed, at the timing when the opportunity effect is started following the false omen effect, the number of remaining games in the chance state ST7 is continued. Even if the number of games is smaller than the number of end reference games, it is possible to expect the player to win the transition to the ART state ST9 over the number of end reference games.

  Further, in the chance state ST7, each game is given an opportunity to execute a lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, and even if the chance to shift to the ART state ST9 is won even in the middle of the chance state ST7, A transition to the preparation state ST8 occurs. Therefore, in the case where the number of continuous games in the chance production is larger than the number of remaining continuous games in the chance state ST7 in the case where the chance production is executed subsequently to the false omen production, before the termination of the chance state ST7. For example, a transition to the preparation state ST8 may occur while the chance effect is being executed, and in the situation where the chance effect is being executed after the opportunity state ST7 has ended, the chance state ST7 changes to the ART state ST9. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the transition was not won.

<Regarding processing related to bonus status>
Next, a process relating to the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the bonus process executed by the main MPU 72. The bonus process is executed in step S1201 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). Since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the bonus process is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Executed.

  When the BB prize corresponding to the BB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 is established (step S1901: YES), "1" is set to the BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1902). The BB flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the BB state ST3.

  When the BB prize established this time is the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize (step S1903: YES), "1" is set to the specific bonus flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1904). The third BB winning data that enables the establishment of the third BB winning is any one of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 19) and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 21). Is also set to the index value IV = 7, and the fourth BB winning data that enables the establishment of the fourth BB winning is set to the index value IV = 8 in any of these lottery tables. Then, these index values IV = 7, 8 are set as winning combinations having the same winning probability among the setting values of “1” to “6”. In other words, the specific bonus flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not a bonus prize having no difference in winning probability has been established. Although details will be described later, when a bonus prize with a difference in winning probability is established, the game section is not set to shift from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state. Then, when a bonus prize is established in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability, the game section is set to shift from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state.

  On the other hand, when the RB winning corresponding to the RB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 is established (step S1905: YES), the RB flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906). The RB flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the RB state ST4.

  If the RB prize established this time is the first RB prize (step S1907: YES), the specific bonus flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1908). The first RB winning data that enables the establishment of the first RB winning is any one of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 19) and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 21). Is also set to the index value IV = 9. The index value IV = 9 is set as a winning combination having the same winning probability between the setting values of "1" to "6". Therefore, in order for the main MPU 72 to specify that the RB winning this time corresponds to the establishment of the bonus winning in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability, the specific bonus flag is set to "1" in step S1908. set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the process of step S1904 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1907, or the process of step S1908 is executed, the bonus combination corresponding to the present bonus winning is won. It is determined whether or not the game state at the time of playing is the present omen state ST6 (step S1909). The present precursor state ST6 is a gaming state in which the transition to the preparation state ST8 has been confirmed when the number of continuous games in the present precursor state ST6 has been exhausted. Therefore, in the case of the precursory state ST6 (step S1909 :: YES), the ART winning process is executed to shift to the preparation state ST8 after the end of the present bonus state (step S1910). In the ART winning process, the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The ART winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is necessary to shift to the preparation state ST8 after the bonus state ends. Further, in the ART winning process, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. By receiving the ART winning command, the effect MPU 92 causes the effect indicating that the current bonus state ends to the ART state ST9 to be executed at the start of the current bonus state.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1909 or when the processing of step S1910 is executed, the total payout counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1911). The total payout counter is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the total number of game media given to the player in the bonus state. The main MPU 72 specifies whether or not the ending condition of the bonus state is satisfied based on the value of the total payout counter.

  After that, a bonus start command indicating that the bonus state is started is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S1912). Information indicating whether the bonus state to be started this time is the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is set in the bonus start command. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the bonus start command, the effect corresponding to the type of bonus state that is the start target this time is started.

  After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main side ending effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S1913). The main side ending effect flag is a flag for specifying that the main side MPU 72 is executing the ending effect that is started when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, which will be described in detail later. is there. If a negative determination is made in step S1913, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S1914).

  In the setting process of the freeze counter, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period at the start of the bonus (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus process, the process stands by in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12). As a result, the start of a new game is on standby. In this way, in the state where the start of a new game is on standby, the effect corresponding to the start of the bonus state is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, so that the transition to the bonus state is performed. It is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the occurrence of the occurrence of ".", And it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction by emphasizing the transition to the bonus state. The state of waiting in step S312 in the normal processing (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes “0”.

  When "1" is set to the BB flag or the RB flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1915: YES), the bonus state processing is executed (step S1916). In the bonus state process, the progress of the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is controlled.

  Next, the bonus process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S518 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for winning combinations. The process of step S518 is executed after the winning / non-winning determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

  If this time is the start game of the bonus state which is the first game executed after shifting to the bonus state (step S2001: YES), the process for the start game of the bonus state shown in steps S2002 to S2020 is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the current bonus state is started in the situation of the advantageous zone SC2. (Step S2002). When the advantageous zone flag is set to "1" (step S2002: YES), the process for giving the player the profit related to the ART state ST9 after step S2006 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of starting the bonus state in the advantageous section SC2.

  As described above, when the false precursory state ST5 is reached, the false precursory effect is executed, but the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the false precursory state ST5 ends. However, in the false omen state ST5, the advantageous section SC2 is maintained. In this case, when the bonus state is started in the situation of the advantageous section SC2 as described above, the profit related to the ART state ST9 can be given to the player. As a result, the false omen state ST5 is made to function not only as a gaming state for expecting the player to be the actual omen state ST6 but also as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the bonus state is started. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the indication effect.

  Even if the advantageous zone flag is not set to "1" (step S2002: NO), if the specific bonus flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), the main side The advantageous zone flag of the RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2004), and the advantageous zone display section 67 is switched from the extinguished state to the lit state (step S2005). The case where the specific bonus flag is set to "1" is, as described above, the case where the present bonus state is triggered by the bonus combination having no difference in the winning probabilities. That is, in the case where the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination having no setting difference in the winning probability exists, the game in which the bonus state is started even if the game section before the bonus state is the normal section SC1 Therefore, the advantageous zone SC2 is set. Then, by setting the advantageous section SC2 in the game in which the bonus state is started, the processing for giving the player the profit related to the ART state ST9 after step S2006 is executed. Therefore, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination having no setting difference in the winning probability may be a more advantageous bonus state than the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination having the setting difference in winning probability. It will be possible.

  Here, as a winning combination having no difference in winning probability setting, a winning combination in which the third BB winning data is set (index value IV = 7) and a winning combination in which the fourth BB winning data is set (index value IV = 8) However, if there is a bonus internal state ST2 in which the third BB winning data or the fourth BB winning data is set in the advantageous section SC2, there is an opportunity to shift from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1. Be done. Since the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly ended when the number of continuing games reaches the upper limit number of games, the number of games consumed in the situation other than the ART state ST9 may not be measured as much as the number of continuing games of the advantageous section SC2. preferable. In this case, when the bonus state is set, the advantageous game SC2 is surely set in the starting game, and when the bonus state is started, the bonus section is temporarily shifted to the normal section SC1. As a result, for example, when the bonus state corresponding to the bonus hand for which there is no difference in winning probability setting is started in the false aura state ST5, the false aura state ST5 is the advantageous zone SC2. It is possible to once clear the number of games exhausted by, and then newly shift to the advantageous section SC2.

  A processing configuration for producing the action will be described. In the second control process of the gaming section (FIG. 33), in the bonus internal state ST2 in which the third BB winning data or the fourth BB winning data is set (step S1316: YES), the gaming state in which the winning data is set Is one of the precursory state ST6, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9 (step S1317). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1317, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is not executed. When shifting to the normal section SC1, the right of executing the initialization processing of the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the ART state ST9 is also lost. Therefore, in the case of the precursory state ST6, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, In order to prevent the disappearance of the right, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is not executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1317, it is determined whether or not information of the winning number of "1" to "3" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S1318). These winning numbers are winning numbers for which the first bell winning is realized when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the correct stop order. In the bonus internal state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified even if the winning number information is set even in the advantageous section SC2.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1318, it is determined whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game is the stop order corresponding to the fall (step S1319). The stop order corresponding to the falling is a stop order in which the first bell prize is not established, and is set as a different stop order for each of the winning numbers “1” to “3”. Further, the stop order corresponding to the fall is a stop order in which the stop order of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the first stop, the second stop and the third stop is determined. Since the stop order corresponding to the falling is set in this way, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by the player happens to coincide with the stop order corresponding to the falling. It becomes possible to do so. The stop order corresponding to the falling is not limited to the stop order of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop, and the reel 32L of the first stop, The configuration may be determined only by the types of 32M and 32R. Further, although the effect that suggests to the player that the advantageous section SC2 is once ended due to the stop order corresponding to the falling is not executed, the effect may be executed.

  If the stop order is for falling (step S1319: YES), the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed on condition that the value of the unreported flag in the main RAM 74 is “0” (step S1320: YES). At the same time (step S1321), the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S1322). As a result, the game section is once shifted to the normal section SC1. In addition, even if the game moves to the normal section SC1 in this way, if the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize is established and the game moves to the BB state ST3, the game section is surely advantageous in the first game of the BB state ST3. The profit generated by being in the advantageous section SC2 is also given as the section shifts to the section SC2.

  It should be noted that the player may be informed of the order of stopping the falls. In this case, it is possible to positively cause the transition to the normal section SC1 in the above situation.

  Returning to the explanation of the bonus process at the start of the game (FIG. 43), if the affirmative judgment is made in step S2002 or the process of step S2005 is executed, it is the normal game state ST1 and the bonus state of this time is in the advantageous maintenance section. It is determined whether or not the bonus prize that has triggered the start of is established (step S2006). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2007). That is, when the bonus winning is established in the advantage maintaining section in the normal game state ST1, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus winning ends on condition that the start game of the bonus state is executed in the advantage section SC2. After that, the state shifts to the preparation state ST8. As a result, the player expects that the bonus prize will be established in the advantageous maintenance section. After that, the ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S2008). By receiving the ART winning command, the effect MPU 92 causes the effect indicating that the current bonus state ends to the ART state ST9 to be executed in the bonus state start game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2006 or if the processing in step S2008 is executed, it is necessary that the game state at the timing when the bonus combination that triggered the present bonus state is selected is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9. (Step S2009: YES) or on condition that the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” (step S2010: YES), the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added. Execute the process. As the processing for the addition, the addition table at the start of the bonus is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S2011). The addition table at the start of the bonus is common regardless of the type of bonus state this time, but at least one of the probability of being added and the expected number of addition games is different depending on the type of bonus state. It may be configured. Also, the bonus addition table at the start of the bonus is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of being added and the expected number of addition games is different depending on the setting value. It may be configured to be.

  Then, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2012). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the additional lottery process at the time of starting the bonus, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S2012 with the bonus addition table read at step S2011 at the start of bonus, it is determined whether or not the bonus is added (step S2013). Specifically, a lottery result indicating that the number of additional games is “0” is set in the additional table at the start of the bonus, and there are a plurality of types of lottery results for the number of additional games to be one or more games. It is set. In step S2013, it is determined whether or not any one of the lottery results of the number of additional games to be played is selected.

  When the addition is won (step S2013: YES), the addition setting process is executed (step S2014). In the addition setting process, the value of the addition game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. Then, the bonus addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S2015). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the add-on command in the bonus, the effect MPU 92 executes the effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time is given.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is neither the preparation state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (Steps S2009 and S2010: NO), a process for determining whether to shift to the ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for determining whether to shift to the ART state ST9, the ART direct hit table is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S2016). The ART direct hit table is common regardless of the type of bonus state this time, but the probability of transition winning to the ART state ST9 may be different depending on the type of bonus state. Further, although the ART direct hit table is common between the set values of "1" to "6", the probability of transition winning to the ART state ST9 may be different depending on the set value. Good.

  Then, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2017). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, as described above, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers of "0" to "255", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing of positive determination. Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S2017 with the ART direct hit table read in step S2016, it is determined whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won (step S2018).

  When the transition to the ART state ST9 is won (step S2018: YES), the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2019). After that, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S2020). By receiving the ART winning command, the effect MPU 92 causes the effect indicating that the current bonus state ends to the ART state ST9 to be executed in the bonus state start game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, a negative determination is made in step S2003, a negative determination is made in step S2013, the process of step S2015 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S2018, or When the process of step S2020 is executed, the game start process during the bonus is executed (step S2021). That is, in the game in which the bonus state is started, even if the addition process of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9, or the transition process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 is executed, The middle game start processing is executed. Then, in the game starting process during the bonus, the lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 or the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is executed.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the game start processing during the bonus. In the process at the time of starting the game during the bonus, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantage section flag of the main RAM 74, that is, whether the game section is the advantage section SC2 (step S2101). When it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S2101: YES), it is determined whether or not the player has won the lottery trigger combination in this game (step S2102). Specifically, it is determined that a lottery trigger role is won when a winning combination that allows the first watermelon prize to be established or a winning combination that allows the cherry prize to be established.

  When an affirmative decision is made in step S2102, on condition that the game state at the timing when the bonus combination that triggered the present bonus state is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2103: YES), or On condition that the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2104: YES), a process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed. As the processing for the addition, the addition table in the bonus is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S2105). The additional table in the bonus is common regardless of the type of bonus state this time, but at least one of the probability of additional winning and the expected number of additional games is different depending on the type of bonus state. May be In addition, the additional table in the bonus is common regardless of the type of lottery trigger mechanism that was won this time, but the probability that it will be added according to the type of lottery trigger mechanism that was won this time and the expected addition game At least one of the numbers may be different. Further, the bonus addition table is common between the setting values of “1” to “6”, but at least one of the probability of being added winning and the expected number of addition games is different according to the setting value. It may be configured to have.

  Here, the additional table in the bonus is set to have a lower probability of additional winning than the additional table at the start of the bonus read from the main ROM 73 in step S2011 in the bonus process (FIG. 43) at the start of the game. In addition, the number of games expected to be added is small. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected degree of addition of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 in the game in which the bonus state is started, compared to the second and subsequent games in the bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the bonus and the expected number of additional games may be the same or substantially the same in the bonus addition table and the bonus addition start table.

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2106). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the bonus lottery processing during the bonus, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2106 with the addition table in the bonus read in step S2105, it is determined whether or not the addition is won (step S2107). Specifically, in the bonus addition table, a lottery result indicating that the number of addition games is “0” game is set, and a plurality of types of lottery results of the number of addition games to be one game or more are set. Has been done. In step S2107, it is determined whether or not any one of the lottery results of the number of additional games to be added is selected.

  When the addition is won (step S2107: YES), the addition setting process is executed (step S2108). In the addition setting process, the value of the addition game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. After that, in the bonus state, a bonus addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S2109). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the add-on command in the bonus, the effect MPU 92 executes the effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time is given.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is neither the preparation state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (Steps S2103 and S2104: NO), a process for determining whether to shift to the ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for deciding whether or not to shift to the ART state ST9, first, the during-bonus shift table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2110). The in-bonus transition table is common regardless of the type of bonus state this time, but the probability of transition winning to the ART state ST9 may be different depending on the type of bonus state. In addition, the transition table during bonus is common regardless of the type of the lottery opportunity that has been won this time, but the probability of being transitioned to the ART state ST9 depending on the type of lottery opportunity that has been won this time May be different. Further, the bonus transition table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but the probability of transition winning to the ART state ST9 is different depending on the setting value. Good.

  Here, the transition table during the bonus has a lower probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 than the ART direct hit table read from the main ROM 73 in step S2016 in the bonus process (FIG. 43) at the start of the game. It is set. This makes it possible to increase the degree of expectation of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the game in which the bonus state has started, compared to the second and subsequent games in the bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the odds of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may be the same or substantially the same in the bonus transition table and the ART direct hit table.

  Then, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2111). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, as described above, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers of "0" to "255", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing of positive determination. Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S2111 with the bonus transition table read in step S2110, it is determined whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won (step S2112).

  When the transition to the ART state ST9 is won (step S2112: YES), "1" is set to the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2113). After that, the ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2114). By receiving the ART winning command, the effect MPU 92 causes an effect indicating that the current bonus state ends to the ART state ST9 to be executed in the current game.

  Next, the bonus state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bonus state process is executed in step S1916 of the bonus process (FIG. 42). Since the bonus process is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the bonus state process is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. It

  When a game medium has been added in the current game (step S2201: YES), a value corresponding to the number of game media added this time is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2202). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or larger than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state (step S2203). Specifically, when the current bonus state is the BB state ST3, it is determined whether or not the BB end reference number (for example, “350”) or more, and when the current bonus state is the RB state ST4. Determines whether or not the number is equal to or more than the RB end reference number (for example, “150”).

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2203, it is conditional that the game state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2204: YES). Alternatively, on condition that the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2205: YES), the preparation state setting process is executed (step S2206). In the setting process, the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, the information of the main RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1206 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 32) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state after the end of the present bonus state becomes the preparation state ST8.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2205, or when the processing of step S2206 is executed, a bonus end command indicating that the bonus state is ended is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S2207). In the bonus end command, information indicating whether the game state after the end of the bonus state is the normal game state ST1 or the preparation state ST8 is set. When the effect MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, the effect indicating that the bonus state ends is started, and after the end of the effect, the effect corresponding to the game state after the end of the bonus state is generated. Let it get started.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2208). The main side ending effect flag is a flag for specifying that the main side MPU 72 is executing the ending effect that is started when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, which will be described in detail later. is there. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S2209).

  In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the end of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus state process, the process stands by in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12). As a result, the start of a new game is on standby. In this way, the bonus state is ended by executing an effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. It is possible for the player to clearly recognize. The state of waiting in step S312 in the normal processing (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes “0”.

<About ART status ST9>
Next, the ART state ST9 will be described. First, the preparation state process executed in the preparation state ST8 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The preparation state process is executed in step S1206 in the corresponding process (FIG. 32) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the preparation state process is also performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Executed.

  First, it is determined whether or not a winning number of any of "4" to "8", "15", and "16" has been set in the present lottery processing (FIG. 16) (step S2301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the directly loaded table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2302). In this case, the direct addition table is set such that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being directly added to the winning and the number of games to be added is larger. Note that the direct addition table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of being directly added to the winning and the expected number of additional games is different depending on the setting value. It may be configured to have.

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2303). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the direct addition lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. get. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number obtained in step S2303 with the direct overlay table read in step S2302, it is determined whether or not the direct overlay win is achieved (step S2304). Specifically, a lottery result indicating that the number of additional games is a “0” game is set in the direct addition table, and a plurality of types of lottery results of the number of additional games that are one or more games are set. There is. In step S2304, it is determined whether or not any one of the lottery results for the number of additional games to be played is selected.

  When the direct addition is won (step S2304: YES), the addition setting process is executed (step S2305). In the addition setting process, the value of the addition game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, in preparation state ST8, an addition command during preparation indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to production-side MPU 92 (step S2306). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the add-on command which is being prepared, the effect MPU 92 executes the effect indicating that the number of the add-on games selected this time is given.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2301, a negative determination is made in step S2304, or the processing of step S2306 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second RT replay prize is established in the current game (step S2307). ). If the second RT replay prize has been established (step S2307: YES), this means that the transition trigger from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 has occurred, and therefore the ART start process is executed (step S2308). In the ART starting process, the information of the main RAM 74 is set so that the ART state process of step S1207 is executed in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). As a result, the game state becomes the ART state ST9.

  Further, in the ART starting process, when the game state before the preparation state ST8 is started is the bonus state and the game state immediately before the bonus state is the ART state ST9, it means that the state has returned to the ART state ST9. Therefore, the setting for returning to the game situation in the ART state ST9 immediately before shifting to the bonus state is performed. However, in the bonus state, when the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is added, the state in which the number of added games is added is returned to the ART state ST9. In addition, in the ART start process, when the preparation state ST8 of this time is triggered by the transition to the ART state ST9 in the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the precursory state ST6, or the chance state ST7, , The information of 50 games which is the number of games started in the ART state ST9 is added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74. In this case, when the game state before the preparation state ST8 is the bonus state and in addition to the transition winning to the ART state ST9 in the bonus state, the additional winning number of the remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 occurs. Means that the ART state ST9 is started in a state in which the number of continuous games added to the fact that the player has won the addition is added. In addition, in the preparation state ST8, if the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been increased, the ART state ST9 is added in a state in which the number of continuous games added to the additional state winning is added. Will be started.

  After that, an ART start command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has occurred is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S2309). In the ART start command, information indicating whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 this time corresponds to the return to the ART state ST9 is set, and if the return to the ART state ST9 does not correspond, the ART state is set. Information indicating that 50 games have been given as the start game number in ST9 is set. The production side MPU 92 receives the ART start command so that the production indicating that the ART state ST9 has started is executed, and after the production is finished, the production corresponding to the ART state ST9 is executed. To do so. Further, in the case where the effect MPU 92 corresponds to the return of the ART state ST9, the execution state of the effect at the timing when the ART state ST9 previously ended halfway is restarted.

  FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74 used by the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST9. As shown in FIG. 47A, the main RAM 74 is provided with an ART game number counter 121 and a B loop continuation counter 122. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. The B-loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games in which the B-loop, which will be described later, in which the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is added to each game is continued.

  FIG. 47B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the effect side RAM 94 used by the effect side MPU 92 in the ART state ST9. As shown in FIG. 47B, the production side RAM 94 is provided with an ART subtraction target counter 125, a display counter 126, a stock game number counter 127, and a stock area 128 for special addition production.

  The ART subtraction target counter 125 is a counter that is decremented by 1 by the effecting MPU 92 each time one game is executed in the ART state ST9. When the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 becomes "0", an effect indicating whether or not the ART state ST9 ends is executed.

  The display counter 126 is a counter that, like the ART subtraction target counter 125, is decremented by 1 by the effect MPU 92 each time one game is executed in the ART state ST9. In the ART state ST9, the value set in the display counter 126 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9.

  The stock game number counter 127 is a counter in which the difference between the actual remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 and the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 is set. In other words, the stock game number counter 127 is a counter for the production side MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 which is actually acquired although not notified to the player.

  The special addition effect stock area 128 includes information indicating that the special addition effect, which is an effect as if the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added over a plurality of games, and the type of the special additional effect. Is an area for storing the information of.

  Next, the additional processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The addition process is executed in step S519 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for winning combinations. The process of step S519 is executed after the winning / non-winning combination determination is completed at the start of the game.

  First, it is determined whether or not the ART state is ST9 (step S2401). If it is not in the ART state ST9, the processes after step S2402 are not executed. As a result, in the game states other than the ART state ST9, the processes after step S2402 are not executed.

  Here, for example, either BB winning data or RB winning data may be set in the middle of the ART state ST9. However, in the bonus internal state ST2 in which these bonus winning data are set, the processing after step S2402 is executed. Not done. Even if the bonus internal state ST2 is set in the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section SC2 is maintained as long as the transition condition to the normal section SC1 as described above is not satisfied, and the advantageous section SC2 is also set in the subsequent bonus state. Maintained. Further, when the state shifts to the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 in the middle of the ART state ST9, the processing from step S2402 onward is not executed regardless of whether the shift has passed through the bonus internal state ST2. In this case, after the bonus state ends, the state returns to the ART state ST9 via the preparation state ST8. However, when the state returns to the ART state ST9, the state of the ART state ST9 is interrupted during the ART state ST9. It will be the situation just before being done. For example, if ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of A loop described later, A loop is restarted after returning to ART state ST9, and ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of B loop described later. After returning to the state ST9, the B loop is restarted. This is the same for the effect in the effect MPU 92.

  In the case of the ART state ST9 (step S2401: YES), if the processes of steps S2402 to S2405 are executed, the processes of step S2406 and subsequent steps are executed. In the processing from step S2406 onward, as processing for determining whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, directly-added occurrence lottery processing, A-loop occurrence lottery processing, and B-loop occurrence lottery processing. And execute. The direct addition is an addition mode in which the addition is generated only in the game in which the direct addition is selected in the lottery process for the direct addition, and is the addition mode in which the number of the additional games is notified to the player. On the other hand, the A loop and the B loop are in the add-on state in which a fixed number of additional games (specifically, 50 games) is given in each game while the continuous lottery process is in continuous winning. However, even if the number of additional games is given in the A loop and the B loop, the number of additional games is not immediately notified to the player, and the number of additional games is notified to the player when the notification condition is satisfied. To be done. Further, the A loop and the B loop are different from each other in the transition condition to the additional state and in the manner of notifying the player of the number of additional games.

  In step S2406, it is determined whether or not a winning number of any of "4" to "8", "15", and "16" has been set in the current lottery processing (FIG. 16). If an affirmative decision is made in step S2406, a directly-added occurrence lottery process is executed. Specifically, it reads out the directly loaded table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery processing (FIG. 16) from the main ROM 73 (step S2407). In this case, the direct addition table is set such that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being directly added to the winning and the number of games to be added is larger. Note that the direct addition table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of being directly added to the winning and the expected number of additional games is different depending on the setting value. It may be configured to have. The direct overlay table to be read in step S2407 is the same as the direct overlay table to be read in step S2302 in the preparation state process (FIG. 46).

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2408). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the direct addition lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. get. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S2408 against the direct overlay table read in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the direct overlay win is achieved (step S2409). Specifically, a lottery result indicating that the number of additional games is a “0” game is set in the direct addition table, and a plurality of types of lottery results of the number of additional games that are one or more games are set. There is. In step S2409, it is determined whether or not any one of the lottery results of the number of additional games to be played is selected. As the number of games selected in this case, 10 games, 20 games, 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games are set.

  When the direct addition is won (step S2409: YES), the addition setting process is executed (step S2410). In the addition setting process, the value of the addition game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, the direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S2411). The directly added command includes information about the number of additional games that have occurred this time and information about the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the direct addition command, the effect MPU 92 executes the effect indicating that the number of addition games selected this time is given.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2409, or when the processing of step S2411 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in either the A loop flag or the B loop flag of the main RAM 74. Then, it is determined whether the current state is in the A loop or the B loop (step S2412). If a negative determination is made in step S2412, the A loop occurrence lottery process is executed. Specifically, first, the A loop lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2413). The A-loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the current A-loop lottery process, and is common between the set values of "1" to "6". ing.

  FIG. 49A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the A loop lottery table. In the A loop lottery table, as a lottery result, there is a deviation result, a selection result of the first continuous lottery table, a selection result of the second continuous lottery table, a selection result of the third continuous lottery table, and a fourth continuous lottery table. The selection result and exists. When any one of the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is selected in the A loop occurrence lottery process, the A loop occurrence lottery is won. Further, in the A-loop lottery table, the selection rates of the first to fourth continuous lottery tables are the same, but the selection rates are not limited to this, and the selection rates may be different from each other. Note that the probability that the A loop is generated may be different depending on the type of the winning number that triggered the execution of the A loop generation lottery process. For example, the A-loop lottery table may be set so that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being a winning candidate for the A-loop. Further, the A loop lottery table is common between the set values of "1" to "6", but the probability that the A loop is generated may be different depending on the set value.

  In the first to fourth continuous lottery tables, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), data is set to determine the continuation rate of the A loop according to the number of games in which the A loop has continued. In this case, the continuation rate setting mode differs depending on the type of the first to fourth continuous lottery tables. Specifically, as the continuation rate of the first game, 90% is set in the first continuous lottery table, 50% is set in the second continuous lottery table, and 30% is set in the third continuous lottery table. Therefore, 10% is set in the fourth continuous lottery table. As the continuation rate of the second game, 10% is set in the first continuous lottery table, 20% is set in the second continuous lottery table, and 30% is set in the third continuous lottery table, and the fourth continuation is set. 90% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the third game, 10% is set in the first continuous lottery table, 20% is set in the second continuous lottery table, and 30% is set in the third continuous lottery table, and the fourth continuation is set. 30% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the fourth to tenth games, 10% is set in the first continuous lottery table, 20% is set in the second continuous lottery table, and 30% is set in the third continuous lottery table. In the fourth continuous lottery table, 10% is set. Then, when the A loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate of the 1st game is used again. That is, the continuous lottery table to be used is looped and used in each cycle with 10 games as one cycle.

  Returning to the description of the addition process (FIG. 48), after the A loop lottery table is read in step S2413, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2414). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the generation lottery process of the A loop, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S2414 with the A loop lottery table read in step S2413, it is determined whether or not the A loop has been generated (step S2415).

  When it is determined that the A loop has been generated (step S2415: YES), "1" is set to the A loop flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2416). As a result, the addition by the A loop will occur from the next game. Further, the continuous lottery table selected using the A-loop lottery table in step S2415 is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S2417).

  After that, the addition process of the ART game number counter 121 is executed (step S2418). In the addition processing, “10” is added to the ART game number counter 121. As a result, in the case where the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is "0" and the occurrence of the A loop is won, it is possible to continue the ART state ST9 and generate the addition by the A loop. Become. In addition, 10 games are the number of games that can be selected even when the player is directly on top winning (step S2409: YES). This prevents the player from distinguishing whether the addition of 10 games occurs due to the occurrence of the A loop occurrence win, whether it is due to the direct addition or the A loop occurrence win. It becomes possible.

  After that, an A-loop winning command indicating that the player has won the A-loop is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S2419). In the A loop winning command, not only the information indicating that the A loop has been won, but also the information indicating that the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 has been increased by "10" and the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. Information on the number of continuing games is also set. By receiving the A-loop winning command, the production-side MPU 92 executes the expected production for expecting the player that a special addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 will occur.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2406, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in either the A loop flag or the B loop flag of the main RAM 74, so that the current state is the A loop or B It is determined whether it is in the loop (step S2420). When a negative determination is made in step S2420, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter provided in the main RAM 74 is greater than or equal to the cycle reference value (step S2421). The cycle counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the timing of executing the B-loop generation lottery process, and a new game is started in the ART state ST9 and neither A loop nor B loop. If it is, 1 is added and “0” is cleared by executing the B loop generation lottery process. "100" is set as the cycle reference value. Therefore, if 100 or more games are executed in the ART state ST9 and the game is neither the A loop nor the B loop, the B loop generation lottery process is executed.

  Here, even if the value of the cycle counter becomes equal to or greater than the cycle reference value, if the generation lottery process for direct addition or the generation lottery process for A loop is executed, the generation lottery process for B loop is not executed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of lottery processes that are duplicated at the start of one game. Therefore, the processing load on the main MPU 72 can be reduced.

  When the value of the cycle counter is greater than or equal to the cycle reference value (step S2421: YES), the B-loop generation lottery process after step S2423 is executed. Further, even when the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or greater than the cycle reference value, even when the winning number of “41” is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination (step S2422: YES). Then, the B-loop generation lottery process after step S2423 is executed. The winning number of “41” corresponds to the index value IV = 17 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 21), and only the normal replay winning data is set for the winning combination.

  In the B-loop generation lottery process, first, the B-loop lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2423). The B-loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the current B-loop lottery process, and is common between the set values of "1" to "6". ing.

  FIG. 49C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the B loop lottery table. In the B-loop lottery table, as a lottery result, there is a deviation result, a selection result of the fifth continuous lottery table, a selection result of the sixth continuous lottery table, a selection result of the seventh continuous lottery table, and an eighth continuous lottery table. There is a selection result and. When any one of the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables is selected in the B-loop generation lottery process, the B-loop generation lottery is won. In this case, the probability that the B loop is generated is set lower than the probability that the A loop is generated, but the probability that the B loop is generated is the same as or substantially equal to the probability that the A loop is generated. The configurations may be the same, or the probability that the B loop occurrence win is set higher than the probability that the A loop occurrence win occurs. In the B-loop lottery table, the selection rates of the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables are the same, but the selection rates are not limited to this, and the selection rates may be different from each other.

  There is a difference in the probability of winning the B loop when the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the cycle reference value and when the winning number of “41” is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16). It may be configured to have. For example, the former may have a higher probability of winning the B loop than the latter, and the former may have a lower probability of winning the B loop than that of the latter. Further, the B loop lottery table is common between the set values of “1” to “6”, but the probability of winning the B loop occurrence may be different depending on the set value.

  In the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), data that defines the continuation rate of the B loop according to the number of games in which the B loop has continued is set. In this case, the continuation rate setting mode differs depending on the type of the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables. Specifically, as the continuation rate of the first game, 10% is set in the fifth continuous lottery table, 100% is set in the sixth continuous lottery table, and 25% is set in the seventh continuous lottery table. Therefore, 60% is set in the eighth continuous lottery table. As the continuation rate of the second game, 90% is set in the fifth continuation lottery table, 50% is set in the sixth continuation lottery table, and 80% is set in the seventh continuation lottery table, and the eighth continuation. 60% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the third game, 90% is set in the fifth continuation lottery table, 100% is set in the sixth continuation lottery table, and 80% is set in the seventh continuation lottery table, and the eighth continuation 60% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the fourth game to the tenth game, 90% is set in the fifth continuous lottery table, 50% is set in the sixth continuous lottery table, and 80% is set in the seventh continuous lottery table. In the eighth continuous lottery table, 60% is set. When the B loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate of the 1st game is again used. That is, the continuous lottery table to be used is looped and used in each cycle with 10 games as one cycle.

  Returning to the description of the addition process (FIG. 48), after the B loop lottery table is read in step S 2423, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S 2424). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the B-loop generation lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S2424 with the B loop lottery table read in step S2423, it is determined whether or not the B loop has been generated (step S2425).

  If the B-loop has been won (step S2425: YES), the B-loop flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2426). As a result, the addition by the B loop will occur from the next game. Further, the continuous lottery table selected by using the B-loop lottery table in step S2425 is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S2427).

  After that, the addition process of the ART game number counter 121 is executed (step S2428). In the addition processing, “10” is added to the ART game number counter 121. As a result, when the B-loop is won in a game in which the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is “0”, it is possible to continue the ART state ST9 and generate an addition by the B-loop. Become.

  In step S2428, not a command indicating that the B loop has been won, but a direct addition command corresponding to the addition of 10 games is transmitted. In addition, the information of the number of continuous games of the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set in the direct addition command. By receiving the direct-add-on command, the effect-side MPU 92 executes the effect indicating that the additional game number of 10 games has been given. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to winning the B loop is not executed. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is internally increased in a situation that the player has not recognized. Incidentally, the ten games are the number of games that can be selected even when the player is directly on top and winning (step S2409: YES). As a result, when the addition of 10 games occurs when the B loop is generated, the player cannot distinguish whether it is due to the direct addition or the B loop is generated. It becomes possible.

  Next, the A loop processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The A loop process is executed in step S2403 when the A loop flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the addition process (step S2402: YES). As described above, the addition process is executed after the winning / non-winning judgment of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game. Therefore, the A-loop processing is also executed after the winning / non-winning judgment of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

  First, "50" is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S2501). That is, in the A loop, every time one game is executed, 50 games are added to the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9. After that, an A-loop addition command indicating that the addition by the A-loop has occurred is transmitted to the production-side MPU 92 (step S2502). The production side MPU 92 executes the process of adding the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 by receiving the A loop addition command, but does not execute the production corresponding to the reception of the A loop addition command. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is internally increased in a situation in which the player is not aware.

  After that, the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is grasped from the continuous lottery table of the usage target stored in the main side RAM 74 among the first to fourth continuous lottery tables (step S2503). Specifically, the main RAM 74 is provided with a continuation rate pointer, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" when the A loop is started. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is “1”, the continuation rate set for the first game in the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is the continuation rate of the current usage target. Further, the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 each time one game is consumed in the A loop. Then, when the value of the continuation rate pointer is “2”, the continuation rate set in the second game in the first to fourth continuous lottery tables becomes the continuation rate of the current use target, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is In the case of "3", the continuation rate set for the third game in the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is the continuation rate of the current usage target, and the values of the continuation rate pointers are "4" to "10". In either case, the continuation rate set for the fourth and subsequent games in the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is the continuation rate for the current usage target. If the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to the initial value "1". As a result, the continuous lottery table to be used among the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2504). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the continuous lottery process of the A loop, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S2504 with the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate grasped in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning is achieved (step S2505).

  If the winning is continued (step S2505: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 (step S2506). When the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10" (step S2507: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" which is the initial value (step S2508). As a result, the continuous lottery table to be used among the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

  On the other hand, if the continuous winning has not been achieved (step S2505: NO), the A loop flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2509). As a result, the A loop ends. After that, an A loop end command indicating that the A loop has ended is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S2510). Upon receiving the A loop end command, the production-side MPU 92 executes the process corresponding to the end of the A loop.

  As described above, in the A loop, each time one game is executed, the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 and the continuous lottery process of the A loop is executed. The continuation rate of the A continuous lottery process is set as a scenario according to the number of continuous games in the A loop in the first to fourth continuous lottery tables. Then, the A loop is continued while the continuous lottery process of the A loop is successful. As a result, the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 can be greatly increased by entering the A loop.

  Next, the B loop processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The B loop processing is executed in step S2405 when the B loop flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the addition processing (step S2404: YES). Note that, as described above, the addition process is executed after the winning / non-winning judgment of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game. Therefore, the B-loop processing is also executed after the winning / non-winning judgment of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

  First, "50" is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S2601). That is, in the B loop, every time a game is executed, 50 games are added to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. The number of games to be added is the same as the number of games to be added to the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 every time the game is executed in the A loop. As a result, the advantages can be made the same in the number of games to be added to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the A loop and the B loop. However, the number of games to be added to the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 for each game is not limited to this, and the number of games may be different between the A loop and the B loop, but may be substantially the same. The A loop may have a larger number of games than the B loop, and the B loop may have a larger number of games than the A loop.

  After that, the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S2602). The B-loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games in which the B-loop continues, as already described.

  After that, the B loop addition command indicating that the addition by the B loop has occurred is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2603). The production side MPU 92 executes the process of adding the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 by receiving the B loop addition command, but does not execute the production corresponding to the reception of the B loop addition command. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is internally increased in a situation in which the player is not aware.

  After that, the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is grasped from the continuous lottery table to be used stored in the main side RAM 74 among the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables (step S2604). Specifically, the main RAM 74 is provided with a continuation rate pointer, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" in the situation where the B loop is started. The continuation rate pointer is also used in the A loop, but since the A loop and the B loop do not occur at the same time, there is no problem even if the A loop and the B loop are used in common.

  When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set in the first game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables is the continuation rate of the current usage target. In addition, the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 each time one game is consumed in the B loop. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is “2”, the continuation rate set in the second game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate of the current usage target, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is In the case of “3”, the continuation rate set for the third game in the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables is the continuation rate of the current usage target, and the values of the continuation rate pointers are “4” to “10”. In either case, the continuation rate set for the fourth and subsequent games in the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables is the continuation rate for the current usage target. If the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to the initial value "1". As a result, the continuous lottery table to be used among the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2605). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the continuous lottery process of the B loop, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2605 with the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate grasped in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning is achieved (step S2606).

  If the winning is continued (step S2606: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 (step S2607). If the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10" (step S2608: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value "1" (step S2609). As a result, the continuous lottery table to be used among the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

  On the other hand, if the continuous winning has not been achieved (step S2606: NO), the B loop flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2610). As a result, the B loop ends.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 is 21 or more (step S2611). That is, it is determined whether or not the B loop has continued for 21 games or more.

  Here, in the B loop, 50 games are added to the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 in each game as already described. Therefore, the situation in which the B loop continues for 21 games or more means that the addition of the number of continuous games of 1050 games or more has occurred in the B loop. Then, even if the number of additional games in the B loop occurs, the effect of notifying that the additional game has occurred is not performed each time, but the B loop is continued in a situation where 21 or more games continue. When is finished, the effect of collectively reporting the addition of the number of continuing games is performed.

  In this case, the condition that the number of continuous games in the B loop is 21 or more is set as the condition for performing the effect, so that it is possible to collectively notify the addition of 1000 or more games. .. That is, if 1000 games are added, it is sufficient to continue the 20 games in the B loop, but the remaining number of games in the ART state ST9 is also consumed over the 20 games in which the B loop continues. Therefore, if the B loop is started under the situation that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is 10, it is necessary to consume the number of games added in the B loop from the 11th game of the B loop. Occurs. Then, since part of the 1000 games has already been digested before the addition notification of 1000 games is executed, it becomes impossible to execute the effect of notifying the addition of 1000 games. On the other hand, since the condition that the B loop continues for 21 games or more is set as the condition for executing the effect of collectively notifying the addition in the B loop, depending on the number of games exceeding 20 games. Since the number of additional games to be generated is equal to or larger than the number of games exhausted in the B loop, it is possible to ensure the notification of the additional games of 1000 games or more.

  When the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 is 21 or more, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of the consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2. It is determined whether (more specifically, 1500 games) has been exceeded (step S2612). Then, in the case of making a positive determination in step S2612, by not executing the processing in steps S2613 and S2614, the effect of collectively notifying the addition of 1000 games or more is not executed.

  When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly ended, and accordingly, even if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 remains, the ART state is set. ST9 is forcibly ended. In this case, even if the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded, if the addition of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is notified including the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 When the number of continuing games of “1” reaches the upper limit number of games, there is a possibility that the player is strongly given the impression that the remaining number of continuing games of the ART state ST9 is forcibly invalidated. This impression becomes stronger as the number of remaining remaining games increases. On the other hand, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of the consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, 1500 games). If it exceeds, the effect of collectively notifying the addition of 1000 games or more is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned disadvantage from being given to the player.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2612, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S2613). Further, the special freeze command indicating that the special freeze effect should be executed is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S2614). The special freeze command includes information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop.

  In the setting process of the freeze counter, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 30 seconds) for the special freeze effect is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a value is set in the freeze counter in the B loop process, the process waits in step S307 in the normal process (FIG. 12). As a result, even if a new game is started, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are on standby for the start of rotation. In this way, in the state where the rotation start of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is on standby, the effect side MPU 92 executes the special freeze effect by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 in response to the reception of the special freeze command. To be done. In the special freeze effect, an effect of collectively reporting the addition of 1000 games or more is executed. In addition, since the special freeze command includes information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop, the production-side MPU 92 causes the "number of games continued in the B loop"-"" Number of games "divided by" the number of games to be added to the number of continuous games in ART state ST9 (50 games) for each game in B loop ", rounded up to the nearest whole number)) x" 1 in B loop The number of games (50 games) to be added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is derived for each game, and the derivation result is notified. As a result, even if the number of games exhausted in the B loop is taken into consideration, it is possible to collectively inform the addition of 1000 or more undigested games.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2612, or if the processing of step S2614 has been executed, the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2615).

  As described above, in the B loop, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games each time one game is executed, and the continuous lottery process of the B loop is executed. The continuation rate of the continuous lottery process is set as a scenario according to the number of continuous games in the B loop in the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables. Then, the B loop is continued while the continuous lottery process of the B loop is successful. As a result, the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 can be greatly increased by entering the B loop. Further, the number of games added in the B loop is notified to the player on condition that it is possible to notify the addition of 1000 games or more. As a result, it is possible to positively provide the additional notification having an impact of adding more than 1000 games.

  Next, the ART state process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ART state process is executed in step S1207 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). Since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the ART state process is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Executed.

  First, the value of the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S2701). Then, under the condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2702: YES), the ART ending process after step S2703 is executed.

  In the ART ending process, the ending process of the ART state ST9 is first executed (step S2703). In the ending process, data setting for shifting the game state from the ART state ST9 to the normal game state ST1 is performed. Thereby, for example, in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32), the normal process of step S1205 is executed.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is less than or equal to the number of sustainable games (step S2704). The number of games that can be continued is set to 1200 games. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ART state ST9 in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or less than 1200 which is the number of continuous games. The number of games that can be continued is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of games that can be played in the advantageous section SC2, and is set to a number that is smaller than the number of continuous games in which the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is started. ing.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, the advantage maintenance lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2705). In the advantageous maintenance lottery table, the winning value corresponding to the advantageous maintenance winning is set. The advantage maintenance lottery table is common regardless of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 and the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9 that are finished this time, but the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 and the game acquired in the ART state ST9 A plurality of types may be set so that the selection target differs depending on the number of media. For example, when the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is smaller than the predetermined number of games, the advantageous maintenance lottery table having a higher probability of winning the advantageous maintenance than in the case of larger than the predetermined number of games may be selected. When the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9 is smaller than the predetermined number, the advantageous maintenance lottery table may be selected which has a higher probability of being the advantageous maintenance winning than the case where the number is greater than the predetermined number. In this case, the smaller the profit obtained in the ART state ST9, the higher the probability that the advantageous section SC2 will be maintained after the ART state ST9 ends.

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S2706). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the generation lottery processing of the advantageous maintenance section, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S2706 with the advantage maintenance lottery table read in step S2705, it is determined whether or not the advantage maintenance win has been achieved (step S2707).

  When the advantageous maintenance win is selected (step S2707: YES), a value (specifically, "10") corresponding to the number of advantageous maintenance games is set in the advantage maintenance counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2708). As a result, even after the ART state ST9 has ended, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 until the number of advantageous maintenance games has been exhausted. After that, an advantage maintenance command indicating that the transition to the advantage maintenance section has been made is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S2709). The production-side MPU 92 receives the advantageous maintenance command so that the production corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9 is executed, and the production corresponding to the advantageous maintenance section is executed after the production is finished. To

  When a negative determination is made in step S2704 or when a negative determination is made in step S2707, an ART end command indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2710). The production side MPU 92 causes the production corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9 to be executed by receiving the ART end command, and the production corresponding to the normal game state ST1 which is not the advantageous maintenance section after the production is finished. To be executed.

<About effects in ART state ST9>
Next, the effect in the ART state ST9 will be described. First, the outline of the effect that occurs in the ART state ST9 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 53 (a) shows the execution period of the A loop, FIG. 53 (b) shows the execution period of the B loop, FIG. 53 (c) shows the generation timing of the direct overlay, and FIG. 53 (d) is the direct overlay. 53E shows the execution period of the effect, FIG. 53E shows the execution period of the special addition effect, FIG. 53F shows the execution period of the special freeze effect, and FIG. 53G shows the execution period of the stock release effect. 53 (h) shows the ending effect execution period.

  At the timing of t1 in the ART state ST9, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the main MPU 72 causes a direct addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53D, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the direct addition effect from the timing t1 to the timing t2. In the direct addition effect, an effect corresponding to the occurrence of the direct addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed, and the image display device 63 displays an image showing the number of direct addition games determined by the main MPU 72. Is displayed.

  In the ART state ST9, at the timing of t3, the main MPU 72 starts the A loop as shown in FIG. At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), the special addition effect is not executed, but an expected effect that causes the player to expect the occurrence of the special addition effect is started by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. It The expected effect can be executed even in a situation where the special additional effect is not executed. When the expected effect is executed, the player expects that a special additional effect will be generated thereafter. After that, at the timing of t4, the end timing of the expected effect comes. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), even if the A-loop is being continued in the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. A special extra effect corresponding to the number of extra games starts. The special addition effect continues over a plurality of games, and the number of addition games corresponding to the execution of the special addition effect this time is distributed and notified in each game of the plurality of games. For example, if the special addition effect corresponds to the addition of 100 games and continues for two games, the addition of 50 games is notified in each game.

  Even in the situation where the special addition effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 53 (e), the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 in the main MPU 72 is shown at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 53 (c). 53D, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the direct overlay effect from timing t5 to timing t6 as shown in FIG. 53D.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends at the timing of t7. In this case, in the situation where the A loop is being executed, the execution of the special additional effect is determined a plurality of times according to the number of additional games generated by the A loop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), the special addition effect may continue to be executed even after the A loop ends. The special addition effect ends at the timing of t8.

  At the timing of t9 in the ART state ST9, the B loop is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 53 (b). At the timing of t9, the effect corresponding to the occurrence of the B loop is not executed. Even when the B loop is being executed as shown in FIG. 53 (b), at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the main MPU 72 detects the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. As the direct overlay is generated, the direct overlay effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 from timing t10 to timing t11 as shown in FIG. 53 (d).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 53B, the B loop ends in the main MPU 72 at the timing of t12. In this case, the number of continuing games in the B loop is 21 or more. Therefore, although one game is started in the main MPU 72, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a state of waiting for the rotation start, and as shown in FIG. The special freeze effect is executed by the lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the special freeze production, the number of additional games of 1000 or more is notified as the number of additional games of the remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9.

  After that, at the timing of t14, the number of the production-side continuing games to be subtracted, which is measured by the ART subtraction-target counter 125 of the production-side RAM 94, becomes “0”. In this case, when the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 is set to a value of 1 or more, it means that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 which is not the subtraction target exists. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (g), the stock release effect corresponding to the continuation of the ART state ST9 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 from timing t14 to timing t15. It

  At the timing of t16 in the ART state ST9, in the situation where the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 corresponds to the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 ends. It is the number of games that trigger the production. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (h), the ending effect is started on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 at the timing of t16. Then, the ending effect continues until the timing t17 when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

  Hereinafter, the processing contents in the effect side MPU 92 for enabling execution of various effects as described above will be described. 54 is a flowchart showing the non-normal effect control process executed by the effect MPU 92. In the non-normal production control process, when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, a relatively short cycle in the production side MPU 92 (for example, 4 milliseconds). ) Is executed repeatedly.

  When the ending effect command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2801: YES), "1" is set to the effect side ending effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2802). And when "1" is set to the production side ending production flag (step S2803: YES), the ending production process is executed (step S2804). The ending effect process will be described later in detail.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2803, it is determined whether or not the add-on command being prepared is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2805). As described above, the add-on command being prepared is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the direct add-on lottery process is performed and the direct add-on is won. When the add-on command being prepared is received (step S2805: YES), the number of add-on games of this time set in the add-on command being prepared is set to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the production side RAM 94, respectively. To (step S2806). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of additional games this time is added after being transferred to the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of additional games this time is added. After the resulting number of continuous games has shifted to the ART state ST9, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is displayed on the image display device 63.

  Then, the additional effect setting process under preparation is executed (step S2807). In the addition effect setting process during preparation, an addition table that enables execution of an effect indicating that the number of additional games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93. The additional table corresponds to the number of additional games this time. By performing the execution control of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the add-on table, the direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, and an image showing the number of additional games this time is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 63.

  As described above, the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 may be added even in the bonus state. In this case, the main MPU 72 transmits the add-on command in the bonus. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the bonus addition command from the main-side MPU 72, in the other effect processing (step S2820), the effect-side RAM 94 sets the current addition game number set in the bonus addition command in the effect-side RAM 94. It is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126. In addition, the addition table which enables execution of the effect indicating that the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has occurred in the bonus state is read. The additional table corresponds to the number of additional games this time. By performing the execution control of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the add-on table, the direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, and an image showing the number of additional games this time is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 63.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2805, or if the processing of step S2807 is executed, it is determined whether an ART start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2808). As described above, the ART start command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the ART state ST9 is started. When the ART start command is received (step S2808: YES), it is determined whether or not the current transition to the ART state ST9 corresponds to the return to the ART state ST9 based on the information set in the ART start command. (Step S2809).

  When it does not correspond to the return to the ART state ST9 (step S2809: NO), the number of start games (specifically 50 games) corresponding to the new start of the ART state ST9 set in the ART start command is set to the production side RAM 94. It is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S2810). In this case, in the bonus state and the preparation state ST8 before the ART state ST9 is started, if the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has not occurred, the respective values of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 Is "50" corresponding to the number of starting games. On the other hand, in the bonus state and the preparation state ST8 before the ART state ST9 is started, if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added, the number of games generated by the addition is added to the start game number. The added value is set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2809, or if the processing of step S2810 has been executed, then ART start effect setting processing is executed (step S2811). In the ART start effect setting process, if this time is not the return of the ART state ST9 but a new start of the ART state ST9, the ART start effect table corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 and the ART corresponding to the ART state ST9. The middle effect table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. First, the production-side MPU 92 controls the production execution according to the ART start production table, so that the production corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. At the same time, the production side MPU 92 controls production execution according to the production table during ART, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the production corresponding to the ART state ST9. In this case, on the image display device 63, the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 is displayed as the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9.

  On the other hand, in the ART start effect setting process, if this time is the return to the ART state ST9, data setting for returning to the execution content of the effect immediately before the ART state ST9 is interrupted is set. The data for specifying the execution content of the effect at the return destination is stored in the effect side RAM 94 when the ART state ST9 is interrupted. Then, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production in accordance with the production table stored in the production side RAM 94 by the data setting for the return, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. The effect corresponding to the ART state ST9 is restarted. In this case, on the image display device 63, the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 is displayed as the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2808, or if the process of step S2811 is executed, the direct overlay effect process is executed in step S2812, the A loop effect process is executed in step S2813, and the step S2814 is executed. The B loop effect processing is executed. These processes will be described in detail later.

  Then, when a game start command indicating a new start of one game is received from the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST9 (step S2815 and step S2816: YES), the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the production side RAM 94 is changed. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2817). Then, when the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2818: YES), the stock releasing process is executed (step S2819). The stock release process will be described in detail later.

  In the non-normal production control process, other production processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S2820). In the other effect processing, processing for performing effect execution control in a game state in which the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, or the preparation state ST8 is executed.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the process for direct addition effect of step S2812 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 54).

  First, it is determined whether or not a direct add command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2901). As described above, the direct mount command is transmitted from the MPU 72 on the main side when the direct mount win is selected in the direct overlay generation lottery process in the ART state ST9 or when the B loop is set. In the direct addition command, information on the number of additional games generated this time is set and information on the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 is also set.

  When the direct addition command is received (step S2901: YES), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the direct addition command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the stock game number counter 127 are set. And the sum of the number of additional games that have occurred this time, which is set in the direct addition command, exceeds the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500") ( Step S2902). That is, even if the number of additional games generated this time is added to the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9, at least part of the added number of additional games is invalidated in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. It is determined whether or not it will be done. As described above, by referring not only to the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also to the value of the stock game number counter 127, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded. The number of remaining continuous games (that is, the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) in the ART state ST9 that is not the subject of notification to the player is added and added to the player by the direct addition that occurred this time. It is possible to give priority over the number of games.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2902, the number of additional games that have occurred this time is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S2903). By adding to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the current addition game number becomes a subtraction target in the ART state ST9, and by adding to the display counter 126, the continuation game resulting from the addition of the current addition game number The number is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2902, the sum of the number of continuing games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the additional command received this time, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127. However, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of games of the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, “1500”) is exceeded (step S2904). That is, whether or not the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded by consuming the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that has already been given without adding the number of additional games that have occurred this time. judge.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2904, the sum of the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127 is subtracted from the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2. The resulting game number is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 as the additional game number generated this time (step S2905). By adding to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of additional games after this adjustment is subject to subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by adding to the display counter 126, the number of additional games after this adjustment is added. The resulting number of continuing games is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state ST9. By adding the number of additional games after this adjustment to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126, it becomes possible to add the number of games within the range of the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2.

  When the processing of step S2903 or step S2905 is executed, it is determined whether or not the special addition effect is currently being executed (step S2906). The special addition effect is a kind of effect for informing the player of the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127 as the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9. The special addition effect is an effect performed when, for example, an A loop occurs, and as already described, an effect is performed such that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased over a plurality of games.

  When the special additional effect is not being executed (step S2906: NO), the normal direct additional effect setting process is executed (step S2907). In the direct addition effect setting process, a normal direct addition table that enables execution of the effect indicating that the addition of the number of games added this time to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 has occurred from the effect side ROM 93. It is read and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By performing execution control of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal direct-add-on table, the direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and the number of additional games to be added this time is set. The image shown is displayed on the image display device 63.

  If the special addition effect is being executed (step S2906: YES), the direct addition effect setting process during the special addition effect is executed (step S2908). In the direct addition effect setting process, the effect indicating that the addition of the number of games added this time to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 has occurred is executed while continuing the special addition effect currently being executed. The direct addition table during the possible special addition effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In the situation where the special addition effect is being executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, the effect is controlled to be executed by the effect MPU 92 according to the direct addition table in the special addition effect. The image is displayed on the image display device 63 as the effect is executed, and the image showing the number of additional games this time is displayed. As a result, even when the special addition effect is being performed, the direct addition effect is executed, so in the situation where the special addition effect is being executed, the number of addition games that accompany the execution of the special addition effect is It is possible to make the player expect not only the number of occurrences but also the number of additional games based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the direct addition effect is executed without adding the number of addition games generated this time to any of the ART subtraction target counter 125, the display counter 126, and the stock game number counter 127. do not do. As a result, when it is already determined that the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 will be exceeded, it is possible to prevent the direct addition effect from being executed.

  Next, the A loop production process executed in step S2813 in the non-normal production control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56.

  First, it is determined whether or not the expected effect by the A loop is being executed (step S3001). The expected effect by the A loop is an effect executed before the special additional effect is executed, and is continued for three games as an expected effect execution period. In the expected effect by the A loop, an effect that allows the player to expect the occurrence of the special additional effect in each game included in the execution period of the expected effect is executed. By executing the expected effect by the A loop in this manner, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special additional effect.

  In addition, even in a situation where the A loop is not generated and the special additional effect is not executed, the false expected effect can be executed. When the expected effect by the A loop is started, the false expected effect is the addition of 10 games which is the same as the number of the added games in response to the addition of 10 games based on the winning of the occurrence of the A loop. It is started immediately after the direct ride effect is executed. Then, the false expected effect is also continued for three games as the expected effect execution period as in the A loop expected effect, and is executed in the A loop expected effect in each game included in the expected effect execution period. The production to obtain is executed. By executing the false expected effect in this way, when the expected effect is executed in the ART state ST9, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special additional effect is executed thereafter.

  When the expected effect by the A loop is not being executed (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not the A loop winning command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3002). As described above, the A-loop winning command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the main MPU 72 shifts to the A loop. When the A loop winning command is received (step S3002: YES), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the A loop winning command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the number of stock games The sum of the value of the counter 127 and “10”, which is the information on the number of additional games set in the A loop winning command, exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, “1500”) in the advantageous section SC2. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3003).

  In other words, even if the number of additional games at this time when the A loop is won is added to the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9, at least the added number of additional games is related to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Determine if some will be invalidated. As described above, by referring not only to the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also to the value of the stock game number counter 127, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded. A loop newly generated this time to inform and exhaust the remaining number of games in the ART state ST9 (that is, the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) not informed to the player to the player It is possible to give priority to the number of additional games at the start of.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S3003, even in the situation where the main MPU 72 is executing the A loop, the expected effect by the A loop is not executed and the special additional effect is also not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production of notifying a further increase in the number of continuing games from being executed, even though it is already determined that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 will be exceeded. Become.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3003, start setting processing of expected effect is executed (step S3004). In the start setting process, a direct addition table at the time of the A loop winning that enables execution of the effect indicating that the addition of 10 games, which is the number of additional games at the time of the A loop winning, has been executed is read from the production side ROM 93. It is stored in the RAM 94. Further, the execution pattern of the expected effect to be executed this time over the execution period of the expected effect is determined by lottery, and the expected effect table corresponding to the execution pattern determined by the lottery is read from the effector ROM 93 and stored in the effector RAM 94. .. In this case, in the expected effect by the A loop, an effect having a higher execution expectation degree of the special addition effect is more likely to be selected than the false expected effect. After the production execution control is performed by the production side MPU 92 according to the direct mounting table, the production execution control is performed by the production side MPU 92 according to the expected production table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are displayed. First, the direct addition effect of 10 games is executed, an image showing the number of additional games of 10 games of this time is displayed on the image display device 63, and then the expected effect is executed for the execution period of the expected effect. ..

  After that, "3" corresponding to the execution period of the expected effect is set in the expected effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3005). The expected production counter is a counter for the production side MPU 92 to specify that the expected production is being executed and the number of games remaining in the expected production execution period. The value set in the expected effect counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is newly started.

  After that, the respective values of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 are incremented by "10" (step S3006). By adding to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the current addition game number becomes a subtraction target in the ART state ST9, and by adding to the display counter 126, the continuation game resulting from the addition of the current addition game number The number is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9.

  After that, "1" is set to the A loop effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3007). The A-loop effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the main-side MPU 72 is in the A-loop and a condition corresponding to the A-loop is to be executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, an affirmative determination is made in step S3003, or the process of step S3007 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the A-loop production flag of the production side RAM 94. A determination is made (step S3008). When "1" is set to the A loop effect flag (step S3008: YES), the stock game number counter 127 is set on condition that the A loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3009: YES). The addition process is executed (step S3010). As described above, in the A loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 every time one game is executed. Therefore, in the addition processing of step S3010, the stock game number counter 127 is set to " 50 ”is added. If a negative determination is made in step S3009, or if the process of step S3010 is executed, the special addition effect process is executed (step S3011). The process for special addition effect will be described in detail later.

  When the expected effect by the A loop is being executed (step S3001: YES), it is determined whether or not a trigger for updating the expected effect counter of the effect-side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3012). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game is newly started. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3012, the value of the expected effect counter is decremented by 1 (step S3013), and it is determined whether the value of the expected effect counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3014). . When the value of the expected effect counter is not "0" (step S3014: NO), the expected effect update setting process is executed (step S3015). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the expected effect table, which is the current reference target, according to a new start of one game is executed. As a result, the execution content of the expected production changes according to the number of continuous games of the expected production.

  On the other hand, when the value of the expected effect counter is “0” (step S3014: YES), the special additional effect selection process is executed (step S3016). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a process of selecting a special addition effect.

  First, the sum of the current number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum special addition game number exceeds the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, “1500”). It is determined whether or not there is (step S3101). The current number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is the number of games that have been consumed after the A loop winning command is received, in addition to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 that is grasped from the A loop winning command when the A loop winning command is received. It is derived by adding. In addition, in the special addition effect, an effect for causing the player to recognize the number of games already stored in the stock game number counter 127 as an addition to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of special additional effects. As shown in FIG. 58, as a special additional effect, a first special additional effect that allows the player to recognize an additional 50 games by performing an effect in which an addition of 25 games is performed in each of two games, The second special addition effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize the addition of 100 games and the effect that the addition of 50 games have occurred are performed in each of the four games by the effect that the addition of 25 games has occurred. The third special addition effect that allows the player to recognize the addition of 100 games by being performed in each of the two games, and the effect that the addition of 50 games has occurred in each of the three games are performed in 150 games. In each of the 4 games, the 4th special addition effect that allows the player to recognize the addition and the effect that the addition of 50 games has occurred The 5th special addition effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize the addition of 200 games, and the effect that the addition of 100 games has occurred are performed in each of the 2 games, and the addition of 200 games can be made to the player. A sixth special additional effect that makes the game recognizable, and a seventh special additional effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize the additional game of 300 games by performing the effect that the addition of 100 games has occurred in each of the three games, An 8th special extra effect is set so that the player can recognize the additional game of 600 games by performing the effect that the additional game of 200 games has occurred in each of the three games. In this case, in the A loop, 50 games are added every time one game is executed, as already described, and therefore the addition game finally notified regardless of any of the first to eighth special addition effects. The number is 50 × n games (n is an integer of 1 or more). Since the first to eighth special additional effects are set as described above, the minimum special additional game number is 50 games when the first special additional effect is executed.

  Returning to the explanation of the special addition effect selection process (FIG. 57), in step S3101 the game notified to the player as the number of games already consumed in the current advantageous section SC2 and the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state ST9. It is determined whether or not the number of games obtained by subtracting the sum of the number of games from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is at least the number of extra special games. If the number of games is not more than the minimum number of special extra games, the special extra effect is not executed. As a result, even though the special addition effect is generated and the number of additional games is informed, a part of the informed additional games is invalidated in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. It is possible to prevent an event from occurring.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3101, the special addition lottery table corresponding to the situation is read from the effect side ROM 93 (step S3102). Here, the number and type of special additional effects that can be executed differ depending on the value stored in the stock game number counter 127. Further, in the present ART state ST9, the sum of the number of games already consumed and the ART subtraction target counter 125 is subtracted from the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 so that the remaining upper limit number of games is not exceeded. It is necessary to set the number and type of special additional effects. Therefore, the special addition lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit number of games is read from the production side ROM 93.

  In the special additional lottery table, there is not only a lottery result of selecting only one unit of special additional effect, but also a lottery result of selecting a plurality of units of special additional effect. For example, in the special addition lottery table referred to when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is “800” and the remaining upper limit number of games is 800 games or more, the second special addition effect → the fifth special addition effect -> There is a lottery result that determines the type and execution order of the special extra effect, that is, the sixth special extra effect, and the seventh special extra effect. And, there are lottery results that determine the execution order. In addition, in the special addition lottery table referred to when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "300" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 300 games or more, the third special addition effect → the sixth special addition effect There is a lottery result that determines the type and execution order of the special extra effect, and also a lottery result that only the seventh special extra effect is present.

  Here, when a plurality of types of special additional effects are selected, the special additional effect of the type having the larger number of total additional games to be notified is the later execution order. As a result, when one unit of special additional effect is executed following the completion of one unit of special additional effect, the rear one unit of special additional effect is more than the front one unit of special additional effect. Since the number of games to be added is notified, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that a special additional production of a type in which the total number of notified additional games is small is in the later execution order. The execution order may be set regardless of the number of games.

  After reading the special addition lottery table, the lottery process for the special addition effect is executed (step S3103). In the lottery process, the current numerical value information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the production side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical value information is collated with the special addition lottery table read in step S3102. The type of special additional effect to be executed this time is specified, and if there are a plurality of types of special additional effect to be executed this time, the execution order is specified.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, it means that there is no room for executing a special addition effect in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, the A loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" so that the special additional effect cannot be executed (step S3104).

  Returning to the description of the A loop effect processing (FIG. 56), after executing the special addition effect selection processing in step S3016, it is determined whether or not the value of the A loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is “0”. A determination is made (step S3017). If the value of the A-loop effect flag is "0" (step S3017: YES), the special addition effect cannot be executed because of the relationship with the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, and therefore, the processing from step S3018 is executed. Do not execute.

  When "1" is set to the A loop effect flag (step S3017: NO), a special additional effect setting process is executed (step S3018). In the setting process, the special addition effect table that allows the user to grasp the type of the special addition effect that is the first execution target selected in the special addition effect selection process and to execute the recognized special addition effect is displayed on the production side ROM 93. And is stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect in accordance with the stored special additional effect table, so that the special additional effect that is the execution target at this time is performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the effect.

  After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special addition effect that is the execution target this time is set in the special addition effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3019). For example, "2" is set if the special addition effect to be executed this time is the first special addition effect, and "4" is set if it is the fifth special addition effect. The special addition effect counter is a counter for the effect MPU 92 to specify that the special addition effect is being executed and the number of games remaining in the execution period of the special addition effect. The value set in the special addition effect counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is newly started.

  After that, on condition that a plurality of units of special additional effects are selected in the special additional effect selection process in step S3016 (step S3020: YES), stock processing of special additional effects is executed (step S3021). As already described, the production side RAM 94 is provided with the stock area 128 for special additional production. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and it is possible to store information on the type of special additional effect for which execution is waiting in accordance with the execution order.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3020, or if the process of step S3021 is executed, the total number of additional games notified by the special additional effect selected in the special additional effect selection process in step S3016 is subject to ART subtraction. It is added to the counter 125 (step S3022), and the total number of additional games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3023). In this case, when a plurality of units of special addition effects are selected in the special addition effect selection process in step S3016, the total number of additional games notified by the plurality of units of special addition effects is indicated by the ART subtraction target counter. It is added to 125 and subtracted from the stock game number counter 127.

  However, the addition processing to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed each time the notification of the number of additional games is performed along with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, the display content of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 can be associated with the execution of the special addition effect. After executing the processing of step S3023, the processing of steps S3009 to S3011 already described is executed.

  Next, the special addition effect process executed in step S3011 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the special addition effect is being executed (step S3201: YES), it is determined whether or not the update trigger of the special addition effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game is newly started. When a positive determination is made in step S3201, the value of the special addition effect counter is decremented by 1 (step S3203). Further, in the currently set 1 unit special extra effect, the number of additional games informed in this game is grasped from the special extra effect table which is the current reference target, and the grasped number of extra games is displayed. It is added to the counter 126 (step S3204). As a result, the number of additional games notified in the current game is added as a special additional effect to the display of the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. Further, the special addition effect update setting process is executed (step S3205). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the special addition effect table which is the current reference target according to a new start of one game is executed. As a result, the execution content of the special additional effect changes depending on the number of continuous games of the special additional effect.

  After that, by determining whether or not the value of the special addition effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether or not one unit of the special addition effect which is the current execution target has ended ( Step S3206). When a negative determination is made in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 is greater than or equal to the creation reference value corresponding to the number of games for which one unit of special additional effect can be newly created. (Step S3207). Specifically, the creation reference value is set to 50 games, which is the minimum extra bonus game number.

  When a positive determination is made in step S3207, a creation lottery process is executed (step S3208). In the creation lottery process, the created lottery table stored in the production-side ROM 93 is collated with the numerical information read from the random number counter that is regularly updated in the production-side RAM 94. The creation lottery table is set so that there is a 50% probability that the creation wins. When the creation is selected in the creation lottery process (step S3209: YES), it is determined whether or not it is possible to stock the special additional effect (step S3210).

  Specifically, similar to step S3101 in the special addition effect selection process (FIG. 57), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum special addition game number (specifically, "50") exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") in the advantageous section SC2, and the special addition stock production area 128 in the production side RAM 94 is displayed. It is determined whether or not there is a vacant area in which information on special additional effects is stocked. If the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is not exceeded and there is an empty area in the stock area 128 for special additional effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, the intermediate lottery process is executed (step S3211). In the middle lottery process, first, the special addition lottery table corresponding to the situation is read out from the effect side ROM 93. Specifically, the type of special addition effect that can be executed differs depending on the value stored in the stock game number counter 127. Further, in the present ART state ST9, the sum of the number of games already consumed and the ART subtraction target counter 125 is subtracted from the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 so that the remaining upper limit number of games is not exceeded. It is necessary to set the type of special addition. Therefore, the special addition lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit number of games is read from the production side ROM 93. In this case, the special addition lottery table read out in step S3102 in the special addition effect selection process (FIG. 57) has a lottery result in which a plurality of special addition effects are selected at once, but in step S3211. The special addition lottery table that is read out does not have a lottery result in which a plurality of special addition effects are selected at one time. In the midway lottery process, the numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read special addition lottery table. As a result, the type of special addition effect to be stocked this time is specified.

  After that, the stock process of special addition effect is executed (step S3212). As already described, the production side RAM 94 is provided with the stock area 128 for special additional production. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and it is possible to store information on the type of special additional effect for which execution is waiting in accordance with the execution order. In step S3212, the information of the type of special additional effect selected in step S3211 is written in the area in the stock area 128 for special additional effect that is the earliest in the execution order among the empty areas.

  Then, the total number of additional games notified by the special additional effect selected in step S3211 is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3213), and the total number of additional games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127. Yes (step S3214). However, the addition processing to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed each time the notification of the number of additional games is performed along with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, the display content of the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 can be associated with the execution of the special addition effect.

  If a positive determination is made in step S3206 in the special addition effect processing, that is, if the special addition effect that was being executed ends, the stock of the special additional effect exists by referring to the stock area 128 of the special additional effect. It is determined whether or not (step S3215). When the stock exists (step S3215: YES), the special addition effect setting process is executed (step S3216). In the setting process, information about the type of special additional effect stored in the area that is the earliest execution order in the stock area 128 for special additional effect is grasped, and the special extra effect that has been grasped can be executed. The additional effect table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The effect-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect in accordance with the stored special additional effect table, so that the special additional effect that is the execution target at this time is performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the effect. After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special addition effect that is the execution target this time is set to the special addition effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3217).

  When the stock does not exist (step S3215: NO), it is determined whether or not the A loop end command has not been received from the main MPU 72 and the special addition effect can be created (step S3215). S3218). Regarding the determination of whether or not it is possible to create a special additional effect, specifically, similar to step S3101 in the special additional effect selection process (FIG. 57), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 and the ART Whether the sum of the value of the subtraction target counter 125 and the minimum special addition game number (specifically "50") exceeds the upper limit game number (specifically "1500") of the advantageous section SC2. judge.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3218, the type of special additional effect is selected by lottery by executing the intermediate lottery processing as in step S3211 (step S3219). Also in the midway lottery process in this case, one unit of special additional effect is selected. Then, the special addition effect setting process is executed (step S3220). In the setting process, the special addition effect table that enables execution of the special addition effect selected in step S3219 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect in accordance with the stored special additional effect table, so that the special additional effect that is the execution target at this time is performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the effect. After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special addition effect that is the execution target this time is set in the special addition effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3221).

  After that, the total additional game number notified by the special additional effect set as the execution target this time is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3222), and the total additional game number is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127. Yes (step S3223). However, the addition processing to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed each time the notification of the number of additional games is performed along with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, the display content of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 can be associated with the execution of the special addition effect.

  If the special addition effect is not being executed (step S3201: NO) and the expected effect is not being executed (step S3224: NO), it is determined whether or not the A loop end command has been received from the main MPU 72 ( Step S3225). As described above, the A loop end command is transmitted when the A loop ends in the main MPU 72. When the A loop end command has been received (step S3225: YES), the A loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3226). When the A loop effect flag is cleared to "0", a negative determination is made in step S3008 of the A loop effect process (FIG. 56), so that the special addition effect process is not executed.

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 60, a situation in which the expected effect and the special addition effect are executed by the control by the effect MPU 92 when the A loop occurs in the main MPU 72 will be described. 60A shows the execution period of the A loop in the main MPU 72, FIG. 60B shows the execution period of the expected effect, FIG. 60C shows the execution period of the special additional effect, and FIG. d) shows the period during which special additional effects are stocked.

  First, a case where the special additional effect is not stocked will be described.

  At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 60A, the main MPU 72 starts the A loop. As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games each time one game is executed, although this is not notified to the player. In addition, the expected presentation is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. As described above, the expected effect is executed in the main MPU 72 over three games regardless of whether the A loop is continuing.

  After that, at the timing of t2 in which the expected effect is continued as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the A loop in the main MPU 72 is finished as shown in FIG. 60 (a). However, even if the A loop ends, the expected effect continues because it is continuously executed for three games.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the expected effect ends at the timing of t3. At the timing of t3, the number and type of special addition effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, the A-loop in the main MPU 72 is completed early and the number of additional games stored in the stock game number counter 127 is small, so that one unit of special additional effect is selected. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the selected one-unit special addition effect is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. The special additional effect continues over a plurality of games, and the number of additional games in each game is notified to the player.

  Next, a case in which special additional effects are stocked will be described.

  At the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 60A, the main MPU 72 starts the A loop. As a result, each time one game is executed, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games. Further, at the timing of t5, the expected effect is started as shown in FIG. 60 (b). As described above, the expected effect is executed in the main MPU 72 over three games regardless of whether the A loop is continuing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), the expected effect ends as shown in FIG. 60 (b), at the timing of t <b> 6 in which the main MPU 72 continues the A loop. At the timing of t6, the number and type of special additional effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, the execution of the special additional effect of 3 units is determined. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the special additional effect of 1 unit is started at the timing of t6, and the execution of the special additional effect of 2 units is stocked as shown in FIG. 60 (d). Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the special addition effect of one unit ends at the timing of t7. In this case, since the execution of the special addition effect is stocked as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the special addition effect is newly started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 60 (c). As shown in FIG. 60A, in the main MPU 72, the A loop is still continuing, so although the player is not notified, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games in each game. ing.

  Thereafter, the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 60A at the timing of t9, which is the situation where the special addition effect started at the timing of t8 is being executed. Also, at the subsequent timing of t10, the special additional effect of one unit is finished as shown in FIG. 60 (c). In this case, since the execution of the special additional effect is stocked as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the special additional effect is newly started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 60 (c). By the start of the special extra effect, the execution of the special extra effect is not stocked as shown in FIG. 60 (d). Thereafter, at the timing of t12, the special addition effect is finished as shown in FIG. 60 (c).

  Next, the B loop effect process executed in step S2814 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 61.

  When the B loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3301: YES), the addition process to the stock game number counter 127 is executed (step S3302). As described above, in the B loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 every time one game is executed. Therefore, the stock game number counter 127 is set to " 50 ”is added.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3301 or the processing of step S3302 is executed, it is determined whether or not the special freeze command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3303). The special freeze command is used when the number of continuous games in the B loop in the main MPU 72 is 21 or more and all the games added by the B loop are added to the remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. Is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is not exceeded. Further, as described above, the situation that the number of continuous games in the B loop is 21 or more is not notified to the player at the end of the B loop even if the number of games played in the B loop is taken into consideration. This means that the number of games to be added is 1000 or more. Therefore, when the special freeze command is received, the effect MPU 92 executes the effect in which the addition of 1000 games or more is informed.

  When the special freeze command is received (step S3303: YES), the start setting process of the special freeze effect is executed (step S3304). In the start setting process, information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop set in the special freeze command is grasped. Then, (“the number of games continued in B loop” − “the number of games consumed in B loop” is added to the number of games continued in ART state ST9 for each game in B loop (the number of games (50 games)). ) ”, Rounded up to the nearest whole number”) × “the number of games to be added to the number of continuous games in ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop (50 games)” as a special additional number of games The special freeze effect table that enables the notification of the derived special additional game number is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94.

  In the special freeze effect table, information that enables the display of the number of special extra games that have been derived as described above is set, and also information that enables execution of the special freeze effect is set. Further, since the special freeze effect is executed over the freeze period for the special freeze effect (specifically, 30 seconds) set in the main MPU 72, it is a special freeze effect table indicating which number of additional games to add. However, the execution period of the effect is set to the freeze period for the special freeze effect. The effect is controlled by the effect MPU 92 according to the special freeze effect table, so that the special freeze effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and more than 1000 games are derived as described above. An image showing the number of additional games is displayed on the image display device 63.

  Then, the derived special addition game number is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3305). As a result, the special addition game number becomes the number of games to be subtracted as the production side MPU 92 consumes the game in the ART state ST9, and the special addition game number is added to the remaining continuous games number in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. Will be added. After that, the number of special extra games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3306).

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 62, the manner in which the special freeze effect is executed under the control of the effect MPU 92 when the B loop occurs in the main MPU 72 will be described. FIG. 62A shows the execution period of the B loop in the main MPU 72, FIG. 62B shows the execution period of one game, and FIG. 62C shows the execution period of the special freeze effect.

  First, the case where the special freeze effect is not executed will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the B loop is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games each time one game is executed, although this is not notified to the player. When the A loop is started, the expected effect is started by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, but the expected effect triggered by the start of the B loop is not executed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 62A, the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 in FIG. One game is executed as shown in (b). Since each of these games is executed in the situation of the B loop, the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 in each game, and the continuous lottery process of the B loop results in continuous winning.

  After that, one game is started as shown in FIG. 62 (b) at the timing of t7 which is a situation where the B loop is continued as shown in FIG. 62 (a). When the one game is started, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50. However, the continuation lottery process in the B loop results in continuation failure. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the B loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. In this case, since the number of consecutive games in the B loop is not 21 or more, the special freeze effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 62 (c).

  Next, a case where the special freeze effect is executed will be described.

  At the timing of t9, the B loop is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games each time one game is executed, although this is not notified to the player.

  After that, in a situation where the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 62 (a), timing t9 to timing t10, timing t11 to timing t12, and timing t13 as shown in FIG. 62 (b). Twenty games are executed including the timing from t14 to t14. After that, one game is started as shown in FIG. 62 (b) at the timing of t15 which is a situation where the B loop is continued as shown in FIG. 62 (a). When the one game is started, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50. However, the continuation lottery process in the B loop results in continuation failure. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the B loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG.

  In this case, the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 or more. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), although one game is started at the timing of t15, the main MPU 72 sets the freeze period for the special freeze effect, so that the timing from t15 to the timing from t16 Even in the situation where a new game is started, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are in a state of waiting for start of rotation. Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the special freeze effect is executed from the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. Then, at the timing of t16, in the main MPU 72, the freeze period for the special freeze effect elapses, and the special freeze effect ends as shown in FIG. 62 (c). As a result, the game involving the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed from the timing t16 to the timing t17.

  Next, the stock release processing executed in step S2819 in the non-normal production control processing (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 63. The stock releasing process is executed when the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 is 1 or more (step S3401). The situation in which the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more means that the production-side MPU 92 becomes a digestion target in a situation in which the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 that is a digestion target in the main-side MPU 72 is 1 or more. The remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is "0". Then, in this situation, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 which is the target of digestion in the main MPU 72 is stored in the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94.

  When a positive determination is made in step S3401, it is determined whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 is less than the first release reference value (step S3402). The first release reference value corresponds to the value of 10 games. As described above, various additional effects exist in the ART state ST9, but the minimum number of games that can be notified in these various additional effects is 10 games. That is, the first release reference value is set as the minimum number of games that can be notified in various additional effects.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, all the values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3403). As a result, all the game numbers stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the rendering MPU 92. After that, the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3404). As a result, although the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is newly set, the number of games is not displayed as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. Further, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S3405).

  Then, the start setting process of the first release effect is executed (step S3406). In the start setting process, the first release effect table that enables execution of the first release effect is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production in accordance with the first release production table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the first release production. In the first release effect, an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 is almost finished is executed. Further, in the first release effect, the image display device 63 displays an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is unknown.

  Here, the display content of the image display device 63 in the ART state ST9 will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). When the value of the display counter 126 is 1 or more in the ART state ST9 and various additional effects are not executed, a moving image is displayed by the effect character G8 for the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 64 (a). A game number image G9 for notifying the value stored in the display counter 126 as the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is displayed. The number of games displayed in the game number image G9 is decremented by 1 each time one game is consumed. When the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G9 is “0” and the value stored in the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more and less than 10 as a result of subtraction by one, The first release effect is started. In the first release effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), an end suggestion image G10 indicating that the ART state ST9 is about to end is displayed, and the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is unknown. The game number unknown image G11 is displayed. When the first release effect is executed in this way, the player recognizes that the ART state ST9 is approaching the end.

  In addition, in the situation where the first release effect is being executed, when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is directly added, and the addition by the A loop or the addition by the B loop occurs, the first release effect is ended. In addition, the production corresponding to the addition is executed. Then, after that, the normal effect for the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 64 (a) is executed. Although description of specific processing is omitted, when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added in a situation where the first release effect is being executed, it corresponds to the effect that triggered the addition. The number of additional games is not notified as it is, but the number of additional games corresponding to the effect that triggered the addition and the number of remaining continuing games of the first release effect are notified as the additional games number. In addition, the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is notified in the normal effect for the ART state ST9 started thereafter.

  Returning to the description of the stock release process (FIG. 63), if a negative determination is made in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 is greater than or equal to the first release reference value and less than or equal to the second release reference value. It is determined (step S3407). The second release reference value corresponds to the value of 100 games. Although the direct addition effect exists in the ART state ST9 as described above, the maximum number of games that can be notified in the direct addition effect is 100 games. That is, the second release reference value is set as the maximum number of games that can be notified in the direct addition effect.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, all the values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3408). As a result, all the game numbers stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the rendering MPU 92. Further, the number of games newly set as the number of games to be digested in the ART state ST9 in the rendering MPU 92 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. Then, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S3409).

  Then, the start setting process of the second release effect is executed (step S3410). In the start setting process, the second release effect table that enables execution of the second release effect is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The production-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production in accordance with the second release production table, whereby the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the second release production. In the second release effect, an effect indicating that the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is added is executed, and the number of additional games is added to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. Image is displayed.

  FIG. 64C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image display device 63 when the second release effect is executed. In the second release effect, the addition notice image G12 indicating that 100 games have been added is displayed, and the number of games displayed in the addition notice image G12 is added to the number-of-games image G9 which is 0 game. Image is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the addition of 100 games has occurred. After the second release effect is executed, a normal effect for the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 64 (a) is executed.

  Returning to the description of the stock releasing process (FIG. 63), if a negative determination is made in step S3407, it means that the stock game number counter 127 stores the number of games exceeding 100 games. In this case, a process of selecting the number of released games is executed (step S3411). In the selection process, the release selection table corresponding to the current value of the stock game number counter 127 is read from the production side ROM 93, and the numerical information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 is read. Then, by comparing the read numerical value information with the discharge selection table, the number of games to be discharged is selected as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. In this case, in the discharge selection table, a plurality of types of discharge games are set at intervals of 10 games with the value stored in the stock game number counter 127 as an upper limit, and the selection rate of each discharge game is constant or It is almost constant.

  After that, the value of the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of released games is set in each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3412). As a result, the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of released games is set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. Further, the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of discharged games is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. After that, the value of the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of released games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3413).

  After that, the start setting process of the third release effect is executed (step S3414). In the start setting process, the third release effect table that enables execution of the third release effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production in accordance with the third release production table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the third release production. In the third release effect, an effect indicating that the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 has been added is executed, and the number of additional games is added to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. Image is displayed. The specific content of the third release effect is the same as the content of the second release effect shown in FIG. 64 (c).

  On the other hand, when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is “0” and a negative determination is made in step S3401, the ART end effect start setting process is executed (step S3415). In the start setting process, the ART end effect table that enables execution of the ART end effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect in accordance with the ART end effect table, whereby the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the ART end effect. In the ART end effect, an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is executed, and in the image display device 63, the number of games consumed in the present ART state ST9 and the player in the present ART state ST9. The number of provided game media is notified.

  Next, the manner in which various emission effects are executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 65 (a) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 65 (b) shows the execution period of the normal effect in the ART state ST9, and FIG. 65 (c) shows that the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more. 65 (d) shows the execution period of the first release effect, FIG. 65 (e) shows the execution period of the second release effect, and FIG. 65 (f) shows the execution period of the third release effect. The execution period is shown, and FIG. 65 (g) shows the generation timing of the direct addition effect.

  First, a case where only the first release effect is executed among the first to third release effects will be described.

  By starting the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 65 (a) at the timing of t1, the normal effect in the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 65 (b) is started at the timing of t1. After that, at the timing of t2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”. In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately ended, but the discharge effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t2 is less than the first release reference value, the first release effect is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 65 (d). This first release effect continues for the number of games corresponding to the value set in the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t2. The value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0" at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 65 (c).

  After that, in the situation where the first release effect is being executed, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 does not increase, so that the ART measured by both the main MPU 72 and the effect MPU 92 at the timing of t3. The remaining number of continuing games in the state ST9 becomes “0”. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 65 (a), and the first release effect ends as shown in FIG. 65 (d).

  Next, a case where each of the first to third release effects is executed will be described.

  By starting the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 65 (a) at the timing of t4, the normal effect in the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 65 (b) is started at the timing of t4. After that, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0” at the timing of t5. In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately ended, but the discharge effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t5 is less than the first release reference value, the first release effect is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 65 (d).

  After that, at the timing of t6, which is the state where the first release effect is being executed, the direct effect is generated as shown in FIG. 65 (g). In the direct addition effect, the number of games that is the sum of the number of games that are the addition target due to the direct addition and the remaining number of continuous games in the first release effect is notified as the additional game number. Further, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 65 (d), the first release effect ends and the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is started.

  After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”. In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately ended, but the discharge effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t7 exceeds the second release reference value, the third release effect is executed from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 65 (f). .. In this case, the number of games selected in the release game number selection process (step S3411) is notified as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is displayed as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Then, at the timing of t9, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”. In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately ended, but the discharge effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t9 is greater than or equal to the first release reference value and less than or equal to the second release reference value, as shown in FIG. The second release effect is executed. In this case, the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is notified as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is displayed as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. The value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0" at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 65 (c).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is executed from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11. Then, at the timing of t11, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 measured by both the main MPU 72 and the production MPU 92 becomes “0”. Therefore, at the timing of t11, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 65 (a), and the normal effect in the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 65 (b).

<About the ending effect of advantageous section SC2>
Next, the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 will be described. First, referring again to the flowchart of FIG. 33, the processing of steps S1301 to S1311 in the second control processing of the game section will be described.

  First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the freeze standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1301). The freeze standby flag is used until the bonus state ends when the bonus state is reached during the ending effect and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the bonus state. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the state of waiting for the freeze setting at the end of.

  If "1" is set in the freeze standby flag (step S1301: YES), freeze setting processing is executed (step S1302). The freeze setting process will be described in detail later. When "1" is not set in the freeze standby flag (step S1301: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantage section flag of the main RAM 74, so that the game section is the advantage section SC2. Is determined (step S1303). When "1" is set in the advantageous section flag (step S1303: YES), the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). After that, the ending handling process is executed (step S1305).

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the ending handling process executed by the main MPU 72. The ending handling process is executed in step S1305 in the second control process (FIG. 33) of the game section. As described above, the second control process for the game section is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game have stopped rotating, so that the ending correspondence process also includes all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. Executed after stopping.

  First, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3501). The main side ending effect flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify that the ending effect execution period of the advantageous section SC2 is in progress.

  When "1" is not set in the main side ending effect flag (step S3501: NO), the value of the advantageous continuous counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 in the main RAM 74, is the ending corresponding game. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or larger than the number (specifically, “1450”) (step S3502). When a positive determination is made in step S3502, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, “1500”). ) It is determined whether or not the above (step S3503). That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of games consumed in the ART state ST9 and the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state ST9 is equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, it means that it is determined that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in relation to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. In this case, "1" is set to the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 (step S3504). Further, the ending effect command indicating that the ending effect should be started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3505). By receiving the ending production command, the production-side MPU 92 starts the ending production even if the other productions such as the expected production and the special additional production are being executed. Further, in the ending effect command, information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is set. As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp the number of remaining games until the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

  With the above configuration, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or more than the number of ending games, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is the upper limit number of games in relation to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the ending effect is reached, the ending effect execution period is set. In this case, since the ending effect execution period is set on condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 is 1 or more, the game state in which the ending effect execution period is started includes ART state ST9 and ART state ST9. It is either a bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) that occurs in the middle, or a preparation state ST8 after the bonus state that occurs in the middle of the ART state ST9 ends.

  The contents of the processing executed by the rendering MPU 92 will be described. When the production side MPU 92 receives the ending production command from the main side MPU 72, a positive determination is made in step S2801 in the production control process for non-normal (FIG. 54), and the production side ending production flag provided in the production side RAM 94. Is set to "1" (step S2802). The effect side ending effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the ending effect execution period of the advantageous section SC2 is in effect. When "1" is set in the production side ending production flag (step S2803: YES), the ending production process is executed (step S2804).

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process executed by the effect MPU 92.

  When it is the start timing of the ending effect (step S3601: YES), a process of grasping the number of games for executing the ending effect is executed (step S3602). In the grasping process, the number of remaining games until the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is grasped from the ending effect command received this time. Then, the grasped number of games is set in the ending effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94. The ending effect counter is a counter for the effect side MPU 92 to specify the number of remaining games to be executed in the ending effect. When the ending effect counter is set to a value of 1 or more, one game is newly started. Each time, the value of the ending effect counter is decremented by 1, and when the value of the ending effect counter is already "0", that state is maintained even if one game is newly started.

  After that, the ending effect start setting process is executed (step S3603). In the start setting process, an ending effect table that enables execution of the ending effect over the number of games ascertained in step S3602 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The effect is controlled to be executed by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table, so that the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

  When it is not the ending effect start timing (step S3601: NO), it is determined whether it is the ending effect update timing (step S3604). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game is newly started. When a positive determination is made in step S3604, ending effect update setting processing is executed (step S3605). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the ending effect table, which is the current reference target, according to a new start of one game is executed. As a result, the execution content of the ending effect changes according to the number of continuing games of the ending effect.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3604 or when the processing of step S3605 is executed, it is determined whether or not any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S3606). When the main MPU 72 starts the game in which the bonus winning data is set, the main MPU 72 sends a game start command in which information for identifying the type of the set bonus winning data is set, and when the bonus prize is established. Since the corresponding command is transmitted, the effect side MPU 92 can specify whether or not the bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 based on the command.

  When any of the bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S3606: YES), the first notification and the second notification are both not executed (step S3607: NO), the first A notification effect setting process is executed (step S3608). In the effect setting process of the first notification, data setting is performed so that the image corresponding to the bonus winning is reduced and displayed in the situation where the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed on the image display device 63.

  FIG. 68 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the first notification in which an image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In this case, the area other than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63 is set wider than the partial display area. Then, in the area other than the partial display area, the ending effect image G13 is displayed as a moving image, and a bonus notification image G14 corresponding to that any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 in the partial display area. It is displayed. By displaying the bonus notification image G14 in this way, it is possible to let the player recognize that it is a situation in which the bonus prize can be established even in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. .. In the first notification, the ending effect image G13 is displayed more prominently than the bonus notification image G14. This makes it possible to display the bonus notification image G14 while preventing the visibility of the ending effect image G13 from being reduced as much as possible. Note that the situation in which the first notification is executed is ended when the second notification described later is started or when the bonus prize is established.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3606, an affirmative determination is made in step S3607, or the processing of step S3608 is executed, a predetermined number of games (specifically, five games) have been reached after the bonus internal state ST2 is reached. It is determined whether or not it has been digested (step S3609). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3609, the second notification effect setting process is executed on condition that the second notification has not been executed (step S3610: NO) (step S3611). In the effect setting process of the second notification, the image corresponding to the bonus winning is enlarged and displayed in comparison with the case of the first notification in the situation where the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is reduced and displayed on the image display device 63. Set the data to do so.

  FIG. 68 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the second notification in which an image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the partial display area is set so as to divide the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In this case, the area other than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63 is set wider than the partial display area. An image G13 for ending effect is displayed as a moving image in the partial display area, and a bonus notification image G14 corresponding to that any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 in an area other than the partial display area. It is displayed. That is, the areas in which the images G13 and G14 are displayed have an opposite relationship to the case of the first notification. By enlarging and displaying the bonus notification image G14 in this way, it is possible to emphasize that the player who is concentrated on the ending effect and is unaware of the bonus winning is in the bonus winning. The situation in which the second notification is executed is ended when the bonus prize is established.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3609, an affirmative determination is made in step S3610, or if the processing of step S3611 is executed, it is conditional that one of the BB winning is established (step S3612: YES). The BB effect standby flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3613), and provided in the effect side RAM 94 on condition that any RB winning is achieved (step S3614: YES). The RB rendering standby flag thus set is set to "1" (step S3615). The BB production standby flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that it is in the BB state ST3 during the execution of the ending production, and the RB production standby flag is in the RB state ST4 during the execution of the ending production. It is a flag for specifying that the production side MPU 92 is present. In the situation where the BB production standby flag is set to "1", if the final game in the BB state ST3 is started before the remaining number of running games of the ending production becomes "0", the BB production standby flag Is cleared to "0". Further, in the situation where the RB production standby flag is set to "1", if the final game in the RB state ST4 is started before the remaining number of execution games of the ending production becomes "0", the RB production standby flag Is cleared to "0".

  Here, as described above, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started, the freeze counter setting process is executed in step S1914 in the bonus process (FIG. 42) of the main MPU 72, and a new process is performed. The game is on standby. Then, in the situation in which the freeze setting is performed, the effect corresponding to the start of the bonus state in the effect-side MPU 92 is executed. In this case, when the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S1913, and thus the process of step S1914 is not executed. Accordingly, even if the bonus state is started while the ending effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the bonus state from being performed. When the ending effect is executed and the bonus state is achieved, the main MPU 72 executes control corresponding to the bonus state, but the effect MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the bonus state. The ending production is continued without any control. In this case, the freeze setting is not performed even if the bonus state is started while the ending effect is being executed as described above, so that the flow of the ending effect is not obstructed by the freeze setting. Is possible.

  In addition, as described above, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is ended, the freeze counter setting process is executed in step S2209 in the bonus state process (FIG. 45) of the main MPU 72, so that a new process is performed. The game is on standby. Then, in the situation where the freeze setting is performed, the effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state is executed by the effect MPU 92. In this case, when the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S2208, and thus the process of step S2209 is not executed. Thereby, even if the bonus state is ended while the ending effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the freeze setting corresponding to the end of the bonus state from being performed. When the ending effect is reached in the middle of the bonus state or when the ending effect is being executed, the main MPU 72 executes control corresponding to the bonus state. The side MPU 92 performs the ending effect execution control without performing the effect execution control corresponding to the bonus state. In this case, the freeze setting is not performed even if the bonus state is ended while the ending effect is being executed as described above, so that the flow of the ending effect is not obstructed by the freeze setting. Is possible.

  In the ending effect process (FIG. 67), when it is the timing at which the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the game in which the value of the ending effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is “0” (step S3616: YES). The ending effect ending process is executed (step S3617). That is, the ending effect ending process is executed when the ending timing of the game in which the remaining number of executed games of the ending effect set when the ending effect is started is “0”.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the ending effect ending process.

  First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the effect extension flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3701). The effect extension flag extends the ending effect due to the fact that the bonus state continues during the ending effect even when the bonus state is set in the middle of the ending effect and the remaining number of executed games of the ending effect is "0". It is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the situation is present.

  When "1" is not set in the effect extension flag (step S3701: NO), it is the BB state ST3 by determining whether or not "1" is set in the BB effect standby flag of the effect side RAM 94. It is determined whether or not (step S3702). When the BB production standby flag is set to "1" (step S3702: YES), after clearing the BB production standby flag to "0" (step S3703), the game given to the player in the current BB state ST3. It is determined whether or not the total number of media assigned is equal to or less than the specific reference number (step S3704). As described above, the BB state ST3 ends when the total number of game media provided in the BB state ST3 becomes the BB end reference number (specifically, “350”) or more. The total number of is measured not only on the main MPU 72 but also on the production MPU 92 based on the command transmitted from the main MPU 72. Further, the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the BB end reference number. Specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100", which is half or less of the BB end reference number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific reference number may be set to 1/3 or less of the BB end reference number, or may be set to 1/4 or less.

  When the total number of game media provided to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number (step S3704: YES), a BB effect start setting process is executed (step S3705). After that, the production side ending production flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3706).

  In the BB effect start setting process, an ending end effect table that enables execution of an effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94, and the BB effect can be executed. The effect table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The effect is controlled by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the ending-end effect table, whereby the ending-end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Further, thereafter, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production according to the BB production table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the BB production. That is, when the number of remaining running games of the ending effect set at the start of the ending effect becomes "0" in the middle of the BB state ST3, the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3. Is less than the specific reference number, the ending effect is ended and the BB effect is started even if the BB state ST3 is in the middle. Accordingly, when the BB state ST3 is started just before the ending effect is finished, it is possible to cause a situation in which the BB effect is executed subsequent to the ending effect.

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the BB state ST3, the ending timing of the game in which the value of the ending effect counter becomes “0” in a situation in which the total number of game media provided to the player is equal to or less than the specific reference number In the case where the ending ending effect is executed including the case, the freeze setting for forcibly waiting the start of a new game for the freezing period at the ending of the ending is performed in the main MPU 72. The freeze period at the end of the ending corresponds to the execution period of the ending finish effect, and is specifically set to 15 seconds. In this way, by executing the ending ending effect in a state in which the start of a new game is forced to wait, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the ending ending effect.

  Further, when the BB effect is executed following the ending effect, an image indicating that the BB state ST3 is continuously started is displayed in the display effect of the image display device 63 corresponding to the ending effect. That is, when the BB effect is started following the ending effect, the freeze period corresponding to the ending effect is set, but the freeze period at the start of bonus corresponding to the start of the bonus state is not set. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessively long freeze period while ensuring a sufficient execution period for the ending ending effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3702, it is determined whether or not the RB state ST4 is set by determining whether or not the RB production standby flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3707). . When "1" is set to the RB production standby flag (step S3707: YES), the RB production standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S3708).

  If a negative determination is made in step S3704, or if the process of step S3708 is executed, a process for extending the ending effect is executed. That is, when the number of remaining running games set at the start of the ending effect is "0", the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 and the BB state ST3 is already the specific criterion. If the number exceeds the number, the ending effect is extended until the BB state ST3 ends. When the number of remaining games set at the start of the ending effect is "0" and the RB state is ST4, the ending effect is extended until the RB state ST4 ends.

  As a process for extending the ending effect, first, an ending effect extension setting process is executed (step S3709). In the extension setting process, an extension table for extending the ending effect by one game is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The effect execution control is performed by the effect MPU 92 according to the extension table, so that the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by one game. In this case, an effect of one game that has continuity of effect with respect to the content of the ending effect immediately before is executed. After that, "1" is set to the effect extension flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3710).

  When "1" is not set in any of the effect extension flag, the BB effect standby flag and the RB effect standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 in the ending effect end process (step S3701, step S3702 and step S3707: NO), normally A production start setting process is executed (step S3711). In the start setting process, an ending end effect table that enables execution of an effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. The possible normal effect table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. In this case, first, the effect MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the ending end effect table, so that the ending lamp effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In addition, after that, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production in accordance with the normal production table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the production corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1.

  When "1" is set to the effect extension flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S3712). When the bonus state has not ended (step S3712: NO), ending effect extension setting processing is executed (step S3713). In the extension setting process, similarly to step S3709, an extension table for extending the ending effect by one game is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect execution control is performed by the effect MPU 92 according to the extension table, so that the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by one game. In this case, an effect of one game that has continuity of effect with respect to the content of the ending effect immediately before is executed.

  When the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S3712: YES), the production extension flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to “0” (step S3714), and the production side ending of the production side RAM 94 is performed. The effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S3715). After that, the start setting process of the normal effect is executed (step S3716). In the start setting process, an ending end effect table that enables execution of an effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. The possible normal effect table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. In this case, first, the effect MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the ending end effect table, so that the ending lamp effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In addition, after that, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production in accordance with the normal production table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the production corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1.

  Returning to the explanation of the second control process (FIG. 33) of the game section, after executing the ending corresponding processing in step S1305, the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, Determines whether or not the value corresponds to "1500") (step S1306). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1306, initialization of the advantageous zone is executed (step S1307). In the advantageous section initialization process, the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the initialization process of the advantageous section, even if the player stays in any of the false precursory state ST5, the main precursory state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8 and the ART state ST9, the game states ST5 to ST9 are continued. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST5 to ST9 including a counter for storing the number of games. After that, the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the lighting state to the extinguishing state (step S1308). Thus, the notification of the advantageous section on the advantageous section display unit 67 is completed.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1309). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1309, freeze setting processing is executed (step S1310).

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1309, a compulsory end command is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S1311). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the forced termination command, the production-side MPU 92 executes the normal production start setting processing in the other production processing of step S2820 in the non-normal production control processing (FIG. 54). In the start setting process, a normal return effect table that enables execution of a normal return effect indicating return to the normal game state ST1 and a normal effect table that enables execution of effects corresponding to the normal game state ST1 It is read from the ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In this case, first, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production according to the normal return production table to execute the normal return production on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and then the production according to the normal production table. When the side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect, the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

  Next, the freeze setting process executed in step S1302 or step S1310 in the second control process (FIG. 33) of the game section will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the second control process in the game section is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game have stopped rotating, the freeze setting process also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. Will be executed later.

  When the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S3801: NO), it means that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. To do. In this case, first, the main-side ending effect flag of the main-side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3802). After that, if the game state at the timing when the current game is started is the BB state ST3 (step S3803: YES), it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game in the BB state ST3 (step S3804). If the current game is not the final game in the BB state ST3 (step S3804: NO), it is determined whether or not the total number of game media awarded to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number ( Step S3805). The specific reference number is the same as the specific reference number determined in step S3704 of the ending effect ending process (FIG. 69) in the effect MPU 92. That is, the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the BB end reference number, and specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100" which is half or less of the BB end reference number.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S3804, or if an affirmative decision is made in step S3805, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S3806). In the setting process of the freeze counter, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S3806, the process waits in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12). As a result, the start of a new game is on standby. As described above, in the state where the start of a new game is on standby, the ending lamp effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, so that the player can pay attention to the ending character effect. It becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S312 in the normal processing (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in both step S3804 and step S3805, the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the freeze counter setting process. When the total number of game media provided to the player in the BB state ST3 is not the final game in the BB state ST3 and is not less than or equal to the specific reference number, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and is advantageous. Even after the initialization processing of the section SC2 is executed, the execution of the ending production in the production side MPU 92 is extended in the situation of the normal section SC1 and the BB state ST3. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect is waited until the timing at which the extension of the ending effect ends is reached, that is, until the BB state ST3 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the freeze setting is in the standby state.

  When the game state at the timing when the current game is started is not the BB state ST3 (step S3803: NO), it is determined whether the current game is other than the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S3808). If the current game is not in the RB state ST4, or if the current game is the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S3808: NO), the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3809). In the freeze counter setting process, as in step S3806, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period at the end of the ending (specifically, 15 seconds) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S3809, the process waits in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12). As a result, the start of a new game is on standby. As described above, in the state where the start of a new game is on standby, the ending lamp effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, so that the player can pay attention to the ending character effect. It becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S312 in the normal processing (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes “0”.

  When the freeze counter setting process is executed in each of step S3806 and step S3809 as described above, when the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the ending effect execution period, the game is played. If the game is not in the bonus state, if it is the final game in the bonus state but in the bonus state, or if the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number, that game A freezing period at the end of the ending occurs at the end of. Then, the ending ending effect is executed during the freeze period at the end of the ending.

  When the current game is the RB state ST4 and is not the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S3808: YES), the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the freeze counter setting process. To do. When in the RB state ST4 and not the final game in the RB state ST4, the normal section even after the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and the initialization processing of the advantageous section SC2 is executed. In the situation of SC1 and RB state ST4, the execution of the ending effect in the effect side MPU 92 is extended. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect is waited until the timing at which the extension of the ending effect ends is reached, that is, until the RB state ST4 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the freeze setting is in the standby state.

  When the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S3801: YES), it is determined whether the game is the final game in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 (step S3811). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3811, the state in which the ending effect has been extended in this game ends. Therefore, after the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3812), the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3813).

  In the freeze counter setting process, as in steps S3806 and S3809, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period at the end of the ending (specifically, 15 seconds) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S3809, the process waits in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12). As a result, the start of a new game is on standby. As described above, in the state where the start of a new game is on standby, the ending lamp effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, so that the player can pay attention to the ending character effect. It becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S312 in the normal processing (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes “0”.

  Next, how the ending effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 71. 71 (a) shows the execution period of the advantageous section SC2, FIG. 71 (b) shows the execution period of the BB state ST3, FIG. 71 (c) shows the execution period of the RB state ST4, and FIG. 71 (d). 71 shows the execution period of the ending effect, FIG. 71 (e) shows the execution period of the bonus effect (BB effect or RB effect), and FIG. 71 (f) shows the freeze period.

  First, a case will be described in which the ending effect ends in a situation that is neither the BB state ST3 nor the RB state ST4.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), at the timing of t1 in the situation of the advantageous section SC2, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or larger than the number of games corresponding to ending, and in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 71 (d). After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the game ends when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, so that a new game is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (f). The freeze period is started in which the start of is forced to wait. The ending ending effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, at the timing of t3, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 71 (f), so that the ending effect is ended as shown in FIG. 71 (d).

  Next, a case where the ending effect ends in the middle of the BB state ST3 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or larger than the number of games corresponding to the ending at the timing of t4 which is the situation of the advantageous section SC2, and in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 71 (d). After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the BB state ST3 is started at the timing of t5 when the ending effect is being executed. In this case, the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the BB state ST3 as shown in FIG. 71 (f) is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of ending effects from being hindered by the freeze setting.

  After that, at the timing of t6, which is the state where the BB state ST3 is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 71 (a). This is the end timing of the game. In this case, since the total number of game media provided up to that point in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number, the ending effect is not extended. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 71 (f), the freeze period in which the start of a new game is forcibly awaited is started. The ending ending effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, at the timing of t7, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 71 (f), so that the ending effect is ended as shown in FIG. 71 (d). Also, at the timing of t7, the effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 is started as shown in FIG. 71 (e).

  After that, the game ends in the BB state ST3 at timing t8. Therefore, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 71 (f), the freeze period in which the start of a new game is forcibly awaited is started. An effect corresponding to the end of the BB state ST3 is executed in the freeze period. After that, at the timing of t9, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 71 (f), so that the effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 as shown in FIG. 71 (e) ends.

  Next, a case will be described in which the ending effect is extended by the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games in the middle of the RB state ST4.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or larger than the number of games corresponding to the ending at the timing of t10 which is the situation of the advantageous section SC2, and in relation to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9. By confirming that the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 71 (d). Thereafter, the RB state ST4 is started as shown in FIG. 71 (c) at the timing of t11, which is the situation where the ending effect is being executed. In this case, the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the RB state ST4 as shown in FIG. 71 (f) is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of ending effects from being hindered by the freeze setting.

  After that, at the timing of t12 when the RB state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 71 (a). This is the end timing of the game. In this case, since the RB state ST4 continues, the ending effect is extended.

  After that, at the timing of t13, the RB state ST4 ends, which is the ending timing of the game. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 71 (f), the freeze period in which the start of a new game is forcibly awaited is started. The ending ending effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, at the timing of t14, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 71 (f), so that the RB state ST4 is ended as shown in FIG. 71 (c) and the ending as shown in FIG. 71 (d). The production is ended.

<About advantageous maintenance section>
Next, the advantageous maintenance section will be described.

  As described above, by executing the processes of steps S2704 to S2709 of the ART state process (FIG. 52), the number of continuous games in the advantageous period SC2 until then when the ART state ST9 ends is the number of games that can be continued ( Specifically, if it is less than or equal to "1200"), the advantageous lottery generation lottery process is executed. If the advantageous lottery generation lottery process is advantageous maintenance win, the main RAM 74 is advantageously maintained. A value (specifically, “10”) corresponding to the number of advantageous maintenance games is set in the counter, and the advantageous section SC2 is maintained as an advantageous maintenance section. In the advantageous maintenance section, the value of the advantageous maintenance counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted, and when the situation is the normal game state ST1 and the value of the advantageous maintenance counter is "0", Based on the affirmative determination in step S1312 of the second control process (FIG. 33), the advantageous section SC2 is initialized, and the advantageous section SC2 ends.

  When the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintaining section, if the first game in the bonus state started by the establishment of the winning is the advantageous section SC2, it is determined that the state shifts to the ART state ST9 after the bonus state ends. . In this case, if the bonus state is associated with the establishment of the third BB prize, the fourth BB prize, or the first RB prize, which is a bonus prize with no setting difference, the bonus condition is started regardless of the game section in the game in which the bonus prize is established. It becomes an advantageous section SC2 in the game. Therefore, even if the bonus winning is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, it is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 in the start game of the bonus state, so that it is determined that the state shifts to the ART state ST9 after the bonus state ends. Become.

  On the other hand, if the bonus state is associated with the establishment of the first BB prize, the second BB prize, or the second RB prize, which is a bonus prize with a setting difference, the advantageous section SC2 is not maintained or set in association with the start of the bonus condition. .. Then, if the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the normal game SC1 is started in the bonus state start game. Therefore, even if the bonus winning occurs in the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. do not do. On the other hand, when the bonus is won in the advantageous maintenance section, the effect is executed in a mode corresponding to the type of the winning combination and the number of games in the advantageous maintenance section. The processing configuration for performing the execution control of the effect will be described below.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the effect control process for the advantageous maintenance section. The effect control process for the advantageous maintenance section is executed after the normal effect control process (FIG. 38) is executed.

  First, it is determined whether or not an advantage maintenance command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3901). The advantageous maintenance command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the advantageous maintenance section is started when the ART state ST9 ends. When the advantage maintaining command is received (step S3901: YES), start setting processing of the advantage maintaining effect is executed (step S3902). In the start setting process, an advantageous maintenance effect table that enables execution of the advantageous maintenance effect corresponding to the advantageous maintenance section over the number of advantageous maintenance games (specifically, “10”) is read from the effect side ROM 93 and the effect side is read. It is stored in the RAM 94. The effect-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect in accordance with the advantageous maintenance effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the advantageous maintenance effect. In the advantageous maintenance effect on the image display device 63, the image corresponding to the advantageous maintenance effect is displayed, but the remaining number of continuous games of the advantageous maintenance effect is not displayed. Further, the notification of the remaining number of continuous games of the advantageous maintenance effect is not performed not only in the image display device 63 but also in the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62.

  When the advantageous maintenance effect is being executed (step S3903: YES), it is determined whether or not any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S3904). When any of the bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S3904: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the advantageous maintenance section (step S3905).

  If it is not the final game of the advantageous maintenance section (step S3905: NO), the bonus winning notification setting process is executed (step S3906: NO) on condition that the bonus winning notification is not being executed (step S3906: NO). In the bonus winning notification setting process, data setting is performed so that the image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed in the situation where the moving image corresponding to the advantageous maintenance effect is displayed on the image display device 63.

  FIG. 73A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the bonus winning notification image G15. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the image display device 63 displays a bonus winning notification image G15 in the form of characters "make a bonus!". By displaying the bonus winning notification image G15 in this manner, it is possible to urge the player to establish a bonus winning within the range of the advantageous maintenance section. The display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is ended when the display of a bonus type notification image G16, which will be described later, is started or when a bonus winning is established.

  When it is the final game of the advantageous maintenance section (step S3905: YES), the winning data currently set in the main RAM 74 is the winning data in which there is a difference in the winning probability. The first BB winning data and the second BB winning It is determined whether it is either the data or the second RB winning data (step S3908). The effect-side MPU 92 can specify whether or not bonus win data is set in the main RAM 74 based on the game start command transmitted from the main MPU 72, and can also specify the type of the bonus win data. it can.

  If the winning data is any one of these winning data (step S3908: YES), even if the bonus winning is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the game section is normally in the starting game in the bonus state corresponding to the establishment of the bonus winning. Since it becomes the section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not fixed. Therefore, on condition that the normal effect is not being executed (step S3909: NO), the normal effect start setting process is executed (step S3910). In the normal effect start setting process, the normal effect table that is in the normal game state ST1 and enables execution of the normal effect corresponding to the normal section SC1 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect is controlled by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the normal effect.

  Except when a bonus prize is established in which there is a difference in winning probabilities in the final game of the advantage maintaining section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the bonus winning is established in the advantage maintaining section. In this case, when the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is reached in the situation where the bonus winning data in which the winning probability has a setting difference is set, the normal effect is started at the start of the game. This makes it difficult for the player to give the impression that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not occurred even though the bonus winning has been established in the advantageous maintenance section.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3908, bonus type notification setting processing is executed (step S3912: NO) on condition that bonus type notification is not being executed (step S3911: NO). In the notification setting process of the bonus type, it is possible to establish a bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data currently set in the main RAM 74 in a situation where a moving image corresponding to the advantageous maintenance effect is displayed on the image display device 63. Data is set so that an image showing a combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed.

  FIG. 73B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the bonus type notification image G16 in the situation where the third BB winning data is set in the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image G16 of "red 7, red 7, white 7" corresponding to the combination of symbols for establishing the third BB winning. By displaying the bonus type notification image G16 in this manner, it is possible to increase the probability that a bonus prize will be established in which there is no difference in winning probability setting in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section. The display of the bonus type notification image G16 ends when the bonus prize is established.

  When the advantageous maintenance effect is being executed (step S3903: YES) and the timing for updating the advantageous maintenance effect is reached by starting a new game (step S3913: YES), the advantageous maintenance effect update setting process is performed. Is executed (step S3914). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referenced in the advantageous maintenance effect table, which is the current reference target, according to a new start of one game is executed. As a result, the execution content of the advantageous maintenance effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the advantageous maintenance effect.

  Next, how the advantageous maintenance section progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 74 (a) shows the execution period of the advantageous maintenance section, FIG. 74 (b) shows the execution period of the advantageous section SC2, and FIG. 74 (c) shows the bonus winning data in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability. FIG. 74 (d) shows the set timing, FIG. 74 (d) shows the timing when the bonus winning data having a difference in winning probability is set, and FIG. 74 (e) shows the execution period of the bonus state. (F) shows the timing when the transition to the ART state ST9 is won, FIG. 74 (g) shows the execution period of the advantageous maintenance effect, and FIG. 74 (h) shows the execution period of the bonus winning or bonus type notification effect. 74 (i) shows the execution period of the normal effect.

  First, a case will be described in which a bonus win with a setting difference occurs in the advantageous maintenance section and a bonus prize is established in a game prior to the final game in the advantageous maintenance section.

  At the timing of t1, which is the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the advantageous maintenance section is started as shown in FIG. 74 (a) and the advantageous maintenance is made as shown in FIG. 74 (g). The production is started. After that, at a timing t2, which is a timing at which a game prior to the final game in the advantageous maintenance section is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (d), there is a bonus win with a setting difference. In this case, the bonus winning notification effect is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 74 (h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73A, the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is started.

  The player who confirms the bonus winning notification image G15 establishes a bonus prize in the game in which the bonus winning is achieved. As a result, at the timing t3, which is the end timing of the game, the advantageous maintenance section is ended and the bonus state is started, as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (e). Also, at the timing of t3, the advantageous maintenance effect is ended as shown in FIG. 74 (g), and the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is ended as shown in FIG. 74 (h). After that, the first game in the bonus state is started at the timing of t4. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section and the start game of the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 74 (f), the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

  Next, a case will be described in which a bonus win with a setting difference occurs in the advantageous maintenance section and a bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section.

  At the timing of t5, which is the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the advantageous maintenance section is started as shown in FIG. 74 (a) and the advantageous maintenance is made as shown in FIG. 74 (g). The production is started. After that, at a timing of t6, which is a timing at which a game prior to the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (d), a bonus win with a setting difference is achieved. In this case, the bonus winning notification effect is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 74 (h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73A, the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is started.

  Although the player has confirmed the bonus winning notification image G15, the player cannot start the bonus winning and the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started at the timing of t7. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), even in the situation where the main MPU 72 is maintained in the advantageous maintenance section, as shown in FIGS. 74 (g) and 74 (i), at the timing of t7. The advantageous maintenance effect is ended and the normal effect is started. Even if the advantageous maintenance effect is ended and the normal effect is started in this manner, the bonus winning notification image G15 is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (h). Then, the bonus prize is established in the final game. In this case, at the timing of t8 which is the end timing of the final game, the advantageous maintenance section is ended as shown in FIG. 74 (a) and the advantageous section SC2 is ended as shown in FIG. 74 (b). Further, at the timing of t8, the bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 74 (e). In the bonus state start game, the normal section SC1 is set instead of the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, although the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

  As described above, even if a bonus win with a setting difference occurs in a game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section and the bonus winning notification image G15 is displayed, the bonus prize can be established before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section. Otherwise, even if the bonus prize is established in the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won. In other words, in order to win the transition to the ART state ST9, it is necessary to predict the type of bonus winning data for the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 before the final game in the advantageous maintenance section. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous maintenance section.

  Next, a case where a bonus win with a setting difference occurs in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section will be described.

  In the situation where the advantageous maintenance section is the advantageous maintenance section as shown in FIG. 74 (a) and the advantageous maintenance section SC2 as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started at the timing of t9. In this case, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 74 (d), there is a bonus winning with a setting difference. When the bonus game with a setting difference is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the bonus winning notification image G15 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (h). Further, at the timing of t9, the advantageous maintenance effect is ended and the normal effect is started as shown in FIGS. 74 (g) and 74 (i). Even if the bonus game is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the advantageous maintenance section is not only ended as shown in FIG. 74 (a) at the timing t10 which is the end timing of the final game. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the advantageous section SC2 is ended. Further, at the timing of t10, the bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 74 (e). In the bonus state start game, the normal section SC1 is set instead of the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, although the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

  Next, a case will be described in which the final game in the advantageous maintenance section is a bonus win with no setting difference.

  In a situation where it is the advantageous maintenance section as shown in FIG. 74 (a) and the advantageous maintenance section SC2 as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started at the timing of t11. In this case, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the bonus is won without setting difference. In the case where the bonus is won without setting difference and the game is the final game in the advantageous maintenance section, the bonus type announcement effect is started as shown in FIG. 74 (h). Specifically, the display of the bonus type notification image G16 is started as shown in FIG. 73 (b).

  The player who confirms the bonus type notification image G16 establishes a bonus prize in the game in which the bonus is won. As a result, at the timing t12, which is the end timing of the game, the advantageous maintenance section is ended and the bonus state is started, as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (e). Further, at the timing of t12, the advantageous maintenance effect is ended as shown in FIG. 74 (g), and the display of the bonus type notification image G16 is ended as shown in FIG. 74 (h). After that, the first game in the bonus state is started at the timing of t13. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section and the start game of the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 74 (f), the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

<About game history management>
Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 72 to manage the game history and notify the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  When one game is newly executed (step S4001: YES), the value of the total game number counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S4002). The total game number counter 74a is a counter for counting the number of consumed games regardless of the game state and the game section. The total game number counter 74a is composed of 3 bytes and can count the number of games with a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 256 raised to the third power as an upper limit. The value of the total game number counter 74a is not cleared to "0" unless the clear process of step S104 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to measure the total number of games in a plurality of business days in the game hall.

  When one game is newly executed (step S4001: YES) and when it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S4003: YES), not only is the value of the total game number counter 74a incremented by 1, but also the main RAM 74 The value of the advantageous game number counter 74b provided in 1 is incremented by 1 (step S4004). The advantageous game number counter 74b is provided separately from the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74, and the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" even if the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section SC2 occurs a plurality of times with the normal section SC1 interposed therebetween, it is possible to measure the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 a plurality of times by the advantageous game number counter 74b. . The advantageous game number counter 74b is composed of 3 bytes and can count the number of games with a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 256 raised to the third power as an upper limit. The value of the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" unless the clear process of step S104 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to measure the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 executed in a plurality of business days in the game hall.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4001, a negative determination is made in step S4003, or the processing of step S4004 is executed, it is determined whether or not the game history management result is being displayed ( Step S4005). If the game history management result is not being displayed (step S4005: NO), it is determined whether or not an instruction to display the game history management result is issued (step S4006). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is opened and the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is operated while the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied. As described above, when the supply of the operating power of the slot machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 56, the clearing process of step S104 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). When the reset button 56 is operated in the situation where is supplied, it means that the display instruction of the game history management result is issued.

  When it is determined that the display instruction of the management result of the game history is issued (step S4006: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total game number counter 74a is calculated (step S4007). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result = “the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b” / “the value of the total game number counter 74a”.

  After that, display start processing is executed (step S4008). In the display start processing, the display of the calculation result of step S4007 on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is started. In this case, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S4007 by 100, the tens digit is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and the right digit is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b in the dual-purpose display unit 66. Display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed as described above. The calculation result is reported as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "35", "3" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It

  However, in the case of the display using only the two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b as described above, the display content on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is different depending on whether the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "100" or "0". It will be the same. Therefore, when the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", not only "0" is displayed on each of the 7-segment display 66a on the left side and the 7-segment display 66b on the right side, but also the advantageous section display section is displayed. When 67 is turned on and the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "0", "0" is only displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b. The advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off. In the case where the game history management result is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is not "100", it is determined that the current game section is the advantageous section SC2. Also, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off.

  On the other hand, when the game history management result is displayed (step S4005: YES), the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and the settlement detection sensor 51a. It is determined whether the ON signal is received from any of the above (step S4009). When an ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 is being pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, an ON signal indicating that one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is being pressed is stopped. When receiving from the detection sensors 42a to 44a, or when receiving an ON signal indicating that a medal has been inserted from the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, one of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is pressed. If the ON signal indicating that is received from any of the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, or if the ON signal indicating that the settlement button 51 is pressed is received from the settlement detection sensor 51a, the step A positive determination is made in S4009. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether or not each ON signal has occurred during the valid period.

  That is, regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the rotation start of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S4009. Further, a positive determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a triggers the rotation stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, a positive determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a is a target for bet setting or credit increase. In addition, a positive determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a is a target for bet setting. In addition, a positive determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 51a triggers the settlement of the credited virtual medal.

  When a positive determination is made in step S4009, display end processing is executed (step S4010). In the display end process, the display of the calculation result on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous period display unit 67 is terminated, and the display contents of the dual-use display unit 66 and the advantageous period display unit 67 are displayed immediately before the display of the calculation result is started. Display content. For example, when the display of the above calculation result is started in the situation where the number of awarded game media corresponding to the winning result of one game is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, the display of the awarded number of game media is restarted. Let Further, when the display of the calculation result is started in the situation where the information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, the information corresponding to the stop order is displayed. Resume. Further, when the display of the above-mentioned calculation result is started in a state in which nothing is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, it is brought into a state in which nothing is displayed. Further, when the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned on by displaying the calculation result in the situation where the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off, it is returned to the off state. Further, when the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off by displaying the calculation result in a state where the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on, the advantageous section display section 67 is returned to the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 76, how the game history management result is displayed using the dual-purpose display unit 66 will be described. FIG. 76A shows a period during which the number of awarding game media corresponding to the winning result of one game is being displayed (awarding number display) on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and FIG. In FIG. 76, (c) shows a period in which the front door 12 is in an open state, and FIG. (D) shows the timing when the management display instruction is issued, and FIG. 76 (e) receives the ON signal from any of the various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, 51a that triggers the display end. It shows the timing.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the front door 12 is opened as shown in FIG. 76 (c) at the timing of t1 when the number-of-applied display is being displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and then the timing of t2. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), the reset button 56 is operated as a management display operation. As a result, the management display is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66 as shown in FIG. 76 (b) at the timing t2. Thereafter, the front door 12 is closed as shown in FIG. 76 (c) at the timing of t3 when the management display is continued. In this case, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sensor for detecting whether or not the front door 12 is opened. However, depending on whether the front door 12 is opened or closed, management in the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 is performed. There is no trigger to end the display. Therefore, even at the timing of t3, the management display is continued as shown in FIG. 76 (b). As described above, since the management display end timing is not generated by opening and closing the front door 12, the front display 12 is opened and the reset button 56 is operated to start the management display on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. In that case, the content of the management display can be confirmed afterwards with the front door 12 closed.

  The reel index sensor that detects that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have completed one turn is also excluded from the sensors that generate a trigger for ending the management display. As a result, when the management display is started in the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the management display is ended depending on the rotation status of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R against the intention of the manager of the game hall. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

  After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), an ON signal from any of the various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, 51a that triggers display termination is received. As a result, at the timing of t4, the management display is ended and the number-of-addition display is restarted as shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b).

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  Since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player expects that a more advantageous setting value is set as the usage target. Will be done. Further, since there are a plurality of types of game states ST1 to ST9 and a game section separately from them, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. Further, in the normal section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur, whereas in the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur, and both the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2 are in the normal game state. Since the player can stay in ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4, the player will play the game while expecting the advantageous game state and the advantageous section SC2.

  In this case, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination (specifically, the combination of the first BB winning data, the combination of the second BB winning data, the combination of the second RB winning data) in which the winning probability changes according to the set value (BB state The transition to the ART state ST9 may occur based on the fact that ST3 and RB state ST4) have occurred in the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, even if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus hand whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. As a result, the player expects that a bonus state corresponding to a bonus hand in which the winning probability varies according to the set value occurs in the advantageous section SC2. Further, according to this configuration, the transition probability to the ART state ST9 is influenced by the occurrence probability of the bonus state, so that the transition probability to the ART state ST9 does not have to be directly changed according to the set value. , It is possible to indirectly change the transition probability to the ART state ST9 according to the set value.

  Even if the bonus combination in which the winning probability changes according to the set value in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is not executed by itself, and the winning probability according to the set value is increased in the advantageous section SC2. The transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is executed based on the execution of the game in the bonus state corresponding to the changing bonus hand. As a result, not only does the player expecting a transition to the ART state ST9 win a bonus hand whose winning probability varies according to the set value, but also a bonus state corresponding to the bonus hand in the advantageous section SC2. It will be noticed whether or not has started. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  A bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination (specifically, a combination of the third BB winning data, a combination of the fourth BB winning data, a combination of the first RB winning data) in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value from having a significant influence on the transition probability to the ART state ST9.

  When a bonus state corresponding to a bonus hand in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 triggered by the shift to the bonus state. Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur. On the other hand, even if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which the winning probability changes according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the game section is maintained in the normal section SC1 and therefore the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. do not do. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level with respect to the former bonus state than with the latter bonus state.

  By selecting a non-bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value in the normal section SC1, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed, and the game section is the normal section by being won in the transition lottery process. The operation shifts from SC1 to the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the transition probability to the advantageous section SC2 from changing in accordance with the set value. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 from becoming remarkable.

  Even if a bonus hand whose winning probability varies according to the set value is won in the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is not executed, and the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus hand in the advantageous zone SC2. When is executed, the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, not only is the player expecting a transition to the ART state ST9 to win the bonus combination, but is it an advantageous section SC2 when the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination is executed? We will pay attention to whether or not. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Even if a bonus combination whose winning probability changes according to the set value is won in the normal section SC1 and a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination is started, the transition from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 does not occur. Accordingly, in order to execute the game in the advantageous section SC2 in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in which the winning probability varies according to the set value, in the advantageous section SC2, the bonus combination is won and in the advantageous section SC2. It is necessary to execute the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus hand. Therefore, the player also pays attention to the continuation situation of the advantageous section SC2, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed when the first game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus hand in which the winning probability changes according to the set value is executed in the advantageous section SC2. As a result, when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section SC2, the bonus winning is established early, so that the chance of executing the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 can be easily obtained.

  When a bonus state corresponding to a bonus hand in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs, even if it is the normal section SC1, it becomes the advantageous section SC2 and the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, in the normal section SC1, the player expects to win a bonus winning combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value, rather than a bonus winning combination whose winning probability changes according to the set value.

  Even after the ART state ST9 ends, the advantageous section SC2 is continued by setting the advantageous maintenance section. Then, when the bonus prize is established in the situation of the advantageous maintenance section and the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus prize is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the shift to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. . As a result, the player expects that the bonus prize will be established in the advantageous maintenance section, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Even if the bonus winning is achieved in the advantageous maintenance section, if the game in which the bonus winning is achieved is the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the winning probability that the winning of the bonus winning is fluctuated according to the set value In the game in the bonus state, since it is the normal section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. On the other hand, when the bonus game in which the winning probability changes according to the set value is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the advantageous maintenance corresponding to the advantageous maintenance section even in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is won. The normal effect is performed without executing the effect. This makes it difficult for the player to give the impression that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not occurred even though the bonus prize has been established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section.

  On the other hand, when a bonus state corresponding to a bonus hand in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs, even if it is the normal section SC1, it becomes the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, when the bonus prize corresponding to the bonus hand is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. Therefore, when the bonus game in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the advantageous maintenance effect is executed also in the final game. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of a phenomenon that the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section and the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, and it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the advantageous maintenance section. Becomes

  When the number of games executed in the advantageous maintenance section reaches the number of advantageous maintenance games, the advantageous maintenance section is ended and the advantageous section SC2 is ended. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to have a clear timing for ending the advantageous maintenance section.

  The number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or less than the upper limit number of games and is equal to or less than the number of advantageous maintenance games. Is set. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous maintenance section from occurring even though the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is close to the upper limit number of games.

  In the configuration in which when the precursory state ST6 is reached, an effect that causes the player to expect the transition to the ART state ST9 over a plurality of games is executed, and after the end, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. In the case of the false omen state ST5, the effect that makes the player expect the player to transition to the ART state ST9 is executed over a plurality of games, but the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the end. As a result, when an effect that causes the player to expect the transition to the ART state ST9 over a plurality of games is executed, the player expects to transit to the ART state ST9 after that, which improves the enjoyment of the game. It is possible to plan. In this case, the game section is set to the advantageous section SC2 in the false predictive state ST5. As a result, even if it is in the false precursory state ST5, it is possible to cause a transition to the ART state ST9. Therefore, not only the main precursory state ST6 but also the false precursory state ST5 can be noticed by the player. It becomes possible.

  When the opportunity to shift to the ART state ST9 occurs in the false aura state ST5, the number of games executed in the false aura state ST5 is also measured as the number of games executed in the advantageous zone SC2 continuing thereafter. Then, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is ended. As a result, the merit of the advantageous zone SC2 can be obtained in the false precursory state ST5, but the disadvantage of the false precursory state ST5 continuing with respect to the upper limit number of games of the advantageous zone SC2 is caused. Is possible.

  If the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is completed by the time the false precursory state ST5 ends, the false precursory state ST5 ends. While the advantageous section SC2 is ended, even if the false precursory state ST5 is ended, if the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is not made once, it is false. The advantageous section SC2 is maintained even after the end of the precursory state ST5. As a result, when it comes to the advantageous section SC2, it is ensured that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning occurs once, which is advantageous for the advantageous section SC2. It is possible to secure the degree and to diversify the end timing of the advantageous section SC2 with respect to the end timing of the false precursory state ST5 depending on whether or not the notification of the stop order is generated.

  In the chance state ST7, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed by winning a predetermined hand, and the transition lottery process causes the transition winning, and the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. As a result, the player expects the chance state ST7 to occur and also expects to win a predetermined hand in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the chance effect is executed in each game in the chance state ST7, the player's expectation for the chance state ST7 can be appropriately increased. In this case, when the false omen state ST5 is set and the chance state ST7 is set in a situation where the false omen effect is being executed, the chance omen effect is not started but the false omen effect is continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the effect contents up to that time of the false precursor effect from being obstructed by the occurrence of the chance effect. Further, even when the false precursor effect is continued without executing the chance effect in this way, the gaming state is the chance state ST7, so that the profit of the chance state ST7 is not lost. However, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

  After the completion of this precursory state ST6, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs, and also when the transition lottery process executed in the chance state ST7 results in the transition winning, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. In this case, as described above, if the chance state ST7 is set while the false aura effect is being executed, by continuing the false aura effect, the ART state ST9 is set in the middle of the false aura effect. There is a case where the player is elected to the ART state and a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. As a result, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur even in the situation where the false aura effect is being executed, and the ART state is executed regardless of whether the false aura effect or the main aura effect is being executed. It is possible to expect the player to shift to the state ST9.

  In the situation of the chance state ST7, when the false precursor effect is finished, the chance effect is started. This makes it possible to give an opportunity to execute the chance effect. Even when the chance effect is executed subsequent to the end of the false precursor effect, the chance effect is the same as when the chance effect is started when the chance effect ST7 is set. Continued for the number of games. As a result, even if the chance state ST7 ends during the execution of the chance effect, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation while the chance effect is being executed.

  The advantageous section SC2 is ended based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section SC2 advantageous to the player is not excessively continued. It becomes possible. In this case, the ending effect is executed on the basis that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or more than the number of ending corresponding games set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. This enables the player to recognize that the advantageous section SC2 is approaching the end. In addition, by making the player want to confirm the ending effect, it becomes possible to increase the motivation to continue the advantageous section SC2, and further, when the ending effect is actually executed, the player can be satisfied. It is possible to give. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is equal to or more than the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of advantageous section SC2, and the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or more than the ending corresponding game number The ending production is executed. As a result, the ending effect is executed in a situation where it is determined that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an event in which the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 does not reach the upper limit number of games despite the ending effect being executed.

  In any of the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, which are advantageous game states for the player, the number of games executed in the advantage section SC2 is equal to or more than the ending corresponding number of games. The ending effect is executed based on the existence. As a result, the ending effect is executed in a situation in which the player is in a favorable gaming state, and when the ending effect is executed, the player can be satisfied.

  When a bonus state occurs in a situation where the ending effect is being executed, the ending effect is continued without starting the bonus effect (BB effect, RB effect). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the ending effect.

  When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the BB state and the ending effect is being executed, the total number of game media provided in the BB state at that time is If the number is equal to or less than the specific reference number, the BB effect is started. This makes it possible to secure an opportunity to execute the BB effect even in the situation where the execution of the ending effect is prioritized.

  When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the BB state and the ending effect is being executed, the total number of game media provided in the BB state at that time is If the number exceeds the specified number, the ending production will continue. In addition, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the RB state and the ending effect is being executed, the ending effect is continued. As a result, it is possible to extend the ending effect by utilizing the period in which the situation advantageous for the player continues. Further, it is possible for the player to recognize the situation where the bonus state continues after the end of the advantageous section SC2 as the situation where the ART state ST9 continues.

  When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the normal game progress based on the operation of the player is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the advantageous section SC2 is ending. In this case, if the ending effect is continued with the bonus state continuing after the end of the advantageous section SC2, the progress of the game is not stopped at the end of the advantageous section SC2. Accordingly, when the ending effect is continued, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being obstructed by the state in which the progress of the game is stopped, and the bonus state is set after the end of the advantageous section SC2. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the continuing situation as the situation where the ART state ST9 is continuing.

  When the bonus state is started and ended, the normal game progress based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the bonus state is started or ended. In this case, even if the bonus state is started or ended in the situation where the ending effect is being executed, the progress of the game is not stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the ending effect flow from being hampered by the game stop state due to the bonus state.

  In any of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV having the same winning probability between the set values of “1” to “6” is the index value. The index values IV are consecutively numbered from IV = 1 and the winning probability is different between the set values of “1” to “6”, and the index value IV is the last index value IV in the front range. From the index value IV in the next order to the last index value IV, the index values IV in the rear range are serialized. In this way, the index values IV having the same winning probability among the setting values of "1" to "6" are aggregated in the front range, and the index values having different winning probabilities among the setting values of "1" to "6". By consolidating the IVs in the rear range, setting of the index value IV having the same winning probability and the setting of the index value IV having different winning probabilities among the setting values of "1" to "6" in the designing stage of the slot machine 10 It becomes easier to make corrections.

  In the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, different index values IV are set among the lottery tables even if the same winning data is set. . On the other hand, an offset table 111 is provided, and in the offset table 111, the same winning data is set, but the winning combinations having different index values IV are collected into the same winning number. . The winning number is used in various processes after determining the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination. As a result, it is possible to handle the winning combinations having the same winning data set but different index values IV as the same information in various processes after executing the winning process of the winning combinations, and thus winning in each process. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the winning combination specifying process.

  The winning numbers of the offset table 111 are set as serial number information. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform the process for grasping the winning combination in various processes after determining the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination.

  The relationship between the index value IV and the winning number in each lottery table is set as the offset table 111 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for grasping the winning number based on the index value IV of each lottery table.

  Of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the number of games set in the display counter 126 is notified to the player, but the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is not notified to the player. Then, in accordance with the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127, a special addition effect indicating that the number of games has been given to the player is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The stock game number counter 127 stores the number of games for a plurality of addition triggers, and the stored number of games is collectively reported as an increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a large number of games have been given at one time, and it is possible to give surprise.

  Even when the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is the same, there are a plurality of types of selection modes of the number of games to be notified to the player as a special addition effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the selection mode of the number of games to be notified from the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127.

  Even in a situation where the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is the same, there are a plurality of types of special addition effects to be selected. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special addition effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Execution of multiple types of special addition effects may be determined at once. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which special extra effects are executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  When the special addition effect is executed, an increase in the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 in each of the plurality of games is notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of times the increase in the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is notified, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  When the condition for directly increasing the number of games is satisfied in a situation where the special addition effect is being executed, in addition to the increase notification of the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 due to the special addition effect, the direct addition information of the number of games is notified. Executed. As a result, it becomes possible to give the player unexpectedness regarding the increase notification of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

  The main MPU 72 executes a process for increasing the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9, and the effect MPU 92 executes a process for executing an effect corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games. As a result, the processing control of the ART state ST9 is performed collectively in the main MPU 72, but the processing load of the main MPU 72 is increased even if the production corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games is complicatedly performed. It becomes possible not to. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform the control relating to the ART state ST9.

  When the B loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 as a predetermined increased number of games in each game. In this case, the total number of games given to the B loop is collectively notified to the player based on the fact that the number of games executed in the B loop is equal to or larger than the specific reference number of 21 games. The special freeze effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to give an opportunity to be informed of the addition of a large number of games at once, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Even if the main MPU 72 is set to the B loop, the effect corresponding to the setting to the B loop is not executed until the special freeze effect occurs. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special freeze effect suddenly occurs, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

  When the special freeze effect is executed, the progress of the normal game based on the operation of the player is stopped. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special freeze effect.

  The special freeze effect is executed based on the end of the B loop in a situation where the number of games executed in the B loop is 21 or more, which is the specific reference number. As a result, it is possible to execute the special freeze effect in a situation where a large number of games are given, and it is possible to notify the player that the B loop has ended.

  The specific reference number of times is set to a value larger than a quotient obtained by dividing 1000 games by 50 games which is a predetermined increase number of games. As a result, even if the number of games given in the B loop is exhausted in the middle of the B loop, the number of undigested games of 1,000 or more is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to inform the player.

  When the A-loop is generated in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 as the specific increase game number in each game. In this case, the number of games given in the A loop is once added to the stock game number counter 127 without being notified to the player, while when it is set in the A loop, the number of games is 3 which is the specific effect game number. Since the expected effect is executed over the entire range, it is possible to make the player expect how many games are added to the stock game number counter 127 in the situation where the expected effect is being executed.

  When the expected effect is executed over the number of specific effect games, the special additional effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 at that time is executed even if the A loop is not yet finished. As a result, during execution of the expected effect, the player expects the contents of the special additional effect to be executed thereafter. Further, it is possible to start the special additional effect earlier than in the configuration in which the special additional effect is not executed until the A loop ends.

  Even if the expected effect is being executed over the number of specific effect games, if the A loop end condition is satisfied, the A loop is ended. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a situation in which the A loop ends before the expected effect ends and a situation in which the A loop continues even after the expected effect ends.

  In a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, when the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player is 0 game, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is the first release criterion. The execution mode of the release effect for continuing the ART state ST9 is different depending on the value and the second release reference value. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the release effect according to the value of the stock game number counter 127, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  If the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player is 0 when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is equal to or higher than the first release reference value, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is At least a part of the value is notified to the player as the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of security that the ART state ST9 continues to some extent.

  When the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player is 0 when the value of the stock game number counter 127 exceeds the second release reference value, the value of the stock game number counter 127 The player is informed of only a partial value of the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the release effect that is to be notified of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed, and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player is Even if the 0 game is approached, the player can expect that the ART state ST9 will still continue.

  In a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is smaller than the first release reference value, when the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player is 0 game, the remaining games in the ART state ST9 are continued. The ART state ST9 is continued while not notifying the number. This allows the player to expect how long the ART state ST9 will continue.

  The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are commonly used in a plurality of types of lottery processing. As a result, the number of random number circuits 101a to 101l can be suppressed, and the configuration can be simplified.

  The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are targets for random number acquisition in a predetermined order. This makes it possible to prevent the random number acquisition targets from being biased toward one random number circuit 101a to 101l. Further, since the random number is acquired from the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer in the main RAM 74, the processing configuration for specifying the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to be the target of random number acquisition is complicated. It is possible to prevent it from turning into a mess.

  The number of lottery processes for obtaining random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is larger than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. As a result, the number of lottery processes can be increased while suppressing an increase in the random number circuits 101a to 101l.

  The number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is larger than the maximum number of lottery processes for obtaining random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in one game. As a result, in a configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are jointly used in a plurality of lottery processes, a plurality of random numbers of the same first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are included in one game. It is possible to prevent it from being used in the lottery process.

  In the lottery process of the winning combination, the random numbers are not acquired from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l but the random numbers are acquired from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. As a result, it is possible to strictly perform the lottery processing of the winning combination.

  The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are all 8-bit random numbers. This makes it possible to use a random number having the same number of bits regardless of which random number is acquired from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in one lottery process.

  The value of the total game number counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 each time one game is executed in the advantageous section SC2. Is added. This makes it possible for the slot machine 10 to store and hold information for deriving the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2. Further, the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 is calculated by using the value of the total game number counter 74a and the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b, and the calculation result is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to grasp the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2. Further, in the situation where the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, when the termination trigger occurs, the display is terminated. As a result, in a situation where it is not necessary to display the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to prevent the display from being displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. Become.

  Even if the ON signal is received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and the settlement detection sensor 51a, an end trigger is generated. The display of the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is completed. This makes it possible to improve the operability for ending the display.

  There is only one operation for starting the display of the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the display of the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 from being unintentionally started.

  The transmission of the ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a, the transmission of the ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the transmission of the ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a can occur when the game is started. In this case, based on the occurrence of an event that may occur when the game is started in this way, the display of the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. Is ended. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played while the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67.

  Even when the ON signal is received from the start detection sensor 41a in a situation where the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated, the ratio of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 The display of the calculation result is ended. As a result, by operating the start lever 41, the operator stays in the advantageous section SC2 of the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 without waiting for the operation of the start lever 41 to become valid. It is possible to end the display of the calculation result of the ratio. This also applies to the stop buttons 42 to 44.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a pseudo bonus state exists as one of the bonus states. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  Similar to the ART state ST9, the pseudo bonus state enables the winning of the first bell prize when any one of the winning numbers “1” to “3” is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination. When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, and if a winning role that enables the promotion of the game mode to the first RT mode or the second RT mode is established, the promotion replay prize can be established. When the winning order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the winning replay prize that makes the game mode fall to the normal mode or the first RT mode can be achieved, the falling replay prize can be avoided. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. That is, the pseudo bonus state basically progresses in a situation where the game mode is the second RT mode, as in the ART state ST9, and one of "1" to "3" in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination. When the winning number is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the winning of the first bell prize is notified. Therefore, in the pseudo bonus state, the expected number of game media to be provided per unit number of games is the same as in the ART state ST9. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo bonus state and the ART state ST9 may be configured to have substantially the same or slightly different configurations, although the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game number may be slightly different. Good.

  Like the ART state ST9, the pseudo bonus state is generated on condition that it is in the advantageous section SC2, and ends when the remaining number of continuous games is exhausted. Further, since the transition to the ART state ST9 is won in the pseudo bonus state, the state shifts to the ART state ST9 after the end of the pseudo bonus state. It should be noted that in the situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed as in the precursory state ST6 or the preparation state ST8, and in the situation where the state is the ART state ST9, the transition to the pseudo bonus state does not occur. Hereinafter, the processing configuration regarding the pseudo bonus state will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus generation management process executed by the main MPU 72. The pseudo bonus generation management process is executed after the winning / non-winning determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

  In a situation where "1" is set to the advantageous zone flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4101: YES), "4" to "8", "15", "in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination. When the winning number "16" is set (step S4102: YES), the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process is executed. That is, the transitional lottery process in the pseudo bonus state is executed on condition that the advantageous section SC2 is set. The pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is executed when a predetermined winning combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

  In the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process, first, the pseudo bonus transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4103). In this case, the pseudo bonus transition table is set such that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being transitional winning to the pseudo bonus state.

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S4104). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the transition to the pseudo bonus state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S4104 with the pseudo bonus transition table read in step S4103, it is determined whether or not the transition to the pseudo bonus state has been won (step S4105). When the transition to the pseudo bonus state has been won (step S4105: YES), "1" is set to the pseudo bonus winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S4106). The pseudo bonus winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo bonus state has been won.

  Next, the pseudo bonus management process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pseudo bonus management process is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game have stopped spinning.

  When "1" is set to the pseudo bonus winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4201: YES), the bonus predictor counter provided in the main RAM 74 indicates "5" as a value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the bonus predictive state. Is set (step S4202). By setting a value in the bonus omen counter, the gaming state becomes the bonus omen state. The value set in the bonus sign counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is newly executed, and when the value of the bonus sign counter becomes “0”, the state shifts to the bonus preparation state. In addition, a bonus sign start command indicating that the bonus sign state has been entered is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S4203). When the production side MPU 92 receives the bonus omen start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the production corresponding to the bonus omen state is executed.

  When the value of the bonus sign counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S4204: YES), the value of the bonus sign counter is decremented by 1 (step S4205). Then, when the value of the bonus precursor counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4206: YES), "1" is set to the bonus preparation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S4207). When the bonus preparation flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the bonus preparation state. Also, a bonus preparation start command indicating that the bonus preparation state has been established is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4208). When the production side MPU 92 receives the bonus preparation start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the production corresponding to the bonus preparation state is executed.

  When "1" is set to the bonus preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4209: YES), it is determined whether or not the second RT replay prize has been established in this game (step S4210). If the second RT replay winning is established (step S4210: YES), it means that the trigger for shifting from the bonus preparation state to the pseudo bonus state has occurred, so the pseudo bonus start process is executed (step S4211). .. After that, a pseudo bonus start command indicating that the pseudo bonus state has been established is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S4212). When the production side MPU 92 receives the pseudo bonus start command, the production side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the production corresponding to the pseudo bonus state is executed. Further, the pseudo bonus start command is set with information on the number of initial continuing games and the number of transition condition games determined in a pseudo bonus starting process described later. If it is in the pseudo bonus state (step S4213: YES), the pseudo bonus progress process is executed (step S4214).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus start process of step S4211.

  First, a process for determining the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo bonus state this time is executed. Specifically, the initial continuous game number table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4301). Only one type of the initial continuous game number table is prepared regardless of the set values of "1" to "6" and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus sign state this time. In the initial continuous game number table, a plurality of initial continuous game numbers are set as the continuous game numbers at the start of the pseudo bonus state. FIG. 80A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial continuing game number table. In the initial continuous game number table, 33 games, 41 games, 49 games and 50 games are set as the initial continuous game numbers as shown in FIG. 80 (a). Further, in the initial continued game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 50%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 30%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 10%. , The selection probability of 50 games is set to 10%.

  Here, in the pseudo bonus state, the first 25 games correspond to the execution period of the pre-branch effect, and in the pre-branch effect, the moving image display according to the predetermined story is performed on the image display device 63. Then, after the execution period of the pre-branch effect ends, the execution period of the branch effect occurs. The execution period of the branch effect is set to 8 games, and as the branch effect, the image display device 63 executes an effect indicating whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the pseudo bonus state. Regarding the branching effect, specifically, a moving image display in which a teammate character and an enemy character confront each other is displayed, and when a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs, a moving image display in which the teammate character wins over the enemy character is displayed, When the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur, a moving image in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed, and when the notification of the transition to the ART state ST9 is carried over to the branch effect of the next execution time, A moving image is displayed in which the teammate character and the enemy character are separated.

  When 33 games are selected as the initial continuous game number, one execution period of the branch effect is generated after the execution period of the pre-branch effect is ended, and when 41 games are selected as the initial continuous game number, the branch is performed. When the execution period of the branch effect is generated twice after the execution period of the pre-effect has ended, and when 49 or 50 games are selected as the initial number of games to be continued, the execution period of the pre-branch effect is ended after the execution period of the pre-branch effect is ended. The execution period occurs three times. The upper limit of the number of occurrences of the branch effect execution period in the pseudo bonus state is three. Therefore, when 49 or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect is generated even if the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is added during the execution of the pseudo bonus state. Is not changed. On the other hand, if 33 or 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, and the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is added during the execution of the pseudo bonus state, the upper limit is 3 times in total. As a result, the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect can be increased.

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S4302). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for the number of initial continuous games, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done.

  By comparing the random number acquired in step S4302 with the initial continuous game number table read in step S4301, the initial continuous game number in the pseudo bonus state of this time is selected, and the selected initial continuous game number is mainly used. The continuous game number counter 131 provided in the side RAM 74 is set (step S4303). That is, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 81, in the present embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the continuous game number counter 131 in addition to the ART game number counter 121. The number of remaining games in the pseudo bonus state is set in the number of continuing games counter 131. The main MPU 72 confirms the continuous game number counter 131 to specify whether or not the pseudo bonus state is present, and also specifies the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state.

  Next, a process for determining the number of transition condition games is executed. The number of transition condition games is the number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state necessary to be the transition win in the ART state ST9 in the present pseudo bonus state. That is, when the number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the number of transition condition games, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the pseudo bonus state.

  Specifically, as the processing for determining the number of transition condition games, first, a transition condition game number table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4304). Only one type of transition condition game number table is prepared irrespective of the set values of “1” to “6” and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus sign state this time. A plurality of types of transition condition games are set in the transition condition game number table. FIG. 80B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition condition game number table. In the transition condition game number table, 33 games, 41 games, and 49 games are set as the transition condition game numbers as shown in FIG. 80 (b). In the transition condition game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 5%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 10%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 85%. ..

  Here, all of these transition condition game numbers match the initial continuous game numbers set in the initial continuous game number table as shown in FIG. 80 (a). Further, 50 games are set as the initial continuous game number in the initial continuous game number table, and the number of the 50 games is larger than any of the transition condition game numbers set in the transition condition game number table. There is. As described above, when the number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the number of transition condition games, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the pseudo bonus state. Therefore, when 33 games are selected as the transition condition game numbers, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at the stage when 41 games, 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial continuation game numbers, and the transition condition game numbers are determined. When 41 games are selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial continuation game number, and when 49 games are selected as the transition condition game number, the initial condition is set. The transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 50 games are selected as the number of continuous games.

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S4305). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for the number of transition condition games, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done.

  By comparing the random number acquired in step S4305 with the transition condition game number table read in step S4304, the transition condition game number in the pseudo bonus state of this time is selected, and the selected transition condition game number is mainly used. It is set in the transition condition game number counter 132 provided in the side RAM 74 (step S4306). That is, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 81, in the present embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the transition condition game number counter 132. The number of remaining transition condition games is set in the transition condition game number counter 132. Every time one game is consumed in the pseudo bonus state, the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 is decremented by 1, and the remaining transition condition game number stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 is continued in the pseudo bonus state. When the number of games exceeds, the transition to the ART state ST9 will be confirmed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state stored in the continuous game number counter 131 exceeds the number of remaining transition condition games stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 (step S4307). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4307, the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4308). The ART winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state.

  Next, the game start process during the pseudo bonus executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process at the start of the game during the pseudo bonus is executed after the winning / non-winning determination of the winning combination is completed in the lottery processing (FIG. 16).

  When winning numbers of “4” to “8”, “15”, and “16” are set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S4102: YES), the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1”. Is not set (step S4402: NO), the additional lottery process for the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is executed. In the additional lottery process, first, the first additional table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4403). In this case, the first addition table is set so that the winning number with the lower winning probability has a higher probability of being added, and the winning number with the lower winning probability is added. Expectation of the number of additional games at the time of winning. The first addition table is set so that the value increases.

  FIG. 83A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first addition table. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination is “4” or “5”, the first additional table has a probability that the additional winning is not 90. %, The probability that the number of games added to 8 games will be selected is 10%, and the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination is “6” or “7”. In some cases, the probability of not being able to win an extra prize is 70%, the probability of selecting an additional game of 8 games is 25%, and the probability of selecting an additional game of 22 games is 5%. If the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination is “8”, the probability of not being able to win the additional prize is 10%, and the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 8 games is 70. %, Add on 52 games The probability of selecting the number of games, the number of additional games of 102 games, the number of additional games of 202 games, and the number of additional games of 302 games is set to be 5%, respectively, and the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 16) is performed. If the winning number set in is 15 or 16 then there is a 50% chance that 8 games will be selected as an additional game, 22 games will be added, 32 games will be added, The probability that 52 games and 102 games will be selected is 5%, and the probability that 202 games and 302 games will be selected is 15%. It is set.

  As described above, the number of additional games is set to 8 or 22 or more. When 22 or more additional games are selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at that time. That is, since the minimum number of initial continued games is 33 and the maximum number of transition condition games is 49, the pseudo bonus state remains when more than 22 games are added. This is because the number of continuous games of will definitely exceed the number of remaining transition condition games.

  On the other hand, the transition to the ART state ST9 may not be confirmed even if the number of additional games of eight games is selected. For example, when 49 games are selected as the number of transition condition games at the start of the pseudo bonus state, the number of remaining continuation games in the pseudo bonus state is increased even if 8 games are added twice in a situation where the initial number of continuation games is 33 games. Does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. In addition, when 49 games are selected as the number of transition condition games at the start of the pseudo bonus state, even if one extra game is generated in the situation where the initial continuation game number is 41 games, the remaining continuation games in the pseudo bonus state are generated. The number does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. Under such circumstances, there is a possibility that the transition to the ART state ST9 may not be finalized. Since only eight additional games are set, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not finalized even if the number of additional games occurs. In this case, since it is only necessary to add the execution period of the branch effect in a mode not corresponding to the transition to the ART state ST9, it becomes easy to adjust the effect when the number of additional games occurs.

  Returning to the explanation of the game start process (FIG. 82) in the pseudo bonus, after the first addition table is read in step S4403, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S4404). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponds to the corresponding latch among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the random number written in the register. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done.

  As a result of collating the random number obtained in step S4404 with the first addition table read in step S4403, if any one of the addition games is selected (step S4405: YES), it is stored in the continuous game number counter 131. Whether the sum of the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state and the number of additional games selected this time is larger than the number of remaining transition condition games stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 is determined. A determination is made (step S4406). If a negative determination is made in step S4406, it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been decided yet, and therefore the value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the continuous game number counter 131 (step S4407). . In this case, since it means that the addition of 8 games has occurred in a situation where the number of times the execution period of the branch effect is generated is sufficient, the execution period of the branch effect is added once.

  A positive determination in step S4406 means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed. In this case, "1" is set to the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4408). After that, the value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S4409). In other words, when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of additional games, including the number of additional games that has triggered the transition confirmation, is not the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state but the remaining number in the ART state ST9. Is added as the number of continuous games. As a result, it becomes possible to easily keep the ART state ST9 long.

  On the other hand, if "1" has already been set in the ART winning flag (step S4402: YES), the lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed. In the additional lottery process, first, the second additional table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4410). In this case, the second addition table is set so that the winning number with the lower winning probability is higher in the probability of being added, and the winning number with the lower winning probability is added. The second addition table is set so that the value increases.

  FIG. 83B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second addition table. In the second addition table, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is “4” or “5”, there is a 90% probability of not being an additional winning. %, The probability that the number of games added to 12 games will be selected is 10%, and the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination is “6” or “7”. In some cases, the probability of not being able to win an extra prize is 70%, the probability of selecting an additional game of 12 games is 10%, the number of additional games of 22 games, the number of additional games of 32 games, and the number of additional games of 52 games. And the probability that the number of games to be added to 102 games is selected to be 5%, and the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination is “8”, the additional game is added. Win The odds are 10%, the probability that 12 games will be selected is 50%, the probability that 22 games will be selected will be 10%, 32 games will be added, and 52 games will be added. The probability of selecting the number of games is 5%, the probability of selecting 102 additional games is 10%, and the probability of selecting 202 additional games and 302 additional games is 5 respectively. When the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) is “15” or “16”, the probability that 22 additional games will be selected is 30%, the probability of selecting 32 additional games and 52 additional games is 10%, and 102 additional games Next probability that the number of game is selected 20% probability that 202 number plus game plus game number and 302 game game is selected is set to be 15%, respectively.

  When the second addition table is selected as described above, the probability of winning the addition is the same as when the first addition table is selected. However, the expected value of the number of additional games in the case of the additional winning is set so that the second additional table is larger than the first additional table. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of confirming the transition to the ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state. Further, the minimum number of additional games in the first additional table is eight, whereas the minimum number of additional games in the second additional table is twelve. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the advantage of confirming the transition to the ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state.

  Returning to the description of the game start process (FIG. 82) in the pseudo bonus, after the second addition table is read in step S4410, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S4411). The processing content of the random number acquisition processing is as already described with reference to FIG. In the addition lottery process of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponds to the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the random number written in the latch register. Specifically, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed to perform normal processing (see FIG. 12). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer are acquired at the timing of affirmative determination in step S304. Will be done.

  As a result of collating the random number obtained in step S4411 with the second addition table read in step S4410, if any one of the addition games is selected (step S4412: YES), the number of ART games in the main RAM 74 The value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the counter 121 (step S4413).

  When the process of step S4407 is executed, the process of step S4409 is executed, or the process of step S4413 is executed, an add-on occurrence command indicating that an addition of the number of games has occurred is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4414). Information on the number of additional games selected this time is set in the additional generation command, and the number of additional games this time is added to either the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state or the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. Information indicating whether the target has been set is set. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on generation command, the effect-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect in a mode corresponding to the add-on this time. This will be described in detail later.

  Next, the pseudo bonus progress processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The pseudo bonus progress processing is executed in step S4214 in the pseudo bonus management processing (FIG. 78), and the pseudo bonus management processing is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game have stopped spinning. It That is, the situation in which the pseudo bonus progress processing is executed is a situation in which one game is exhausted in the pseudo bonus state. Therefore, first, the value of the continuous game number counter 131 of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S4501), and then the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S4502).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuing game number counter 131 is "0" (step S4503). If an affirmative decision is made in step S4503, it means that it is the end timing of the pseudo bonus state. In this case, by determining whether or not the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state (step S4504). ..

  If the ART winning flag is set to "1" (step S4504: YES), the ART start process is executed (step S4505). In the ART starting process, the information of the main RAM 74 is set so that the ART state process of step S1207 is executed in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). As a result, the game state becomes the ART state ST9. Further, in the ART start processing, the information of 50 games which is the number of start games in the ART state ST9 is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74.

  After that, an ART start command indicating that the ART state ST9 is started is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S4506). When the production side MPU 92 receives the ART start command, the ART start production table that enables the execution of the production corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 and the ART production that enables the execution of the production corresponding to the ART state ST9. The table is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. First, the production side MPU 92 controls the production execution according to the ART start production table, and then the production side MPU 92 executes the production execution control according to the ART production table, whereby the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device. At 63, the ART start effect is first executed, and then the ART effect is executed. When the effect MPU 92 receives the ART start command, it adds the information of 50 games, which is the number of start games in the ART state ST9, to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the effect RAM 94. As a result, the image display device 63 displays the remaining 50 games in the ART state ST9.

  Here, in the pseudo bonus state, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, and the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is added to the satisfaction of the condition for adding the number of games. The number of continuous games will be added. On the other hand, the number of additional games is added to the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 in the effect side MPU 92. Then, at the start timing of the ART state ST9, the number of games added to the stock game number counter 127 is not shifted to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126. Therefore, the number of games added in the situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state is not notified to the player at the start of the ART state ST9, and is performed at a timing in the middle of the ART state ST9. The player is notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the addition of the number of games is notified during the ART state ST9.

  On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (step S4504: NO), it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been finalized in the pseudo bonus state. In this case, a pseudo bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state has ended without the transition to the ART state ST9 is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S4507). When the production side MPU 92 receives the pseudo bonus end command, it is possible to execute the bonus end production table that enables execution of the production corresponding to the end of the pseudo bonus state and the normal production corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1. The normal effect table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. First, the production side MPU 92 controls the production execution according to the bonus end production table, and then the production side MPU 92 performs the production execution control according to the normal production table, whereby the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device. At 63, the bonus end effect is first executed, and then the normal effect is executed.

  With reference to the time chart of FIG. 85, how the handling of the number of additional games changes in the pseudo bonus state according to the state of the ART winning flag will be described. 85 (a) shows the execution period of the pseudo bonus state, FIG. 85 (b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 85 (c) shows the state of the ART winning flag, and FIG. 85 (d) shows FIG. 85 (e) shows the addition timing to the continuous game number counter 131 of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 85 (f) shows the addition timing to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74.

  First, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed in the pseudo bonus state will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 85 (a). At the start of the pseudo bonus state, the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is determined, so at the timing of t1, the initial number of continuous games is added to the continuous game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 85 (e). However, since the initial continuous game count is equal to or smaller than the transition condition game count, "1" is not set to the ART winning flag at the start of the pseudo bonus state as shown in FIG. 85 (c).

  After that, at the timing of t2 and the timing of t3 during the execution of the pseudo bonus state, as shown in FIG. However, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games at any of these timings. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85 (e), the number of additional games is added to the continuous game number counter 131 at each of the timings t2 and t3. Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the ART winning flag is not set to "1" at both the timing of t2 and the timing of t3.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 85 (a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is not set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the transition to the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 85 (b) does not occur.

  Next, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the middle of the pseudo bonus state will be described.

  At the timing of t5, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 85 (a). At the start of the pseudo bonus state, the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is determined, so at the timing of t5, the number of initial continuous games is added to the continuous game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 85 (e). However, since the initial continuous game count is equal to or smaller than the transition condition game count, "1" is not set to the ART winning flag at the start of the pseudo bonus state as shown in FIG. 85 (c).

  After that, at the timing of t6 which is in the middle of execution of the pseudo bonus state, it becomes the addition generation timing as shown in FIG. 85D. By adding the additional game number to the remaining continuous game number in the pseudo bonus state, the remaining continuous game number exceeds the remaining transition condition game number. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85 (c), and the number of games added this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 85 (f). To be done.

  After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), the addition generation timing comes. In this case, since the ART winning flag is already set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the number of games added this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 85 (f). It

  After that, at the timing of t8, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 85 (a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the state shifts to the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 85 (b).

  Next, the case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the pseudo bonus state is started will be described.

  At the timing of t9, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 85 (a). At the start of the pseudo bonus state, the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is determined, so at the timing of t9, the number of initial continuous games is added to the continuous game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 85 (e). In this case, the number of initial continued games exceeds the number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t9, "1" is set to the ART winning flag as shown in FIG. 85 (c).

  After that, at each of the timing of t10 and the timing of t11, the addition generation timing is set as shown in FIG. 85 (d). In this case, since the ART winning flag is already set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the number of games added at each of these timings is stored in the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 85 (f). Is added.

  Then, at the timing of t12, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 85 (a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the state shifts to the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 85 (b).

  Next, the effect control process for the pseudo bonus executed by the effect MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 86. The effect control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed in a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the pseudo bonus state.

  When the pseudo bonus start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4601: YES), the start setting process of the pre-branch effect is executed (step S4602). In the pre-branch effect start setting process, a pre-branch effect table that enables execution of the pre-branch effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In the pre-branch effect table, information that enables execution of the pre-branch effect that continues for 25 games is set. The effect MPU 92 controls the time of the effect according to the pre-branch effect table, so that the pre-branch effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 over 25 games.

  After that, the number of times of the branch effect generated in the current pseudo bonus state is grasped from the information on the number of initial continued games set in the pseudo bonus start command, and the grasped information on the number of occurrences of the branch effect is stored in the effect side RAM 94. The branch effect counter provided is set (step S4603). The production-side MPU 92 executes the branch production until the value of the branch production counter becomes “0” after the end of the pre-branch production.

  After that, by determining whether or not the number of initial continuation games set in the pseudo bonus start command exceeds the number of transition condition games set in the pseudo bonus start command as well, the ART at the start of the pseudo bonus state is determined. It is determined whether or not the transition to the state ST9 is confirmed (step S4604). When a negative determination is made in step S4604, branch effect setting processing for ART non-winning is executed (step S4605). In the setting process, if the number of branch effects currently planned to be executed is one, the defeat effect table in which the result of the branch effect is defeat of the teammate character is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. In this case, after the effect MPU 92 finishes the effect execution control by the pre-branching effect table, the effect MPU 92 controls the effect execution by the defeat effect table. Further, in the setting process, if the number of times of the branch effect currently scheduled to be executed is a plurality of times, the number of draw effect tables for which the result of the branch effect of the execution times before the final time is a draw is the same as the number of times of the execution times. It is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94, and the defeat production table in which the result of the final branch production is the defeat of the teammate character is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. In this case, after the production side MPU 92 finishes the production execution control by the pre-branching production table, the production side MPU 92 executes the production execution control by the draw production table for the number of times the draw production table is stored in the production side RAM 94, and thereafter. The execution control of the production by the defeat production table is performed.

  If a positive determination is made in step S4604, branch effect setting processing for ART win is executed (step S4606). The case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at the start of the pseudo bonus state is a case where any of 41 games, 49 games, and 50 games is selected as the initial continuation game number, and if 41 games are branched. The effect is executed twice, and in the case of 49 games or 50 games, the branch effect is executed three times. That is, when the branch effect setting process for ART winning is executed, the branch effect is executed twice or more. In this case, in the setting process, a draw effect table in which the result of the branch effect of the execution times before the final time is a draw is read from the effect-side ROM 93 by the number of the execution times and stored in the effect-side RAM 94, The victory effect table in which the result of the final branch effect is the victory of the teammate character is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In this case, after the production side MPU 92 finishes the production execution control by the pre-branching production table, the production side MPU 92 executes the production execution control by the draw production table for the number of times the draw production table is stored in the production side RAM 94, and thereafter. The execution control of the production by the victory production table is performed.

  Then, "1" is set to the ART winning flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S4607). The ART winning flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state this time.

  In the pseudo bonus effect control process, if a new game is executed and the pre-branch effect update timing is reached (step S4608: YES), the pre-branch effect update setting process is executed (step S4609). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the pre-branch effect table, which is the current reference target, according to a new start of one game is executed. As a result, the execution content of the pre-branch effect changes depending on the number of continuing games of the pre-branch effect. In the update setting process, when it is the end timing of the pre-branch effect, the execution control of the effect is started according to any kind of the branch effect table set as the next reference target in the effect side RAM 94. Thereby, the branch effect of the first execution time is started.

  In the effect control process for the pseudo bonus, when the addition generation command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4610: YES), when the ART winning flag of the effect RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S4611). : NO), by determining whether or not information indicating that the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is the addition target is set in the addition command received this time, the ART in this game is determined. It is determined whether or not the shift to the state ST9 is confirmed (step S4612).

  When a negative determination is made in step S4612, adjustment processing of the branch effect for ART non-winning is executed (step S4613). The case where the addition of the number of games has occurred but the transition to the ART state ST9 is not fixed means that the number of addition games this time is eight games. Therefore, in the adjustment process of the branch effect for ART non-winning, adjustment is performed so that one execution time of the branch effect that is the draw result is added before the execution time of the branch effect that is the defeat result. Specifically, in the stage before performing the execution control of the production by the defeat production table, the draw side production table is stored in the production side RAM 94 so as to be the execution target before the execution control of the production by the defeat production table is performed. Remember. Further, if the stage is in the stage of execution control of the production by the defeat production table, the content of the defeat production table is corrected to the content that will be the final draw result, and the defeat production table is set to be the execution target after that. It is stored in the effect side RAM 94.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S4612, the branch effect adjustment process for ART win is executed (step S4614). When the addition of the number of games occurs and the shift to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of additional games this time is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Therefore, in the adjustment process of the branch effect for ART winning, the content of the branch effect that is the defeat result is changed to the content of the branch effect that is the victory result. Specifically, at the stage before performing the execution control of the production by the defeat production table, the defeat production table is changed to the victory production table. In addition, at the stage where the execution control of the production by the defeat production table is being performed, the content of the defeat production table is finally corrected to the content that will be the victory result. After that, the ART winning flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4615), and the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 is set to a value corresponding to the number of extra games set in the addition generation command received this time. To (step S4616).

  When the addition generation command is received in a situation where the ART winning flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4611. In this case, a value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the additional generation command received this time is added to the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4616).

  In the effect control process for the pseudo bonus, when a new game is executed and it is time to update the branch effect (step S4617: YES), an update setting process for the branch effect is executed (step S4618). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the branch effect table (the draw effect table, the defeat effect table, or the win effect table) which is the current reference target according to the new start of one game is executed. . As a result, the execution content of the branch effect changes depending on the number of continuous games of the branch effect. In addition, in the update setting process, when it is the end timing of the one-time branch effect and the number of execution times of the branch effect to be executed remains, it is set as the next reference target in the effect side RAM 94. The execution control of the effect is started according to any one of the branch effect tables.

  The manner in which the pre-branch effect and the branch effect are executed in the pseudo bonus state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 87. 87 (a) shows the execution period of the pseudo bonus state, FIG. 87 (b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 87 (c) shows the execution period of the pre-branching effect, and FIG. 87 (d). 87 (e) shows the execution time of the branch effect, FIG. 87 (e) shows the timing at which the effect side MPU 92 receives the addition generation command, FIG. 87 (f) shows the addition timing of one execution time of the branch effect, and FIG. g) shows the correction timing of the content of the branch effect.

  First, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed in the pseudo bonus state will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 87 (a). In addition, since 33 games have been selected as the number of initial continuing games, the number of times of planned execution of the branch effect in this pseudo bonus state is one at this point. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial continuous game number, while the transition condition game number is set to 41 games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not fixed at the start timing. Also, at the timing of t1, the pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 87 (c).

  After that, at the timing of t2 when the pre-branch effect is being executed, the add-on generation command is received from the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 87 (e). In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional generation command is eight games. Therefore, even if the number of additional games is generated, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 87 (f), the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect is added once with the occurrence of the number of additional games this time, and the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect is twice.

  After that, at the timing of t3, the pre-branching effect is finished as shown in FIG. 87 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), one execution of the branch effect that is the result of the draw is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and the defeat is lost from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6. One execution of the resulting branch effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the pseudo bonus state ends at the timing of t6 when the branch effect that is the defeat result ends. In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been confirmed, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur as shown in FIG. 87 (b).

  Next, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed while the pre-branch effect is being executed will be described.

  At the timing of t7, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 87 (a). In addition, since 33 games have been selected as the number of initial continuing games, the number of times of planned execution of the branch effect in this pseudo bonus state is one at this point. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial continuous game number, while the transition condition game number is set to 41 games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not fixed at the start timing. Further, at the timing of t7, the pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 87 (c).

  After that, at the timing of t8, which is the situation where the pre-branch effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the add-on generation command is received from the main MPU 72. In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional generation command is 22 games. Therefore, the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the number of remaining transition condition games due to the generation of the additional games. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the content of the branch effect corresponding to the defeat result scheduled to be executed as shown in FIG. 87 (g) is corrected to the victory result.

  Thereafter, at timing t9, the pre-branch effect is finished as shown in FIG. 87 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), one execution of the branch effect that is the winning result is executed from the timing t9 to the timing t10. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the pseudo bonus state ends at the timing of t10 when the branch effect that is the winning result ends. In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed, the state shifts to the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 87 (b).

  Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined while the branch effect that is the defeat result is being executed.

  At the timing of t11, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 87 (a). In addition, since 33 games have been selected as the number of initial continuing games, the number of times of planned execution of the branch effect in this pseudo bonus state is one at this point. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial continuous game number, while the transition condition game number is set to 41 games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not fixed at the start timing. Also, at the timing of t11, the pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 87 (c).

  After that, at the timing of t12, which is the situation where the pre-branch effect is being executed, the add-on generation command is received from the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 87 (e). In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional generation command is eight games. Therefore, even if the number of additional games is generated, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 87 (f), the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect is added once with the occurrence of the number of additional games this time, and the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect is twice.

  After that, at the timing of t13, the pre-branching effect is finished as shown in FIG. 87 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), one execution of the branch effect that is the result of the tie is executed from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14, and thereafter, at the timing of t15, the branch effect that is the defeat result is executed. One execution time is started.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (e), the add-on occurrence command is received from the main MPU 72 at the timing of t16, which is the situation where the branch effect that is the defeat result is being executed. In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional generation command is eight games. Therefore, the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the number of remaining transition condition games due to the generation of the additional games. Therefore, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), the content of the branch effect corresponding to the currently executed defeat result is corrected to the victory result.

  After that, at the timing of t17, the branch effect corresponding to the victory result is finished as shown in FIG. 87 (d). At the timing of t17, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 87 (a). In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed, the state shifts to the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 87 (b).

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In a configuration in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the total number of games given to the player in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the transition condition number of games, the transition condition number of games is determined by lottery. As a result, when the pseudo bonus state is set, it is expected that a small number of transition condition games will be selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the pseudo bonus state is started, the number of initial continuing games is determined by lottery. Then, when the number of initial continued games determined by the lottery exceeds the number of transition condition games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. This makes it possible to diversify the pattern in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state.

  The number of additional games may be given in the middle of the pseudo bonus state. As a result, even if the total number of games given to the player does not exceed the number of transition condition games at the stage when the pseudo bonus state is started, the transition is made by adding the number of additional games in the middle of the pseudo bonus state. It is possible that the number of conditional games is exceeded. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the pseudo bonus state.

  If the number of additional games is given in the middle of the pseudo bonus state but does not exceed the number of transition condition games, the number of additional games is exhausted in the pseudo bonus state. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state increases.

  When the number of additional games exceeds the number of transition condition games when the number of additional games is given in the middle of the pseudo bonus state, the number of additional games is exhausted in the ART state ST9 generated after the end of the pseudo bonus state. As a result, it becomes possible to easily increase the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9.

  When the number of additional games is given in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state, the additional number of games is consumed in the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state increases and the game in the pseudo bonus state is delayed even though the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed. It will be possible.

  Until the total number of games given to the player exceeds the number of transition condition games, the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the pseudo bonus state, and the total number of games given to the player is the number of transition condition games. After that, the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a mode corresponding to the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to execute the lottery process for adding on the number of games in a mode suitable for each situation. Further, the earlier the timing at which the number of transition condition games is exceeded, the longer the period in which the number-of-games addition lottery process is executed can be secured in a manner corresponding to the ART state ST9.

  Even if the number of transition condition games is exceeded when the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is determined, the number of initial continuous games is exhausted in the pseudo bonus state. As a result, even in a situation where it is determined that the ART state ST9 will occur after the end of the pseudo bonus state, it is possible to allow the game to be consumed to some extent in the pseudo bonus state.

  The number of games given to the player in the pseudo bonus state is replaced with a configuration in which the shift to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the number of games given to the player in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the number of transition condition games. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when is equal to or more than the transition condition game number.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is determined by lottery, the number of initial continuous games may be a fixed number of games. In this case, the fixed number of games may or may not exceed the number of transition condition games depending on the selection result of the number of transition condition games. Further, the fixed number of games may surely not exceed the number of transition condition games. In this case, the number of games given to the player does not exceed the number of transition condition games unless the number of additional games is given in the pseudo bonus state.

  Further, when the number of additional games is given in the pseudo bonus state and the number of games given to the player exceeds the number of transition condition games when the number of additional games is given, the number of additional games is ART. Instead of the configuration consumed in the state ST9, the configuration used in the pseudo bonus state may be used. This makes it possible to continue the pseudo bonus state for a long time.

  In addition, the number of additional games provided when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state is added to the stock game number counter 127 so as not to be notified to the player. The configuration may be such that the notification is given by the start timing of the state ST9. For example, the notification that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the game in which the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state is given, and is given each time the number of additional games is given in the pseudo bonus state. It may be configured such that a notification indicating that the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 has increased in the game is executed. In addition, when the pseudo bonus state ends and the ART state ST9 is started even though the game to which the number of additional games is given is not notified, the addition in the pseudo bonus state is added to the initial number of continuing games in the ART state ST9. The remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 may be notified in the state where the number of games is added.

  Further, in the pseudo bonus state, after the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, it is more advantageous than before the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed that the player is more advantageous in giving the number of additional games. Even in such a case, the advantages relating to the addition of the number of additional games may be the same or substantially the same, and the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined before the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. The configuration may be advantageous for the player regarding the addition of the number of additional games.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the addition table executed in the addition lottery process for the number of games is different from that of the second embodiment. The configuration different from that of the second embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

  88 (a) to 88 (d) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the addition tables 141 to 144 in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, as the addition tables 141 to 144, a first addition table 141 shown in FIG. 88 (a), a second addition table 142 shown in FIG. 88 (b), and a third addition table shown in FIG. 88 (c). 143 and the fourth addition table 144 shown in FIG. 88 (d) can be used by the main MPU 72. Note that, although details will be described later, the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are not stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as they are, but the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 that enable the creation of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. The fourth compressed data 146 to 149 are stored in the main ROM 73 in advance.

  The first addition table 141 is referred to when the addition lottery process is executed in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not fixed in the pseudo bonus state. The second addition table 142 is referred to when the addition lottery process is executed in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state. The third addition table 143 is referred to when the addition lottery process is executed as a direct addition in a situation where the A loop and the B loop are not executed in the ART state ST9. The fourth addition table 144 is referred to when the addition lottery process is executed as a direct addition in a situation where the A loop or the B loop is executed in the ART state ST9.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (d), numerical information of the addition index is set in each of the first addition table 141, the second addition table 142, the third addition table 143, and the fourth addition table 144. The assigned data area is set, and the number of random numbers to be won is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the added index for each group of winning numbers “4” to “8”, “15”, and “16”. The specified data area is set. For these data areas, specifically, as numerical information of the index to be added, values of "0" to "8" are set in sequence. In this case, 1 byte of data is assigned to each data area in which the numerical information of the index to be added is set. That is, nine data areas of "0" to "8" are set as numerical information of the addition index in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, but all of these nine data areas are set. It is 1 byte of data.

  The numerical information of the additional index is numerical information for the actual MPU 72 to specify the actual number of additional games. An index correspondence table 145 is stored in the main ROM 73 in advance as data for specifying the actual number of additional games with respect to the numerical information of the additional index. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index correspondence table 145. The numerical information of the additional index of “0” corresponds to the fact that the number of additional games is 0, that is, the result of the extra lottery process is out. The numerical information of the additional index of “1” corresponds to the number of additional games being eight games. The numerical information of the additional index of “2” corresponds to the number of additional games being 12 games. The numerical information of the additional index “3” corresponds to the number of additional games being 22 games. The numerical information of the additional index “4” corresponds to the number of additional games being 32 games. The numerical information of the additional index “5” corresponds to the number of additional games being 52 games. The numerical information of the additional index “6” corresponds to the number of additional games being 102 games. The numerical information of the additional index of "7" corresponds to the number of additional games being 202 games. The numerical information of the additional index “8” corresponds to the number of additional games being 302 games.

  As described above, the numerical information of the number of additional games is not set in the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 as it is, but the numerical information of the additional index is set, and the numerical value of the additional index is set using the index correspondence table 145. With the configuration in which the numerical information of the number of additional games is derived from the information, the data capacity of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 can be suppressed. That is, the maximum numerical information of the number of games to be added is 302 games, 9 bits are required to represent the numerical information in binary, and 2 bytes are required in byte units. Then, in order to standardize the processing in the addition processing of the number of additional games, if the data area of the data area in which the numerical information of the number of additional games is set is set to be constant, the numerical information of the maximum number of additional games is set. Therefore, the data capacity of the data area in which the numerical information of each additional game is set is 2 bytes. In this case, if the numerical information of the number of each additional game is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 as it is, 2 bytes × 9 × 4 72 bytes are required. On the other hand, in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the numerical information of the addition index, which is the data capacity of 1 byte, is set, and the numerical information of the actual number of addition games is derived from the numerical information of the addition index. When the index correspondence table 145 is used, the data capacity for setting the numerical information of the additional indexes in the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 requires 1 byte × 9 pieces × 4 pieces and 36 bytes. At the same time, 1 byte × 9 pieces + 2 bytes × 9 pieces of 27 bytes are required in the index correspondence table 145, and the total is 63 bytes. This 63 bytes has a data capacity smaller than 72 bytes when the numerical information of the number of each additional game is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 145 as it is.

  For details of the data area in which the number of winning random numbers in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is set, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (d), “4” to “8”, The winning numbers of “15” and “16” include the first group including the winning numbers of “4” and “5”, the second group including the winning numbers of “6” and “7”, and “8”. Are classified into a third group including the winning numbers of “” and a fourth group including the winning numbers of “15” and “16”. Further, in the present embodiment, the dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d of 16-bit random numbers are used in the additional lottery process. Then, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of each addition index to be won in the first group and the numerical information of each addition index in the second group. Is the number of winning random numbers to win, the numerical information of each additional index in the third group is winning, and the numerical information of each additional index is winning in the fourth group And the number of winning random numbers for

  Here, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the type of numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers that is 1 or more is set is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the first addition table 141, the numerical information of the addition index of "0", "1", "6" to "8" is included in the first to fourth groups. While the number of winning random numbers that is 1 or more is set in any of the above, the numerical information of the addition index of “2” to “5” indicates the winning random number in any of the first to fourth groups. The number is set to 0. Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the second addition table 142, the numerical information of the addition index other than “2” is set to the number of winning random numbers which is 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups On the other hand, the number information of the winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in the numerical value information of the addition index of “2”. Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), in the third addition table 143, the numerical information of the addition index of "0", "2" to "4" is 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups. While the number of winning random numbers is set to 0, the number information of the winning random numbers is 0 in any of the numerical information of the index added to “1” and “5” to “8”. It is set to individual. In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), in the fourth addition table 144, the numerical information of the addition indexes of "6" to "8" includes a winning random number of 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups. While the number is set, the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in the numerical value information of the index added from “0” to “5”.

  As described above, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, in each of the first to fourth groups, there is numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0. Even in any of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, since the numerical information of “0” to “8” is commonly set as the numerical information of the addition index, It is possible to commonly use the index correspondence table 145 in the fourth addition tables 141 to 144. That is, when the numerical information of the non-common addition index is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the index correspondence table 145 is associated with each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. However, since the numerical information of the common additional index is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 as described above, one kind of index correspondence table 145 is commonly used. It becomes possible to use. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the index correspondence table 145 and read the common index correspondence table 145 regardless of which of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is used. Since it can be used, the processing configuration for reading the index correspondence table 145 can be simplified.

  In the addition lottery process, the reference target table among the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is developed in the main RAM 74, but the main ROM 73 has the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. Are not stored as they are, but are stored as first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149. As described above, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups exists. There is. Therefore, the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 do not have data indicating the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of the additional index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0.

  The first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 will be described in detail below. 90 (a) to 90 (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149.

  The first compressed data 146 is data for creating the first add-on table 141, the second compressed data 147 is data for creating the second add-on table 142, and the third compressed data 148 is the third add-on table. 143 is data for creating, and the fourth compressed data 149 is data for creating the fourth addition table 144. As shown in FIGS. 90A to 90D, header data and actual data are set in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149.

  In the header data, information indicating which actual data set in the corresponding compressed data 146 to 149 corresponds to the numerical value information of the superposition index is set. In addition, in the actual data, the number of one or more winning random numbers in any of the first to fourth groups is set. Regarding the numerical information of the addition index, the winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups. The information of the number of is set. In this case, as the actual data, information on the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of a plurality of additional indexes is set, but each of these pieces of information is arranged in ascending order when viewed in the numerical information of the additional indexes. There is.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90A, 2-byte header data is set as the first data in the first compressed data 146, and the actual data in the first compressed data 146 exists in the header data. “0”, “1”, “6”, “7”, and “8” are set as information that enables the numerical information of the added index to be specified. Further, five unit actual data are set as the actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data has the numerical value information of the additional index “0” in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups is set. In addition, the second unit actual data set subsequent to the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “1” in the first addition table 141. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set subsequent to the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “6” in the first addition table 141. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. The fourth unit actual data set subsequent to the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “7” in the first addition table 141. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fifth unit actual data set subsequent to the fourth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “8” in the first addition table 141. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set.

  When using the first addition table 141 to execute the addition lottery process, the decoding process is executed on the first compressed data 146 read from the main ROM 73, so that the first addition table 141 is stored in the main RAM 74. Deploy. In this case, first, the numerical information of the added index of "0" to "8" is written in the main RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read. Then, the unit real data arranged in the real data is written in order from the numerical information with the smallest value among the numerical information of the additional index in association with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, with respect to the numerical value information of the added index of “0”, “1”, “6”, “7”, “8”, the information of the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the first to fourth groups. Becomes After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, corresponding to the numerical information not set in the header data, the number of winning random numbers is 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. Set the information. As a result, the first addition table 141 is expanded in the main RAM 74 using the first compressed data 146.

  In detail regarding the second compressed data 147, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), 2-byte header data is set as the head data, and the actual data exists in the second compressed data 147 in the header data. "0", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8" are set as the information that can specify the numerical information of the added index. . Further, eight unit actual data are set as the actual data, and the first unit actual data set subsequent to the header data has the numerical value information of the addition index “0” in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set subsequent to the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “2” in the second additional table 142. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set subsequent to the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “3” in the second additional table 142. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fourth unit actual data set subsequent to the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “4” in the second addition table 142. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fifth unit actual data set subsequent to the fourth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “5” in the second addition table 142. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the sixth unit actual data set subsequent to the fifth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “6” in the second addition table 142. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the seventh unit actual data set subsequent to the sixth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “7” in the second addition table 142. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the eighth unit actual data set subsequent to the seventh unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of “8” in the second addition table 142. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set.

  When using the second addition table 142 to execute the addition lottery processing, the decoding processing is executed on the second compressed data 147 read from the main ROM 73 to thereby store the second addition table 142 in the main RAM 74. Deploy. In this case, first, the numerical information of the added index of "0" to "8" is written in the main RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read. Then, the unit real data arranged in the real data is written in order from the numerical information with the smallest value among the numerical information of the additional index in association with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, the numerical information of the added index of “0”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” is in each of the first to fourth groups. The information about the number of winning random numbers is set. After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, corresponding to the numerical information not set in the header data, the number of winning random numbers is 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. Set the information. As a result, the second addition table 142 is expanded in the main RAM 74 using the second compressed data 147.

  In detail regarding the third compressed data 148, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), 2-byte header data is set as the head data, and the actual data in the third compressed data 148 exists in the header data. “0”, “2”, “3”, and “4” are set as the information that enables the numerical information of the added index to be specified. Further, four unit actual data are set as actual data, and the first unit actual data set subsequent to the header data has the numerical value of the additional index “0” in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “2” in the third addition table 143. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set subsequent to the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “3” in the third addition table 143. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fourth unit actual data set subsequent to the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “4” in the third addition table 143. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set.

  When using the third addition table 143 to perform the addition lottery process, the decoding process is executed on the third compressed data 148 read from the main ROM 73 to store the third addition table 143 in the main RAM 74. Deploy. In this case, first, the numerical information of the added index of "0" to "8" is written in the main RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read. Then, the unit real data arranged in the real data is written in order from the numerical information with the smallest value among the numerical information of the additional index in association with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, with respect to the numerical information of the added index of “0”, “2”, “3”, and “4”, the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the first to fourth groups. After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, corresponding to the numerical information not set in the header data, the number of winning random numbers is 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. Set the information. As a result, the third addition table 143 is expanded in the main RAM 74 using the third compressed data 148.

  For the fourth compressed data 149, in detail, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), 2-byte header data is set as the leading data, and the actual data in the fourth compressed data 149 exists in the header data. “6”, “7”, and “8” are set as information that enables the numerical information of the added index to be specified. Further, three unit actual data are set as the actual data, and the first unit actual data set subsequent to the header data has the numerical value information of the additional index "6" in the fourth additional table 144. Information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set subsequent to the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “7” in the fourth addition table 144. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set subsequent to the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index “8” in the fourth addition table 144. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set.

  When using the fourth addition table 144 to execute the addition lottery process, the decoding process is executed on the fourth compressed data 149 read out from the main ROM 73 so that the fourth addition table 144 is stored in the main RAM 74. Deploy. In this case, first, the numerical information of the added index of "0" to "8" is written in the main RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read. Then, the unit real data arranged in the real data is written in order from the numerical information with the smallest value among the numerical information of the additional index in association with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, with respect to the numerical value information of the added indexes of “6”, “7”, and “8”, the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the first to fourth groups. After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, corresponding to the numerical information not set in the header data, the number of winning random numbers is 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. Set the information. As a result, the fourth addition table 144 is expanded in the main RAM 74 using the fourth compressed data 149.

  In the configuration in which the random number used in the additional lottery process is 16 bits, from the viewpoint of simplification of the process in the case of specifying the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of each additional index in the additional lottery process, ~ The data capacity of the data area in which the number of each winning random number is set in the fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is set to 2 bytes, respectively. First to fourth groups are set in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, and each of the first to fourth groups corresponds to numerical value information of an addition index of "0" to "8". Since the data representing the number of winning random numbers is set, the data capacity for specifying the information of the number of winning random numbers is 2 bytes × 9 in any of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. The number of pieces x 4 pieces is 72 bytes. Numerical information of the superimposing indexes “0” to “8” is set in the first to fourth superimposing tables 141 to 144, and each of the numerical information has a data capacity of 1 byte. Therefore, the data capacity of each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is 81 bytes, which is 72 bytes + 1 byte × 9. On the other hand, the data capacity of the first compressed data 146 is 42 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and 2 bytes × 4 × 5 actual data, which is smaller than the data volume of the first addition table 141. . The data capacity of the second compressed data 147 is 66 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and 2 bytes × 4 × 8 actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the second addition table 142. The data capacity of the third compressed data 148 is 34 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and 2 bytes × 4 pieces × 4 pieces of actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the third addition table 143. The data capacity of the fourth compressed data 149 is 26 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and 2 bytes × 4 × 3 actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the fourth addition table 144. This makes it possible to use the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 while suppressing the required data capacity in the main ROM 73.

  Next, the additional lottery processing executed by the main MPU 72 using the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 91. The additional lottery process is executed after the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed when one game is newly started and before the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate.

  First, of the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the compressed data 146 to 149 corresponding to the current game situation is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4701). After that, the numerical information of the added index of "0" to "8" is written in the main RAM 74 in ascending order (step S4702).

  After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data of the compressed data 146 to 149 read out in step S4701 is read out, and the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the additional index is sequentially read in step S4701. Each unit actual data arranged in the read actual data of the compressed data 146 to 149 is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74 (step S4703). After that, among the numerical value information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, it corresponds to the numerical value information not set in the header data that the number of winning random numbers is 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. Information is set (step S4704).

  After that, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S4705). In the random number acquisition process, the 16-bit random number updated in the dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d corresponding to the additional lottery process is acquired.

  After that, the acquisition process of the additional index is executed (step S4706). FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the additional index. Of the first to fourth groups in the addition tables 141 to 144 developed in the main RAM 74 in steps S4701 to S4704, the group corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current winning combination is selected. Understand (step S4801). After that, "9" corresponding to the maximum value of the numerical information of the index to be added is set in the repetition counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S4802). Also, the value of the 16-bit random number acquired in step S4705 is set in the judgment value counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S4803).

  After that, in the groups grasped in step S4801 of the addition tables 141 to 144 expanded in the main RAM 74 in steps S4701 to S4704, the numerical information of the addition index corresponding to the value of the repeat counter in the main RAM 74 is associated. Then, the number of winning random numbers set is read out (step S4804). In this case, for example, if the value of the repetition counter is "9", the number of winning random numbers set corresponding to the numerical information of the superposition index of "8" is read out, and if the value of the repetition counter is "5". The number of winning random numbers set corresponding to the numerical information of the superposition index of "4" is read out, and if the value of the repeat counter is "1", it is set corresponding to the numerical information of the superposition index of "0". Read the number of winning random numbers. Then, the obtained number of winning random numbers is added to the determination value counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4805).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the determination value counter after the addition exceeds "65535" which is the maximum value of the 16-bit random number (step S4806). When a negative determination is made in step S4806, it means that the numerical information of the addition index corresponding to the current value of the repetition counter has not been won. In this case, the value of the repeat counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S4807), and the condition is that the value of the repeat counter after the decrement by 1 is not "0" (step S4808: NO). The processing of steps S4804 to S4806 is executed for the value of the repetition counter in.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S4806, it means that the numerical value information of the additional index corresponding to the current value of the repeat counter has been won. Therefore, the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the current value of the repeat counter is acquired (step S4809). For example, if the value of the repetition counter is "9", "8" is acquired as the numerical information of the addition index, and if the value of the repetition counter is "5", "4" is acquired as the numerical information of the addition index and repeated. If the value of the counter is "1", "0" is acquired as the numerical information of the index to be added.

  Even if the affirmative judgment is made in step S4808, the affirmative judgment is supposed to be made in step S4806 at the timing when any of the numerical value information of the index to be added from “0” to “8” is originally selected. Without performing a positive determination in step S4806 in any of the numerical value information of the index added from "0" to "8", the process for executing the abnormality notification is executed (step S4810). .. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of an electric noise or a malfunction in the setting value of the additional table when the malfunction occurs.

  Returning to the description of the addition lottery processing (FIG. 91), after the addition index acquisition processing is executed in step S4706, the index correspondence table 145 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4707). After that, information on the number of additional games corresponding to the additional index information acquired in step S4706 is read from the index correspondence table 145 (step S4708). Then, the read information on the number of additional games to be added is added to the counter which is the current addition target (step S4709).

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  Even in the case where the numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 is present in each of the first to fourth groups in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, In all of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, numerical information of "0" to "8" is commonly set as the numerical information of the addition index. As a result, it becomes possible to commonly use the index correspondence table 145 in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. That is, when the numerical information of the non-common addition index is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the index correspondence table 145 is associated with each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. However, since the numerical information of the common additional index is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 as described above, one kind of index correspondence table 145 is commonly used. It becomes possible to use. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the index correspondence table 145 and read the common index correspondence table 145 regardless of which of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is used. Since it can be used, the processing configuration for reading the index correspondence table 145 can be simplified.

  In the addition lottery process, the reference target table among the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is developed in the main RAM 74, but the main ROM 73 has the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. Are not stored as they are, but are stored as first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149. As described above, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups exists. There is. On the other hand, the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 have data indicating the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0. Not not. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the main ROM 73.

  Even if there is a lottery table in which the number of winning random numbers is not set to a predetermined index value as described above, a configuration in which the index values are shared between a plurality of lottery tables is added to the lottery process. The present invention may be applied to a table group for other lottery instead of the table group for a lottery.

  Further, the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 are not limited to the configuration stored in the main ROM 73 as the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, and the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 141 are not limited thereto. 144 may be stored in the main ROM 73 as it is.

  Further, the data structure of the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 is not limited to the above, and any specific data structure is possible as long as the data can be compressed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the random number acquisition processing in the main MPU 72 is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process in this embodiment.

  In steps S4901 to S4908, the same processes as steps S401 to S408 of the random number acquisition process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment are executed. Accordingly, when the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are targets for random number acquisition, 16-bit random numbers updated by the corresponding dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are acquired.

  When the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are targets for using random numbers (step S4907: NO), the value of the random number pointer provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S4909). The random number pointer is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which one of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used for the random number, and the numerical information of "0" to "11" is displayed. Can be taken. Then, when the random number pointer is “0”, the first shared random number circuit 101a is a target for using the random number, and when the random number pointer is “1”, the second shared random number circuit 101b is a target for using the random number, When the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c becomes a target for use of random numbers. When the random number pointer is "m", the m + 1th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l use random numbers. The target (m is an integer of 0 or more).

  When the value of the random number pointer after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "11" (step S4910: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S4911). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is incremented by 1 each time it is used in the lottery process in the numerical range of "0" to "11", and becomes the minimum value when the maximum value of the numerical range is exceeded. It will be looped back. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used for random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuit 101a to be used in accordance with a predetermined order each time the random number is used. 101l to 101l are sequentially changed, and the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in the last order are used, the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in the first order are used again.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4910 or when the processing of step S4911 is executed, the random number of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is the current random number. Numerical value information of random numbers is acquired from the latch register written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the game (step S4912).

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be acquired this time is a 16-bit random number (step S4913). That is, in the present embodiment, not only the 8-bit random number but also the 16-bit random number may be obtained by using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. If a negative determination is made in step S4913, this means that the random number to be acquired this time is an 8-bit random number, so the present random number acquisition processing is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4913, it is determined whether a 16-bit random number has been acquired (step S4914). When a negative determination is made in step S4914, the processes in steps S4909 to S4912 are executed again, and the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that have already been acquired have been acquired in the following acquisition order. An 8-bit random number is additionally acquired from a certain shared random number circuit 101a to 101l. As a result, a total of 16-bit random numbers are obtained from the already-obtained 8-bit random numbers and the newly-obtained 8-bit random numbers this time.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is possible to obtain 16-bit random numbers as well as 8-bit random numbers by using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. As a result, it is possible to diversify the types of lottery processing to be used by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

  Further, when acquiring an 8-bit random number, an 8-bit random number is acquired from one of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and when acquiring a 16-bit random number, the first to twelfth shared An 8-bit random number is obtained from each of the two random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to obtain a 16-bit random number while utilizing the processing configuration for obtaining an 8-bit random number.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for supplying a clock signal to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the random number circuit group 100 in this embodiment.

  The configuration related to the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d in the random number circuit group 100 is the same as that in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the shared clock circuit 104 that is common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is provided. Although the clock signal is output to all of 101 to 101l, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are made to correspond to each one-to-one Twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are provided. The output periods of the clock signals of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are different from each other and are set so as not to be in a multiple relationship with each other. This makes it possible to diversify the random number combination patterns of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at arbitrary timings.

  Further, the output cycles of the clock signals of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are all sufficiently shorter than the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41. For example, the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41 is 1 second, whereas the output cycle of the clock signal of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l is in the range of 3 microseconds to 30 microseconds. Has become. Thereby, the deviation of the update cycle of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is sufficiently small in relation to the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the normal production control processing in the production-side MPU 92 is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the normal production control process in this embodiment.

  In step S5001, the same process as step S1701 to step S1710 of the normal production control process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5002). The chance effect flag is a flag for the effect MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. When the value of the chance effect flag is "0" (step S5002: NO), it is determined whether a chance start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5003). When the chance start command is received (step S5003: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag of the effector RAM 94 (step S5004).

  When the false aura effect flag is set to "1" (step S5004: YES), it is determined whether or not the false aura effect currently being executed is a cancellation target (step S5005). There are two types of false aural effects, one in which an effect with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed and one in which an effect with a low expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed. Since the false aura state ST5 is a gaming state that does not lead to the transition to the ART state ST9 in the first place, even if any type of false aura effect is being executed, after the false aura effect is finished, the ART state ST9 is entered. Does not occur.

  When the false aura effect currently being executed is of a type in which an effect with a low expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, an affirmative decision is made in step S5005 and the false aura effect flag is cleared to "0". (Step S5006). As a result, the false aura effect during execution is stopped midway along with the transition to the chance state ST7.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5004, or if the process of step S5006 is executed, a chance effect start setting process is executed (step S5007). In the chance effect start setting processing, a chance effect table that enables execution of the chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls production execution according to the chance production table, so that the opportunity production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that it is the chance state ST7 by confirming the effect. After that, the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5008).

  On the other hand, when the false aura effect currently being executed is of a type in which an effect with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S5005. In this case, "1" is set to the chance waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5009). The chance waiting flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that it is in the state of waiting for the start of the chance effect due to the fact that the false predictive effect corresponding to the false predictive state ST5 is being executed. is there. Here, in the case where the main MPU 72 shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, the false precursory state ST5 is terminated in the middle of the transition to the chance state ST7. On the other hand, even if the effect-side MPU 92 shifts to the chance state ST7 during the false predictive effect, the false predictive effect in the midst of executing the effect is highly expected to shift to the ART state ST9. In the case of the type, the false aura effect is continued without ending the false aura effect even if the control corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed in the main MPU 72. As a result, by prioritizing the transition to the chance state ST7 as the gaming state over the continuation of the false precursory state ST5, while ensuring the player's profit due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7, the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed. It is possible to prevent the content of the effect from being uncomfortable by continuing the false aura effect that is in the middle of execution of the effect with high expectations.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5003 or when the process of step S5009 is executed, the effect control process for the false aura state is executed (step S5010). The processing content of the effect control processing for the false aura state is the same as that of the first embodiment. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5002, the processing of steps S5011-S5016 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S5011 to S5016 are the same as the steps S1717 to S1722 of the normal production control process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the currently-executed false aura effect is a type in which an effect with a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, the main MPU 72 shifts to the chance state ST7. Even if the transition occurs, the execution of the false precursor effect is continued. As a result, by prioritizing the transition to the chance state ST7 as the gaming state over the continuation of the false precursory state ST5, while ensuring the player's profit due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7, the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed. It is possible to prevent the content of the effect from being uncomfortable by continuing the false aura effect that is in the middle of execution of the effect with high expectations.

  On the other hand, when the false aura effect currently being executed is of a type in which an effect with a low expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, when the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the main MPU 72, The false precursor effect is stopped midway and the chance effect is started. As a result, in a situation where the false aura effect with a low degree of attention is being executed, the main MPU 72 shifts to the chance state ST7, and accordingly, the player is more likely than the currently executed false aura effect. It is possible to prioritize the start of the chance production, which has a high degree of attention.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the effect control processing for the false aura state in the effect MPU 92 is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the effect control process for the false aura state in this embodiment. It should be noted that the effect control process for the false aura state is not limited to the situation where the false aura effect is being executed, but also the main aura effect, the chance effect, the effect for the bonus state, the effect for the preparation state ST8 and the effect for the ART state ST9. Will be executed even if is not executed.

  In steps S5101 to S5104, the same processing as steps S1801 to S1804 of the effect control processing for false aura state (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment is executed. When "1" is set to the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5101: YES), the information to be referred to in the false predictive effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is the end timing of the false predictive effect effect. By determining whether or not it is the corresponding information, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the false aura effect (step S5105).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, it is determined whether a false precursor start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5106). When the false precursor start command has not been received (step S5106: NO), a false precursor effect end setting process is executed (step S5107). In the setting process of the end of the false sign effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false sign state ST5 and returning to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the effect side ROM 93. It is stored in the effect side RAM 94. Execution control of the effect is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables, so that the false sign state ST5 is ended and the normal game state ST1 is restored in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After the corresponding normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, by confirming the effect, the player can know that the precursor effect has ended and the game has returned to the normal game state ST1.

  When the false aura start command is received (step S5106: YES), the adjustment process of the false aura effect is executed (step S5108). In the adjustment process of the false aura effect, a false aura effect table for performing a false aura effect having continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false aura effect at that time is read from the effector ROM 93 and the effect side is read. It is stored in the RAM 94. In this case, the false omen effect production table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time. The effect is controlled by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the false aura effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed in a content having continuity with the content of the false aura effect that has been executed until then. False indication effect is executed on the display device 63. When the false aura effect is started in the middle of the false aura effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false aura effect that have been executed up to that time and the false aura effect to be executed. The precursor effect of the total number of games together with the number of games will be executed.

  When it is not the end timing of the false aura effect (step S5105: NO), it is determined whether or not a false aura start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S5109). If the false aura effect start command has not been received (step S5109: NO), the false aura effect update setting process is executed (step S5110). In the update setting process, if the timing of updating the false aura effect is reached by newly executing one game, the range to be referred to in the false aura effect table that is currently the reference target of the one game is changed. A process of changing according to a new start is executed. As a result, the execution content of the false aura effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the false aura effect.

  When the false aura effect command is received (step S5109: YES), the adjustment process of the false aura effect is executed (step S5111). In the adjustment process of the false aura effect, a false aura effect table for performing a false aura effect having continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false aura effect at that time is read from the effector ROM 93 and the effect side is read. It is stored in the RAM 94. In this case, the false omen effect production table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time. The effect is controlled by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the false aura effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed in a content having continuity with the content of the false aura effect that has been executed until then. False indication effect is executed on the display device 63. When the false aura effect is started in the middle of the false aura effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false aura effect that have been executed up to that time and the false aura effect to be executed. The precursor effect of the total number of games together with the number of games will be executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5102, the process of step S5104 is executed, the process of step S5107 is executed, the process of step S5108 is executed, the process of step S5110 is executed, or the process of step S5111 is executed. When the processing is executed, it is determined whether or not a preparation start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S5112). Even in the situation where the effect MPU 92 is executing the control for executing the false precursor effect, a situation in which the game state in the main MPU 72 is the chance state ST7 may occur. In such a situation, the main MPU 72 receives the transition win in the transition lottery process from the chance state ST7 to the ART state ST9. A preparation start command is transmitted to the rendering MPU 92.

  When the preparation start command is received (step S5112: YES), the preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S5113). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table that enables execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls production execution according to the preparation production table, whereby the preparation production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that it is in the preparation state ST8 by confirming the effect. It should be noted that, when the start setting process of the preparatory production is executed in the situation where the false aura effect is being executed, it corresponds to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST9 is won in such a manner as to interrupt the series of stories of the false aura effect. The effect is performed. After that, various flags related to the false aura effect are cleared to "0" (step S5114).

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the main MPU 72 shifts to the chance state ST7 while the false aura effect is being executed, the false aura effect during the execution is continued and Even if the false precursor effect is ended in the situation where the side MPU 72 continues the chance state ST7, the chance effect is not started. As a result, the chance production is suddenly started in the middle of the false precursor production, or the chance production is not started at the same time as the false precursor production is finished, and the player does not feel uncomfortable with the sudden start of the chance production. It becomes possible to do so.

<Eighth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the execution mode of the bonus winning notification when the bonus winning is achieved during the execution of the ending effect. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the bonus notification processing executed by the effecting MPU 92 during the ending. The bonus notification process during ending is executed during the execution of ending effect.

  It is determined whether or not any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S5201). When the main MPU 72 starts the game in which the bonus winning data is set, the main MPU 72 sends a game start command in which information for identifying the type of the set bonus winning data is set, and when the bonus prize is established. Since the corresponding command is transmitted, the effect side MPU 92 can specify whether or not the bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 based on the command.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game for which the bonus winning data is set (step S5202). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the number of non-notification compatible games corresponding to the type of bonus winning data set this time is read from the effect side ROM 93 (step S5203). A plurality of non-notification compatible games are set according to the type of bonus winning data. Specifically, when any BB winning data is set, 10 games are selected as the non-notification corresponding game number, and when any RB winning data is set, 20 as the non-notification corresponding game number. The game is selected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5202, or if the processing of step S5203 is executed, it is determined whether or not the remaining game number of the ending effect continuous games set at the start of the ending effect is less than the non-notification corresponding game number. Is determined (step S5204). When a positive determination is made in step S5204, notification effect setting processing is executed (step S5205). In the notification effect setting process, data setting is performed so that the image corresponding to the bonus winning is reduced and displayed in the situation where the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed on the image display device 63.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the bonus winning is achieved in the middle of the ending effect, the bonus winning notification is performed at the timing when the remaining number of continuing games in the ending effect reaches the predetermined number of games. . Thereby, it is possible to perform the bonus winning announcement at a preferable timing in relation to the ending effect.

  It should be noted that the number of non-notification compatible games may be different depending on whether or not there is a setting difference in the winning probability.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above respective embodiments. Further, the configurations of the above-described respective embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following different configurations may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above-described respective embodiments are mutually combined. Good.

  (1) When a winning combination in which the winning probability fluctuates according to the set value in the advantageous zone SC2 is executed, a transition lottery process in the false omen state ST5, a transition lottery process in the main omen state ST6, and a transition lottery process in the chance state ST7 are executed. However, the transition lottery process may not be executed even if the winning combination in which the winning probability changes according to the set value is won. In this case, the transition lottery process is executed only when a winning combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the setting value is won in the advantageous zone SC2, and therefore the influence of the setting value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 is affected. It becomes possible to reduce. Further, instead of the configuration, the transition lottery process may be executed when a winning combination whose winning probability varies according to a set value is won and a winning corresponding to the winning combination is established.

  (2) In the game won in the transitional lottery process of the advantageous zone SC2, the transitional lottery process of the false precursory state ST5, the transitional lottery process of the real precursory state ST6, and the transitional lottery process of the chance state ST7 are configured to be executed. The transition lottery process may not be executed in the game won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to cause the transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the transition to each of the gaming states ST5 to ST7 to be triggered by different games.

  Further, the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2 is configured to be executed when a winning combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability according to the set value. It may be configured to be executed when a winning combination that does not change and a winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established, and when a winning combination in which the winning probability changes according to the set value is won. A configuration may be adopted, and a configuration in which a winning combination whose winning probability varies according to a set value is won and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established may be adopted.

  (3) When the transitional lottery process of the advantageous section SC2 is won, the advantageous section SC2 may be started from the game next to the winning game. In this case, if the transition lottery process in the false precursory state ST5, the transition lottery process in the main precursory state ST6, and the transition lottery process in the chance state ST7 can be executed on condition that the advantageous segment SC2 is present, the transition to the advantageous segment SC2 Even if the game is won in the lottery process, it is not in the advantageous section SC2 in the game. Therefore, in the game that is won in the transition lottery process in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the false omen state ST5 and the transition of the main omen state ST6 are performed. The lottery process and the transition lottery process of the chance state ST7 are not executed.

  (4) When the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, it ends every time the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning in the advantageous section SC2 is notified. The lottery process may be executed, and the final lottery process may result in a final win, so that the transition to the normal section SC1 may occur. In this case, it is possible to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning a plurality of times even in the advantageous section SC2 that has shifted in the normal gaming state ST1. Becomes

  (5) The number of times of notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning required to generate the end timing of the advantageous section SC2 is not limited to once, but is 2 It may be a plurality of times such as three times, four times or more.

  (6) Instead of the configuration in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified as the timing for ending the advantageous section SC2, the first bell winning In the case where there is a specific prize that is a prize that is established when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is a predetermined order and the number of game media provided is large, the specific prize is established. The advantageous section SC2 may be configured not to end until the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the above is performed a predetermined number (for example, once or twice). That is, in the configuration, the reel 32L that enables the winning of the prize that gives the maximum number of game media among the winnings that are achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a predetermined order. , 32M, 32R until the notification of the stop order occurs a predetermined number of times, the advantageous section SC2 will not end. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are notified until a predetermined number of notifications of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the specific winning are generated even in the advantageous section SC2 that has shifted in the normal gaming state ST1. When a winning combination for winning the first bell prize is won in accordance with the stop order, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the first bell prize to be achieved may be notified.

  (7) The number of notifications of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning necessary for generating the end timing of the advantageous section SC2 is the normal gaming state ST1, the false precursor state ST5, and It is also possible to have a configuration that is different between a plurality of gaming states such as the chance state ST7. For example, by setting the number of necessary notifications to be greater in the false aura state ST5 than in the normal gaming state ST1, it is possible to set the false aura state ST5 to a more advantageous gaming state than the normal gaming state ST1. ..

  (8) When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified in the normal game state ST1 and the advantageous section SC2, the notification is given to the dual-purpose display section 66. However, the image display device 63 may be configured not to perform it. In this case, it is possible to make the notice of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables the establishment of the first bell prize, which is a trigger for the end of the advantageous section SC2, to be inconspicuous.

  (9) In the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section display unit 67 is in a light emitting state (that is, a display state), and when the slot machine 10 has a predetermined abnormal state, the advantageous section display unit 67 is in the off state. (In other words, the non-display state) may be adopted. Further, in this case, the dual-purpose display unit 66 may be configured to perform a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state. In this way, in the structure in which the common display area 68 and the advantageous section display section 67 are collectively provided in the common display area 68, when the slot machine 10 has a predetermined abnormal state, the advantageous section display section 67 is provided. Is turned off, and a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, so that even if the same abnormal state occurs, it is common depending on whether or not it is the advantageous section SC2. Since the phenomenon that the display mode of the display area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easy to specify the type of abnormal state.

  (10) When the number of games executed in the B loop is 21 or more, even if the number of games executed in the B loop is 22 or more, the addition of 1000 games is notified as a special freeze effect. May be configured. In this case, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games to be notified at one time from increasing excessively.

  (11) When the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 measured by the main MPU 72 when the B loop is started is less than 20 games, the special freeze effect may not be generated. In this case, a B loop occurs in a situation where the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is 20 or more, and when 20 games are executed in the B loop, the total is irrespective of whether the B loop is continued or not. With the configuration of notifying the number of additional games, it is possible to perform the additional notification of 1000 games without assuming that the number of games added in the B loop will be exhausted on the way.

  (12) 20 games may be added when the B loop is started. In this case, when 20 games are executed in the B loop, the total number of added games is informed regardless of whether the B loop is continued or not, so that the number of games given in the B loop is changed midway. It is possible to carry out the addition notification of 1000 games without assuming that it will be consumed by.

  (13) The freeze period at the end of the ending may be longer when the ending effect is ended and the BB effect is started than when the BB effect is not started after the ending effect is ended. In this case, when the ending effect is finished and the BB effect is started, the BB start effect can be executed after executing the ending effect of the ending effect by using the extended period.

  (14) When the winning combination is a bonus combination in which the winning probability varies depending on the set value and the winning combination in which the winning probability does not vary according to the setting value, the bonus winning announcement (first It may be configured such that whether or not the first notification and the second notification are performed is different. For example, bonus winnings that change the winning probability according to the set value will be announced when the bonus is won in the middle of the ending production, and ending effects will be displayed for the bonus winning role whose winning probability does not change depending on the setting value. Even if the player wins in the middle of the process, the bonus winning notification may not be given. When the bonus state corresponding to the latter bonus combination (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) is entered, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs even if the game section is the normal section SC1, so the ending effect ends. By generating a bonus state corresponding to the bonus hand after the advantageous section SC2 ends, it is possible to immediately return to the advantageous section SC2 even if the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly ended.

  (15) The ending effect may be executed on condition that the total number of game media provided in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. This makes it possible to prevent the ending effect from being executed even if the game medium is not provided enough to satisfy the player.

  (16) When the ending effect is executed, a moving-image effect in increments of 5 games is performed, and at the end, an end screen showing the number of game media acquired in the current ART state ST9 and the number of games executed in the current ART state ST9. May be displayed.

  (17) When the winning combination is won in the situation where the ending effect is being executed and the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is 1490 or more, a bonus winning notification (first notification, second notification) The configuration may be such that no announcement is made. In this case, in the bonus internal state ST2, the replay winning probability is higher than in the normal gaming state ST1, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. This allows the player to recognize that the ending effect is being executed in the ART state ST9 even when the ending effect is being executed in the bonus internal state ST2.

  (18) In the ending effect, the end roll may be played back, and the ending timing of the ending effect may be matched with the ending timing of the end roll by changing the playback speed.

  (19) When the ending effect is extended due to a bonus state during the ending effect, an additional image such as character introduction may be displayed in the extended game. Further, it may be configured to display an image indicating a set value in the extended game. In this case, when the winning combination is won in the middle of the ending effect, it is assumed that the bonus prize is not intentionally established to extend the ending effect and display the set value suggestion image. Therefore, when the bonus winning is not established for, for example, five or more games after winning the bonus combination, the suggestion image of the set value may not be displayed even if the ending effect is extended.

  (20) When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 in the middle of the bonus state is equal to or larger than the number of ending corresponding games, the bonus effect may be ended and the ending effect may be started. The ending effect may be started after the state ends, or the ending effect may be started when the transition from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 that occurs after the bonus state ends. ..

  In the configuration in which the ending effect starts after the bonus state ends, the ending effect starts later than the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, basically, in the ending effect, moving image effects of 5 games are performed, but by allowing moving image effects of 3 games to be performed, all effect contents can be displayed by the end of the ending effect. You may do it. Further, if all the effect contents cannot be displayed by the final game of the ending effect, all the effect contents may be displayed by using the freeze period that occurs when the ending effect ends.

  In addition, as ending effects, a plurality of types of effects such as effects for 30 games, effects for 40 games, effects for 50 games are prepared, and ending effects for the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 are started. The effect may be selected according to the timing.

  (21) The number of games consumed in the bonus state may be excluded from the measurement of the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 from reaching the upper limit number of games during the bonus state and prevent the ending effect from starting during the bonus state. Becomes

  (22) When a bonus combination is won in a game other than the final game in the advantageous maintenance section, the bonus type may be notified immediately regardless of the type of the bonus combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of winning the bonus prize in the game prior to the final game in the advantageous maintenance section.

  (23) Instead of the configuration in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed if the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section and the advantageous game is the SC2 in the bonus state start game, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed. At the same time, the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may be higher than in other cases. Even in this case, it is possible to give a profit to the fact that the bonus prize has been established in the advantageous maintenance section.

  (24) The number of continuous games in the advantageous maintenance section is not limited to a fixed configuration, and may be determined by a lottery. However, even if it is decided by lottery, it is necessary to select the number of games in a range in which the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 does not exceed the upper limit number of games.

  (25) Instead of the configuration in which the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed when the advantageous section SC2 is in the bonus state start game, instead of the ART state ST9 when the advantageous section SC2 is in the game in the bonus state, The transition lottery process may be executed, or the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 may be executed when the advantageous section SC2 is set in the final game in the bonus state. In this case, when the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2, the trigger for ending the advantageous section SC2 may be determined by lottery. For example, in the configuration in which the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is executed in the advantageous game SC2 in the final game in the bonus state, the content until the final game in the bonus state is ended is not selected as the termination opportunity of the advantageous period SC2. As long as the bonus state is triggered, the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is not executed.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, the timing at which the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is executed may be different depending on the bonus combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus state. For example, if the bonus state corresponds to a predetermined bonus combination, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed in the start game, and if the bonus state corresponds to a specific bonus combination, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed in the final game. With this configuration, the probability of executing the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 can be changed depending on the type of bonus combination.

  (26) In the advantageous section SC2, when a bonus combination in which the winning probability varies according to the set value is won, a transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 may be executed in the winning game. In this case, by notifying the player of the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the bonus combination. In addition, in the advantageous section SC2, when a winning combination in which the winning probability changes according to the set value is won, the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 may be executed in the winning game.

  (27) The configuration of the offset table 111 for associating each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table with the winning number is limited to the configuration in the first embodiment. Not done. For example, the configuration may be such that the group of small wins → the group of bonus wins → the group of replay wins is not set in this order, but the group of the bonus wins → the group of replay wins → the group of small wins ..

  (28) The offset table 111 is not set commonly to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, but the offset table is individually set in correspondence with each lottery table. The configuration may be provided. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, while the combination of winning combinations whose winning probability changes according to the set value and the winning combinations whose winning probability does not change according to the setting value are grouped separately, An offset table may be provided in order to separate and collect the small winning group, the bonus winning group, and the replay winning group. For the same purpose, an offset table may be provided for the first RT mode lottery table and an offset table may be provided for the second RT mode lottery table. In this case, the winning numbers of the offset tables may be set so as not to overlap between the offset tables. Even with such a configuration, the index value IV is set in each lottery table in a manner that facilitates design, and the winning number is set in each offset table in a manner that facilitates handling of winning combination information in subsequent processing. Can be set.

  (29) In the false aura state ST5, the false aura state ST5 may be extended when a winning combination that starts the false aura state ST5 is won. When the false aura state ST5 is extended, the advantageous section SC2 may be extended by that amount. As a result, the advantageous section SC2 is extended through the extension of the false precursory state ST5, and thus it is more advantageous for the player to extend the false precursory state ST5.

  (30) If the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is executed even during the false omen state ST5, the advantageous section SC2 ends and the normal It may be configured to shift to the section SC1. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the normal section SC1 is set even in the false precursory state ST5.

  (31) When a predetermined hand is won in the middle of the false omen state ST5, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed, while when a predetermined hand is won in the middle of the omen state ST6, the ART state is obtained. The configuration may be such that the additional lottery process in ST9 is executed. In this case, not only is it advantageous for the player that the number of continuous games in the false aura state ST5 is long, but it is advantageous for the player that the number of continuous games in the false aura state ST6 is long. Therefore, in the case where the transition to the true precursory state ST6 is won in the middle of the false precursory state ST5, the number of remaining games in the false precursory state ST5 at that time is added to the number of continuous games in the true precursory state ST6. May be As a result, it is possible to give an opportunity to increase the number of continuous games in the omen state ST6.

  (32) The number of continuous games in the false omen state ST5 is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and may be fixed to a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games).

  (33) When the bonus prize is achieved in the false omen state ST5 and the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 may be confirmed. In this case, the player expects that the bonus prize will be established in the situation where the false aura effect is being executed.

  (34) When the state shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false aura state ST5, the production or the notification indicating that the state is the chance state ST7 may be executed while continuing the false aura production. In this case, it is possible to expect the chance state ST7 while enjoying the flow of the fake omen effect.

  (35) When transitioning to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false aura state ST5, the false aura effect may be ended at that point and the chance effect may be started.

  (36) In the chance state ST7, the player is elected to move to the ART state ST9 depending on whether the chance state ST7 is entered in a situation other than the false precursory state ST5 or the chance state ST7 is entered in the middle of the false precursory state ST5. The configurations may be different in probability. For example, in the case where the chance state ST7 is not in the false precursory state ST5, the probability that the transition to the ART state ST9 is won in the chance state ST7 is more than in the case where the chance state ST7 is transferred in the middle of the false precursory state ST5. May be configured to be high. In addition, the probability that the chance of transitioning to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 is greater in the case of transitioning to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursory state ST5 than in the case of transitioning to the chance state ST7 in a situation that is not the false precursory state ST5. May be configured to be high.

  (37) In a situation where the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is not transferred to the display counter 126, the notification corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 may be executed. .. For example, a display area in which a color corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is displayed is set on the image display device 63. For example, if the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 500 or more, the display area is set. Displays a red color, and displays a green color when it is less than 500 and 300 or more, displays a yellow color when less than 300 and 200 or more, and a blue color when less than 200 and 100 or more May be displayed, and if less than 100, white may be displayed. This allows the player to predict the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127.

  (38) Although a plurality of special additional effects can be selected at a time, the number of special additional effects selected at one time may be one. In this case, although the frequency of performing the process of selecting the special additional effect is increased, the area for storing the selected special additional effect is unnecessary.

  (39) Although the special addition effect is executed only when the A loop occurs, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the display counter is displayed. The special addition effect may be executed as a kind of the discharge effect executed when the value of 126 becomes “0”. In this case, since the special additional effect is executed when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. ..

  (40) Although the expected effect is started when the A-loop is set in the main MPU 72, the expected effect may not be executed. In this case, the special addition effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may be executed at a timing when a predetermined number of games have passed since the A loop was set. As a result, the special addition effect suddenly occurs, which makes it possible to give the player unexpectedness.

  (41) When the A-loop is set in the main MPU 72, the special addition effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may not be executed until the A-loop ends. As a result, it is possible to execute the special addition effect in a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is large.

  (42) When the master MPU 72 executes the lottery process as to whether or not to give the number of additional games and wins, a fixed number of games (for example, 30 games) is always used as the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9. It may be configured to add and determine at what timing the effect side MPU 92 notifies the number of games. In this case, since the processing pattern of the additional lottery processing in the main MPU 72 is only one pattern, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 72.

  (43) When the value of the display counter 126 is “0” in a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is “0”, the end lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed in each game and the process ends. The ART state ST9 may be terminated when the player is elected. Alternatively, the ART state ST9 may be continued until the fall to the first RT mode occurs, and the ART state ST9 may be ended when the fall to the first RT mode occurs. The ART state ST9 may be continued until the fall occurs, and the ART state ST9 may be ended when the fall to the normal mode occurs. In this case, the same effect as the first release effect may be executed, or an effect different from the first release effect may be executed.

  (44) If the number of games executed without the bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) and the ART state ST9 reaching the number of released games, the ART state ST9 may be provided. The pseudo bonus state as in the second embodiment may be provided.

  (45) In the bonus internal state ST2, the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination may be prioritized in the stop control over the symbol corresponding to the combination causing the award of the game medium. In this case, when the winning numbers “1” to “3” are set in the bonus internal state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified, and It may be configured such that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning bonus combination is notified. When the notification is executed in this manner, the bonus winning is performed by performing the stop operation in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the first bell winning at a stop operation timing that does not result in the bonus winning. Instead, it is possible to win the first bell prize.

  (46) The game section is limited to the configuration in which the normal section SC1 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified and the advantageous section SC2 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified are set. Alternatively, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified of the stop order, but a plurality of sections having different types of winning data to be notified of the stop order may be set. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified of the stop order, but a plurality of sections may be set in which the stop order notification frequency is different. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the transition of the game section by giving different degrees of advantage in notifying the stop order in a plurality of sections.

  (47) It may be configured such that a notification for causing the player to recognize which of the game sections is performed is executed in a section other than the advantageous section display unit 67. For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to execute an effect that allows the player to recognize which the game section is. Further, in addition to or instead of these configurations, information indicating which game section is included may be externally output to the hall computer in the game hall.

  (48) When the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games is calculated, the number of games executed in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 may not be added as the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Good.

  (49) The ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the set value is changed, it is necessary to have a configuration in which the calculation is continued without initializing the information on the ratio performed for each set value. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the above ratio for each set value.

  (50) A configuration in which the total number of games played and the number of games played that is the total of games played in the advantageous section SC2 are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of games played to the total number of games is calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the lottery processing of the winning combination, the winning number of the predetermined winning combination and the total number of games of the predetermined winning combination are stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined winning combination is calculated. Good. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as the target predetermined combination, and the number of times of winning is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination, and the first predetermined combination is stored. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the winning number may be individually stored as history information for all of the winning combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the winning combinations. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the winning combination to be managed.

  Further, the total number of granted game media and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of granted game media per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to inform the manager of the game hall of the number of game media provided per unit number of games. In addition, a combination of the total number of granted game media and the total number of games is individually stored as history information for each gaming state and each advantageous section SC2, and the number of granted game media per unit number of games is set as each game. The state and the advantageous section SC2 may be individually calculated.

  Further, the number of transitions to the bonus state and the total number of games played in the gaming state that is not the bonus state may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the bonus state may be calculated.

  (51) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the result of the end lottery process executed in the advantageous section SC2 is The advantageous section SC2 may be ended and the section may be shifted to the normal section SC1 when the result is the end winning result. The trigger for executing this end lottery process is arbitrary, but it may be configured such that the end lottery process is executed in each game, for example, when a predetermined lottery trigger role is won or when a predetermined lottery trigger prize is established. The end lottery process may be executed first. Further, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games, the end lottery process is executed every time the lottery opportunity occurs, and when the result of the end lottery process is the end winning result. The configuration may be such that the advantageous section SC2 ends and shifts to the normal section SC1.

  (52) The advantageous section SC2 is not limited to the configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 is more advantageous than the normal section SC1 by being notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the condition is established, the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1 due to the increased number of game mediums to be provided, and the number of game media required to start one game is reduced. Therefore, the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1.

  (53) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration performed by the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67, and may be performed by using the credit display unit 65, for example. Alternatively, the credit display section 65 and the dual-purpose display section 66 may be used. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results to be notified, the events to be notified of each type may be sequentially switched and displayed. In the case of sequentially switching and displaying in this way, for example, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 65, and the operation result or the content of the operation result for the event to be notified is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. The configuration may be such that corresponding information is displayed. Accordingly, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to make a notification about the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

  (54) The upper limit number of continuous games may be set for the normal section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the normal section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is set. This makes it possible to compensate for the continuation of the normal section SC1 until reaching the upper limit number of games. Further, by setting the upper limit number of games in the normal section SC1 to be the same among the setting values of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from being caused by the setting value with respect to the upper limit number of games. Is possible.

  (55) The number of effective lines is not limited to one main line ML, and the number of effective lines may be two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of active lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, and the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

  (56) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above-described embodiments. For example, if a prize corresponding to the award of a game medium is established, the award is given by the award. Information about the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production MPU 92. In this case, it is possible to inform the information of the number of game media given by winning on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to it is displayed on the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production-side MPU 92. In this case, an effect corresponding to the rotation state of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be performed on the image display device 63 or the like.

  (57) In each of the above-described embodiments, the bonus is provided when the small winning combination is established, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the player is provided with some bonus. If For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and manages the credits of medals owned by the player, the increase of credited medals corresponds to the granting of a privilege.

  (58) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and may be a C type, a combined type of A type and C type, a combined type of B type and C type, and further an RT game, a CT game or an AT. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a type equipped with a game.

  (59) The designs of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, etc., and geometric lines, figures, etc. may be used. Further, it is possible to configure the design by light, color, etc., the design can also be configured by a three-dimensional shape, etc., and a composite of these can also configure the design. That is, it is sufficient that the design has a function as information having distinctiveness.

  (60) In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played by using a game ball as a game medium. It may be applied to a game machine of a type in which a machine is integrated.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-described embodiment>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses, etc.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72),
State transition means for transitioning the gaming state between a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) having different degrees of advantage (correspondence at the time of ending the game in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
First section setting means for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1) (function of executing the processing of steps S1307, S1314 and S1321 in the main MPU 72),
Second section setting means for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2) (function of executing the processing of steps S807 and S2004 in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
In the second section, a specific privilege that does not occur in the first section (transition to ART state ST9) may be granted to the player, or in the second section, a specific privilege may be granted to the player more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
The first section and the second section are both configured to be able to stay in a predetermined gaming state of the plurality of types of gaming states, and are also capable of staying in other gaming states of the plurality of types of gaming states. And
This gaming machine occurs based on a predetermined event (the setting of the first BB winning data, the setting of the second BB winning data, the setting of the second RB winning data) or the occurrence of the predetermined event in which the occurrence probability may change according to the set value. Based on that the predetermined corresponding situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB winning or the second BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB winning) has occurred in the second section, the player is provided with the specific privilege. A gaming machine provided with a specific assigning unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2016 to S2020 in the main MPU 72) to be assigned.

  According to the characteristic A1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, since there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game sections separately from it, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, the second section has a configuration in which the specific privilege is more easily provided than the first section, and both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined game state and another game state, The player plays the game while expecting to be in the second zone in an advantageous gaming state.

  In this case, the specific privilege is given to the player based on the occurrence of the predetermined event in which the occurrence probability may change according to the set value or the predetermined corresponding situation generated based on the occurrence of the predetermined event in the second section. .. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined event or a predetermined corresponding situation will occur in the second section. Further, according to the configuration, the probability of granting the specific privilege is affected by the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event, and therefore the specific privilege does not have to be changed directly according to the set value. It is possible to indirectly change the provision probability of the value according to the set value.

Feature A2. It is provided with a lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for performing a lottery process of winning combinations in the main MPU 72).
The predetermined event is a predetermined lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery processing, characterized in that the game according to feature A1 Machine.

  According to the characteristic A2, the player who expects to be provided with the specific privilege in the second section expects that the predetermined lottery result will be obtained in the lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. In addition, since the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the lottery process varies depending on the set value, it is possible to indirectly vary the probability that the specific privilege is given in the second section according to the set value.

Features A3. Game execution means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for executing a game of one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery processing,
Based on the result of the lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, a means for setting the predetermined correspondence status in a game after the game having the predetermined lottery result (the bonus process in the main MPU 72). Function to execute)
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the specific granting unit grants the specific privilege to the player based on the predetermined corresponding situation in the second section.

  According to the characteristic A3, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the predetermined lottery is performed in the game after the game having the predetermined lottery result. The specific privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the predetermined corresponding situation that occurs as a result of the result in the second section. As a result, not only does the player expecting to be given the specific privilege have a predetermined lottery result, but also a predetermined correspondence situation in a game after the game having the predetermined lottery result. Attention will be paid to whether or not it is the second section. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Features A4. Feature A3 characterized in that the second section setting means does not set the second section even if the predetermined corresponding situation occurs when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first section. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic A4, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is granted based on the predetermined corresponding situation in the second section, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section and the predetermined lottery result is obtained in order to have the predetermined corresponding situation in the second section. It is necessary to be maintained in the second section even in the case where the predetermined correspondence situation is reached in the game. Therefore, the player also pays attention to the continuation situation of the second section, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Features A5. The specific assigning means occurs based on a specific event whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value (setting of third BB winning data, setting of fourth BB winning data, setting of first RB winning data) or occurrence of the specific event. Based on the occurrence of a specific corresponding situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the first RB prize) in the second section, the player is provided with the specific privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4 characterized by being imparted.

  According to the characteristic A5, the specific privilege can be given to the player even when the specific event whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value or the specific corresponding situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event occurs in the second section. .. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from having a significant influence on the probability that the specific privilege will be given in the second section.

Features A6. It is provided with a lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for performing a lottery process of a winning combination in the main MPU 72),
The predetermined event is a predetermined lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery process,
The specific event is a specific lottery result (setting of third BB winning data, setting of fourth BB winning data, setting of first RB winning data) in the lottery process, A-character game Machine.

  According to the characteristic A6, the player who expects to be provided with the specific privilege in the second section expects to have the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result in the lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. In addition, since the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the lottery process varies depending on the set value, it is possible to indirectly vary the probability that the specific privilege is granted in the second section according to the set value. In the lottery process, the probability of being a specific lottery result does not change according to the set value, so that the influence of the set value on the probability that the specific privilege is given in the second section will not be significant. Is possible.

Features A7. Game execution means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for executing a game of one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery processing,
Based on the result of the lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, a means for setting the predetermined correspondence status in a game after the game having the predetermined lottery result (the bonus process in the main MPU 72). Function to execute)
Based on the result of the lottery process being the specific lottery result, a means for setting the specific correspondence status in a game after the game having the specific lottery result (a bonus process in the main MPU 72 Function to execute)
Equipped with
The specific granting unit grants the specific privilege to the player based on the predetermined corresponding situation triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery in the second section, and specifies the specific privilege in the second section. The gaming machine according to characteristic A6, wherein the specific privilege is given to the player based on the specific corresponding situation triggered by the result of the lottery.

  According to the characteristic A7, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the predetermined lottery result or the particular lottery result is given. In the later game, the specific privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the predetermined corresponding situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result or the specific corresponding situation caused by the particular lottery result in the second section. This not only pays attention to the fact that the player who expects to be given the specific privilege becomes the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result, but also the predetermined correspondence situation in the game after the game which has the predetermined lottery result. Alternatively, it is to be noted whether or not it is the second section when the specific correspondence situation is reached. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A8. The second section setting means does not set the predetermined correspondence situation in the first section even if the predetermined correspondence situation occurs, while the second section is set when the specific correspondence situation occurs in the first section. The gaming machine according to feature A7, which is set to.

  According to the characteristic A8, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is provided based on the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section in order to have the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section. It is necessary to be maintained in the second section even in the case where the predetermined correspondence situation is reached in the game. Therefore, the player also pays attention to the continuation situation of the second section, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, even if the specific lottery result is obtained in the first section, it is set in the second section with the result. Therefore, regardless of whether the game section is the first section or the second section, if the specific lottery result is obtained, the situation in which the second section is in the specific correspondence situation is reached, and based on this situation, the specific privilege is given to the player. Granted to. Therefore, the player expects to have a specific lottery result.

  Feature A9. The second section setting means sets the game section to the second section based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger in which the occurrence probability does not change according to the set value, of the characteristics A1 to A8. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the characteristic A9, the transition probability of the second section does not change according to the set value. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value from having a significant influence on the probability that the specific privilege is granted.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the predetermined corresponding situation is a special gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the characteristic A10, the transition probability of the special game state changes according to the set value, and the probability of granting the specific privilege also changes according to the set value in association with the change of the transition probability according to the set value. Becomes As a result, when the transition probability of the special game state, which is advantageous to the player, is a high set value, the probability of giving the specific privilege is also high, and the player's expectation that the high set value is selected is increased. Is possible.

Features A11. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72),
State transition means for transitioning the gaming state between a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) having different degrees of advantage (correspondence at the time of ending the game in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
First section setting means for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1) (function of executing the processing of steps S1307, S1314 and S1321 in the main MPU 72),
Second section setting means for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2) (function of executing the processing of steps S807 and S2004 in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
In the second section, a specific privilege that does not occur in the first section (transition to ART state ST9) may be granted to the player, or in the second section, a specific privilege may be granted to the player more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
The first section and the second section are both configured to be able to stay in a predetermined gaming state of the plurality of types of gaming states, and are also capable of staying in other gaming states of the plurality of types of gaming states. And
This gaming machine occurs based on the occurrence of a specific event (the setting of the third BB winning data, the setting of the fourth BB winning data, the setting of the first RB winning data) whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value or the occurrence of the specific event. The specific privilege is given to the player based on the occurrence of a specific correspondence situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the first RB prize) in the second section. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a specific giving means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2016 to S2020 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the characteristic A11, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, since there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game sections separately from it, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, the second section has a configuration in which the specific privilege is more easily provided than the first section, and both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined game state and another game state, The player plays the game while expecting to be in the second zone in an advantageous gaming state.

  In this case, the specific privilege is given to the player based on the occurrence of the specific event whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value or the specific corresponding situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event in the second section. As a result, the player expects that a specific event or a specific response situation will occur in the second section. Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while suppressing the influence of the set value on the probability of giving the specific privilege.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features A1 to A11. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Section setting means for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1) (function of executing the processing of steps S807 and S2004 in the main MPU 72) ,
Section ending means for ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games (function of executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 72);
A pre-end effect (ending effect) is executed based on that the number of games executed in the second section is the number of games before ending set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. Pre-termination effect executing means (a function of executing the process of step S3505 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S3603 in the effect MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic B1, the second section is ended based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the upper limit number of games, so that the second section, which is advantageous to the player, continues excessively. It is possible to prevent it from happening. In this case, the pre-end production is executed on the basis that the number of games executed in the second section is the number of pre-end games set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. This allows the player to recognize that the second section is approaching the end. Further, it is possible to increase the motivation to continue the second section by making the player want to confirm the pre-end effect, and further, to satisfy the player when the pre-end effect is actually executed. It is possible to give a feeling. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature B2. A feature that the number of games executed in the second section can reach the upper limit number of games based on an increase trigger and the increase in the number of continuous games in the second section The gaming machine described in B1.

  According to the characteristic B2, the pre-end effect is executed as a privilege that the number of games executed in the second section can reach the upper limit number of games. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction when the pre-termination effect is executed.

  Feature B3. In the situation where the pre-termination effect executing means is the number of remaining games in the second section is the number of games that allows the number of games executed in the second section to reach the upper limit number of games, The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the pre-end effect is executed based on the number of games executed in the second section becoming the pre-end game number.

  According to the characteristic B3, since the pre-end effect is executed in a situation where it is determined that the number of games to be executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the pre-end effect is executed regardless of the execution. In addition, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the number of games executed in the second section does not reach the upper limit number of games from occurring.

Feature B4. There are a plurality of types of game states as game states that can be stayed in the second section,
The number of games executed in the second section in the situation where the pre-end effect producing means is in a predetermined game state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) advantageous to the player. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the pre-end effect is executed based on that the number of pre-end games has been reached.

  According to the characteristic B4, since the pre-end effect is executed in the second section, which is a predetermined game state advantageous to the player, the player is satisfied when the pre-end effect is executed. It becomes possible.

Feature B5. State generating means (function for executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) for generating a special game state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) advantageous to the player,
Special effect executing means for executing a special effect (BB effect) in the special game state (function of executing steps S2820 and S3705 in the effect side MPU 92),
When the special game state occurs in the situation where the pre-end effect is being executed, effect continuation means for continuing the pre-end effect without starting the special effect (processing of steps S3709 and S3713 in effect-side MPU 92) Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B5, when the special game state occurs in the situation where the pre-end effect is being executed, the execution of the pre-end effect is secured by giving priority to the continuation of the pre-end effect over the start of the special effect. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature B6. The effect continuation means, when the pre-end effect ends in a situation where the special game state has not ended, means for starting the special effect (a positive determination is made in step S3704 in the effect side MPU 92). A gaming machine according to feature B5, which is provided with a function).

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to secure the opportunity to execute the special effect even in the case where the continuation of the pre-end effect is prioritized.

  Feature B7. The effect continuation means, when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the special game state has not ended, means for continuing the pre-end effect (effect side MPU 92). A function of executing the processing of step S3709 in step S3709) is provided, and the gaming machine according to the characteristic B5 or B6.

  According to the characteristic B7, even if the second section which is advantageous to the player is finished, the pre-finishing effect is continued when the special game state which is advantageous to the player is continued, so that there is an advantageous situation for the player. It is possible to extend the production before the end by using the continuing period. Further, it is possible for the player to recognize the situation where the special game state continues after the end of the second section, as the situation where the second section continues.

Feature B8. When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the progress stop means (in the main MPU 72) that sets the progress stop state in which the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped A function of executing the processing of steps S3806 and S3809),
In the case where the pre-end effect is continued due to the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games in a situation where the special game state has not ended, the progress stop means advances the progress. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, which is characterized in that the gaming machine is not set to a stopped state.

  According to the feature B8, when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the second section ends by being in the progress stop state. Becomes In this case, when the special game state is continued after the end of the second section and the pre-end effect is continued, the progress is not stopped at the end of the second section. Accordingly, when the pre-end effect is continued, the flow of the pre-end effect can be prevented from being hindered by the progress stop state. In addition, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the situation where the special game state continues after the end of the second section as the situation where the second section continues.

Feature B9. The production continuation means is
When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games expected to be completed by the special game state is a relatively long number of games, the end Means for starting the special effect after the end of the previous effect (a function of making an affirmative decision in step S3704 in the effect side MPU 92),
When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games expected to be completed by the special game state is relatively short, the end Means for continuing the pre-production (a function for executing the process of step S3709 in the production-side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B5 to B8, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B9, in accordance with the number of games expected to be completed before the special game state ends, the special effect is started after the pre-end effect is ended and the pre-end effect is continued. Can be generated.

Feature B10. When the special game state is started or ended, the progress stop means for setting the progress stop state in which the progress of the normal game based on the operation of the player is stopped (steps S1914 and S2209 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute processing),
Any of the features B5 to B9 characterized in that the progress stop means does not set the progress stop state when the special game state is started or ended in the situation where the pre-end effect is being executed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the characteristic B10, when the special game state is started or ended, the player is made to clearly recognize that the special game state is started or ended by setting the progress stop state. It becomes possible. In this case, when the special game state is started or ended in the situation where the pre-end effect is being executed, the progress of the pre-end effect is caused by the special game state because the progress stop state is not set. It is possible to prevent it from being obstructed by the stoppage state.

Feature B11. State transition means for transitioning the gaming state between a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) having different degrees of advantage (correspondence at the time of ending the game in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
In the second section, a specific privilege that does not occur in the first section (transition to ART state ST9) may be granted to the player, or in the second section, a specific privilege may be granted to the player more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
The first section and the second section are both configured to be able to stay in a predetermined gaming state of the plurality of types of gaming states, and are also capable of staying in other gaming states of the plurality of types of gaming states. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to diversify the progress content of the game due to the existence of a plurality of types of game states and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately from it. In addition, the second section has a configuration in which the specific privilege is more easily provided than the first section, and both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined game state and another game state, The player plays the game while expecting to be in the second zone in an advantageous gaming state.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the inventions of the characteristic group A and the characteristic group B, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. An acquisition unit (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main MPU 72) that acquires lottery information when an acquisition opportunity occurs;
A lottery information group (lottery table for normal mode, lottery table for first RT mode, lottery table for second RT mode) corresponding to the game situation and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means are used to execute a winning determination. Determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S503 to S513 in the main MPU 72),
When a winning corresponding to the result of the winning determination is established, a winning-corresponding control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72) for executing the winning-correspondence control,
Equipped with
The lottery information group corresponding to one game situation,
A plurality of identification information (index value IV),
The lottery correspondence information (corresponding to the identification information, which enables the winning determination means to specify whether or not the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to the corresponding identification information ( Point value PV),
Has
The winning determination means,
First grasping means for grasping the identification information corresponding to the lottery information in the predetermined lottery information group by using the lottery correspondence information (processing of steps S504, S507, S512 and S602 in the main MPU 72) Function to execute)
Second grasping means for grasping winning information (winning number) which is information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means and is information referred to in the subsequent control (step S604 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute processing),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic C1, after the identification information corresponding to the lottery information is grasped by using the lottery information group, the winning information corresponding to the identification information is grasped, and the grasped winning information is used to determine the winning decision. Control is executed. As a result, in the lottery information group, the identification information can be arranged in an appropriate manner when grasping the identification information, and in the control after the winning determination, it is possible to use the winning information that is easy to use in the control. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform the lottery process.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the winning information is set as serial number information.

  According to the characteristic C2, since the winning information is set as serial number information, it is possible to suitably perform the process for grasping the result of the winning determination in the control after the winning determination.

Feature C3. The predetermined winning information of the winning information corresponds to a plurality of winning target information (winning data),
In a situation where the predetermined winning information is grasped by the second grasping means, any one of the prizes corresponding to each of the plurality of winning object information can be won. Or the gaming machine described in C2.

  According to the characteristic C3, since the winning information different from the winning target information itself is used in the control after the winning determination, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the control.

Feature C4. A setting means (a function for executing a winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage is provided.
The predetermined lottery information group has a first aggregation range in which the identification information whose winning probability varies according to the set value is aggregated (index value IV = 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table, first RT mode). Index value IV = 23-28 for the lottery table for use, and index value IV = 18-23 for the lottery table for the second RT mode, and the identification information whose winning probability does not change according to the set value is collected. Second aggregation range (index values IV = 1 to 16 for the normal mode lottery table, index values IV = 1 to 22 for the first RT mode lottery table, and index values IV for the second RT mode lottery table IV = 1 to 17), and the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3.

  According to the characteristic C4, in the predetermined lottery information group, the identification information is distinguished between the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range depending on whether or not the winning probability changes according to the set value. It becomes easy to check a predetermined lottery information group at the design stage or the use stage of the game machine. Even if the identification information is distinguished between the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range in this way, the winning information corresponding to the identification information is grasped at the time of the winning determination, so that after the winning determination. In the control of, it is possible to use the winning information which is a preferable mode in the control.

Feature C5. As the prize type, there is at least a type in which a game medium is given as the prize corresponding control, and a type in which a game can be re-executed as the prize corresponding control,
The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the identification information that enables a predetermined type of winning is present in both the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range.

  According to the characteristic C5, even if the predetermined lottery information group is configured such that the identification information that enables a predetermined type of winning is set dispersedly in the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range, the winning is achieved. In the information, it is possible to collect information that enables winning of a predetermined type.

Feature C6. An information storage unit (main side ROM 73) is stored in advance which stores a correspondence relationship information group (offset table 111) that defines a correspondence relationship between the identification information and the winning information,
Any of the features C1 to C5 characterized in that the second grasping means grasps the winning information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means by utilizing the correspondence information group. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the characteristic C6, since the correspondence relationship between the identification information and the winning information is set in advance in the correspondence relationship information group, it is possible to reduce the processing load for grasping the winning information from the identification information.

Feature C7. In the first game situation, the first identification information (for example, the index value IV = 17 of the normal mode lottery table) set in the lottery information group (normal mode lottery table) to be used and the second game situation (first RT) It is possible that the second identification information set in the lottery information group to be used in the mode lottery table (for example, the index value IV = 23 in the first RT mode lottery table) has a different identification information content. It is the identification information that the prizes are the same,
The second grasping means is the same regardless of whether the first grasping means grasps the first identification information or the first grasping means grasps the second identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, which is characterized by grasping winning information (eg, a winning number of "5").

  According to the characteristic C7, it is possible to set the identification information in a preferable mode for each of the lottery information group corresponding to the first game situation and the lottery information group corresponding to the second game situation. Further, even if the identification information is set in a preferable manner in each lottery information group in this way, the same winning information is obtained for different identification information although the winnings that can be established in those lottery information groups are the same. Therefore, in the control after the winning determination, it is possible to use the winning information which is a preferable mode in the control.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features C1 to C7. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the characteristic group C, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, it is necessary to suitably perform the lottery in the gaming machine as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for a winning combination in the main MPU 72);
Game execution means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for executing a game of one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery processing,
First section setting means for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1) (function of executing the processing of steps S1307, S1314 and S1321 in the main MPU 72),
Second section setting means for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2) (function of executing the processing of steps S807 and S2004 in the main MPU 72),
Based on the predetermined lottery result (setting of the first BB winning data, setting of the second BB winning data, setting of the second RB winning data) in the lottery process, in a game after the game having the predetermined lottery result Predetermined response means (a function for executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) that establishes a predetermined response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB winning or the second BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB winning) )When,
Specific granting means (main side MPU 72) for granting a specific privilege (transition to ART state ST9) to the player based on the predetermined corresponding situation triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery in the second section. In step S2016 to step S2020), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic D1, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the predetermined lottery is performed in the game after the game having the predetermined lottery result. The specific privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the predetermined corresponding situation that occurs as a result of the result in the second section. As a result, not only does the player expecting to be given the specific privilege have a predetermined lottery result, but also a predetermined correspondence situation in a game after the game having the predetermined lottery result. Attention will be paid to whether or not it is the second section. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D2. Feature D1 wherein the second section setting means does not set the second section even if the predetermined corresponding situation occurs when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first section. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic D2, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is granted based on the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section and the predetermined lottery result is obtained in order to have the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section. It is necessary to be maintained in the second section even in the case where the predetermined correspondence situation is reached in the game. Therefore, the player also pays attention to the continuation situation of the second section, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature D3. Based on the fact that the specific lottery result (the setting of the third BB winning data, the setting of the fourth BB winning data, the setting of the first RB winning data) is made in the lottery process, in the game after the game having the specific lottery result. Specific response means (a function for executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) for achieving a specific response status (BB state ST3 based on establishment of the third BB prize or fourth BB prize, RB state ST4 based on establishment of the first RB prize) ),
The specific granting unit grants the specific privilege based on the specific corresponding situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section,
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the second section setting means sets the second section in the specific corresponding situation triggered by the result of the specific lottery.

  According to the feature D3, in the case where the specific support situation is brought based on the result of the specific lottery, the specific privilege is the second section, and the specific privilege is given based on the specific support situation in the second section. Granted to the player. As a result, the player not only expects the predetermined lottery result but also expects the specific lottery result rather than the predetermined lottery result. Therefore, the target to be expected becomes stepwise, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D4. The specific granting means may grant the specific privilege to the player based on the fact that the first game in the predetermined corresponding situation triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery is started in the second section. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3.

  According to the characteristic D4, the specific privilege is given to the player based on the fact that the first game in the predetermined corresponding situation is started in the second section, so that when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the situation of the second section. The player expects that a predetermined correspondence situation will occur early.

Feature D5. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
Equipped with
The game execution means starts the variable display of the symbols as the start of the one game based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
When the predetermined stop result corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is displayed after the variable display of the pattern when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process, the predetermined stop result is The predetermined correspondence situation is started from the game next to the displayed game,
The predetermined stop result is a stop result that is not displayed depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means,
If the predetermined stop result is not displayed when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process, the fact that the predetermined lottery result is achieved is carried over to the next game of the game. D1 The gaming machine described in any one of D to D4.

  According to the feature D5, even if the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the predetermined correspondence situation is not started unless the stop operation is performed in the operation mode that enables the display of the predetermined stop result. In this case, even if the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the second section is in the predetermined corresponding situation started in the game after the game having the predetermined lottery result. Based on that, a specific privilege is granted. Therefore, a player who can display the predetermined stop result early when the predetermined lottery result is displayed is more likely to have an event of the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, and accordingly the specific privilege is given. It is easily given. On the other hand, if the predetermined lottery result is not displayed and the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the fact that the predetermined lottery result is carried over to the next game of the game is carried out. It is possible to prevent the player, who cannot display the predetermined stop result, from being excessively disadvantaged.

Feature D6. The second section effect control means for executing a second section corresponding effect (advantageous maintenance effect) in the second section (function for executing effect control processing for the advantageous maintenance section in the effect side MPU 92),
The second section effect control means prevents the second section corresponding effect from being executed in the final game when the predetermined lottery result has occurred in the final game of the second section. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

  According to the characteristic D6, even if a trigger for a predetermined lottery result and a predetermined corresponding situation occurs in the final game of the second section, the second section has ended in the predetermined corresponding situation, and thus the specific privilege is not granted. On the other hand, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, the second section corresponding effect is not executed in the final game. As a result, in the situation in which the second section corresponding effect corresponding to the second section is being executed, the predetermined lottery result is generated, and the specific privilege is not given in spite of the occurrence of the opportunity to become the predetermined correspondence situation. The impression will continue to be given to the player.

Feature D7. Based on the fact that the specific lottery result (the setting of the third BB winning data, the setting of the fourth BB winning data, the setting of the first RB winning data) is made in the lottery process, in the game after the game having the specific lottery result. Specific response means (a function for executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) for achieving a specific response status (BB state ST3 based on establishment of the third BB prize or fourth BB prize, RB state ST4 based on establishment of the first RB prize) ),
The specific granting unit grants the specific privilege based on the specific corresponding situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section,
The second section setting means is configured not to set the second section even if the predetermined correspondence situation occurs when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first section. It is configured to be the second section in the specific response situation triggered by becoming
The second section effect control means causes the second section effect to be executed in the final game of the second section even if the specific drawing result is obtained in the lottery process in the final game of the second section. The gaming machine described in Feature D6.

  According to the characteristic D7, when the specific support situation is brought about due to the result of the specific lottery, the specific privilege is the second section, and the specific privilege is given based on the specific support situation in the second section. Granted to the player. As a result, the player not only expects the predetermined lottery result but also expects the specific lottery result rather than the predetermined lottery result. Therefore, the target to be expected becomes stepwise, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, even if the specific lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, the second section corresponding effect is executed in the final game. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the specific privilege is given in the situation where the second section corresponding effect is being executed and the specific privilege is given, and the player's attention to the second section corresponding effect. It is possible to increase the degree.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the predetermined corresponding situation is a special gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the characteristic D8, the specific privilege is given based on the special game state in the second section, so that the specific privilege can be further given when the special game state advantageous to the player occurs. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of being in the special game state in the second section.

Feature D9. State transition means for transitioning the gaming state between a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) having different degrees of advantage (correspondence at the time of ending the game in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
In the second section, a specific privilege that does not occur in the first section (transition to ART state ST9) may be granted to the player, or in the second section, a specific privilege may be granted to the player more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
The first section and the second section are both configured to be able to stay in a predetermined gaming state of the plurality of types of gaming states, and are also capable of staying in other gaming states of the plurality of types of gaming states. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8.

  According to the feature D9, it is possible to diversify the progress content of the game due to the existence of a plurality of types of game states and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately from it. In addition, the second section has a configuration in which the specific privilege is more easily provided than the first section, and both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined game state and another game state, The player plays the game while expecting to be in the second zone in an advantageous gaming state.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features D1 to D9. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Section setting means for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1) (function of executing the processing of steps S807 and S2004 in the main MPU 72) ,
The first state setting means (the step S1514 in the main MPU 72) for setting the first expected state (actual warning state ST6) to which a privilege (transition to the ART state ST9) is given after the end of a plurality of games is given. Function to execute)
A second state setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1524 in the main MPU 72) for setting the second expected state (false premonition state ST5) which is continued for a plurality of games and is not provided with the privilege after the end;
Expected production control means (in the production side MPU 92) for performing an expected production that enables the player to expect that the privilege is awarded in each of the games in the first expected state and the second expected state. A function of executing the processes of steps S1704, S1705, S1710 and S1723),
Equipped with
The section setting means is provided with means for setting the second section in the second expected state (function of executing the processing of steps S802 and S807 in the main MPU 72). ..

  According to the characteristic E1, the second section is more advantageous than the first section, so that the player plays the game while expecting the game section to be the second section. In addition, the player who confirms the expected effect by executing the expected effect that enables the player to expect the generation of the privilege in each game by entering the first expected state or the second expected state It is expected that the award will be given, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since there is not only the first expected state in which the privilege is given after the end but also the second expected state in which the privilege is not given after the end, even if the privilege is not actually given, it is expected over a plurality of games. Since the production is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, the game section is set to the second section in the second expected state. As a result, even in the second expected state in which no privilege is given after the end, the game section becomes a second section that is more advantageous to the player than the first section. Therefore, it is possible to make the gaming state substantially advantageous to the player even in the second expected state in which no privilege is given after the end, so that not only the first expected state but also the second expected state of the player It is possible to raise the degree of attention.

  Feature E2. Characteristic E1 characterized in that the section setting means is provided with means (function to execute the processing of steps S802 and S807 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the second section in the first expected state. Gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature E2, the second section is set in either of the first expected state and the second expected state, so that when the situation is such that expected production is performed over a plurality of games, the first section is set. This is the more advantageous second section. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to be in a situation where the expected effect is performed over a plurality of games.

Feature E3. The first state setting means starts the first expected state based on the occurrence of a first predetermined trigger in the gaming state other than the first expected state. First starting means (step S1514 in the main MPU 72, step) Function for executing the processing of S1516 and step S1517),
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the first starting means starts the first expected state based on the occurrence of the first predetermined trigger in the second expected state.

  According to the characteristic E3, the first expected state is started on the basis of the occurrence of the first predetermined trigger in the second expected state, so that the player is notified that the first predetermined trigger is generated in the second expected state. You will expect it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second expected state.

  Feature E4. Means for granting the privilege or another privilege to the player based on the occurrence of the advantage grant opportunity in the second section, and not granting the benefit even if the advantage grant opportunity occurs in the first section (main) The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S809 to S819 in the side MPU 72.

  According to the characteristic E4, the bonus or another benefit is given to the player based on the occurrence of the advantage giving opportunity in the second section, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second section. .. In this case, since the second section is set in the second expected state with the configuration of the above characteristic E1, it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the second expected state, and in the second expected state. Makes it possible to expect the player to generate an advantageous grant opportunity.

Feature E5. Advantageous transition in which the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous game state (preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) which is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of the advantageous grant trigger in the second zone and the second zone is maintained Means (function of executing the processing of steps S1501 to S1522 in the main MPU 72),
Section ending means for ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games (function of executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
When the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in the second expected state, the section ending means calculates the sum of the number of games executed in the second expected state and the number of games executed in the advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the second section is ended when the upper limit number of games is reached.

  According to the characteristic E5, the second section is ended based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous second section is not excessively continued. It becomes possible to do. In this case, when the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in the second expected state, the sum of the number of games executed in the second expected state and the number of games executed in the advantageous game state becomes the upper limit number of games. In this case, the second section is ended. As a result, the merit of the second section can be obtained in the second expected state, but the demerit of continuing the second expected state with respect to the upper limit number of games of the second section is caused. Is possible.

  Feature E6. When the advantageous event has occurred a predetermined number of times before the second expected state ends, the second section is ended when the second expected state ends, and the advantageous is achieved even if the second expected state ends. Any one of features E1 to E5 characterized by including means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1312 to S1315 in the main MPU 72) for continuing the second section until an event occurs the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature E6, when the advantageous event has occurred a predetermined number of times before the second expected state ends, the second section is ended when the second expected state ends, while the second expected state ends. If the advantageous event does not occur the predetermined number of times even after the above, the second section is continued. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the advantageous event occurs a predetermined number of times in the case of the second section, so that it is possible to ensure the degree of advantage of the second section, and also depending on the occurrence mode of the advantageous event. Thus, the end timing of the second section with respect to the end timing of the second expected state can be diversified.

Feature E7. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A lottery means for executing the lottery processing based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S408 in the main MPU 72);
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning result that is won in the lottery process is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning result is executed as the winning of the winning result is established. Means (function of executing the process of step S309 in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
The handling execution means gives a handling result when the winning result (winning number = 1 to 3) is obtained in the lottery process, and after the variation display of the pattern is displayed, the result of stopping the handling corresponding to the winning result is displayed. A predetermined number of game media are given to the player as a winning combination,
The stop result corresponding to the addition is a result displayed when the stop operation means is operated in a corresponding mode in the case where the result of the end result of the lottery process is the selection winning result,
In the present gaming machine, when the lottery process results in the award winning result in the second section, means for notifying the award corresponding mode (a function of executing a notifying control process at the main MPU 72, a notice at the production MPU 92) A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, which is provided with a function of executing a processing for use.

  According to the characteristic E7, in the second section, the game corresponding to the establishment of the prize corresponding to the award is awarded by notifying the award corresponding mode when the award winning result is obtained. This makes it possible to make the second section an advantageous section.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features E1 to E7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Section setting means for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1) (function of executing the processing of steps S807 and S2004 in the main MPU 72) ,
Advantageous setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1508, S1521, and S2308 in the main MPU 72) that causes the player to stay in an advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) in the second section,
Section ending means for ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games (function of executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The advantageous setting means ends the advantageous gaming state when the second section ends due to the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games,
The section setting means, based on that the advantageous game state has ended before the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section continuation continues thereafter. A gaming machine provided with a section continuation unit (a function of executing the process of step S2708 in the main MPU 72) for keeping the situation (advantageous maintenance section).

  According to the characteristic F1, the second section is ended based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the upper limit number of games, so that the second section that is advantageous to the player continues excessively. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, when the second section ends based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous game state also ends, so the advantageous game state is set in the second section. It becomes possible to make the game state in which the player can stay.

  In this case, if the advantageous game state ends before the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, a second section continuation situation in which the second section continues after that may be possible. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to be in the second section continuation state even after the advantageous game state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the section continuation unit ends the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation situation reaches the number of continuation end games.

  According to the feature F2, it becomes possible for the player to have a clear trigger for ending the second section continuation situation.

  Feature F3. The section continuation unit is based on that the advantageous game state has ended in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section is equal to or less than the number of continuable games set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the second section continuation state is set.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to prevent the second section continuation situation from occurring even though the number of games executed in the second section is close to the upper limit number of games.

Feature F4. The section continuation means ends the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation situation reaches the number of continuation end games,
The game machine according to feature F3, wherein a difference in the number of continuable games with respect to the upper limit number of games is equal to or more than the number of continued ending games.

  According to the feature F4, it is possible for the player to have a clear timing for ending the second section continuation situation, and the number of games executed in the second section in the middle of the second section continuation situation is the upper limit game. It is possible to avoid reaching the number.

  Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the advantageous setting means shifts to the advantageous game state based on occurrence of an advantageous shift trigger in the second section continuation situation.

  According to the feature F5, the advantageous transition trigger is generated in the second section continuation situation, so that the state shifts to the advantageous gaming state again, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second section continuation situation. Becomes

  Feature F6. When the advantageous game state ends and the second segment continuation situation is reached, the section ending means re-enters the second segment continuation situation when a transition to the advantageous game state occurs again. If the sum of the number of games executed in the second section until the transition occurs and the number of games executed in the advantageous game state due to the transition again reaches the upper limit game number, the second The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that the section is ended.

  According to the feature F6, the second section is prevented from being excessively continued even if it is configured to re-enter the advantageous game state based on the occurrence of the advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation situation. Is possible.

  Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F5 or F6, characterized in that the occurrence of the advantageous transition trigger is a transition to a special gaming state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) advantageous to the player.

  According to the characteristic F7, when the transition to the special game state advantageous to the player occurs in the second section continuation situation, the transition to the advantageous game state again occurs. This makes it possible to expect the player to have a special game state in the second section continuation situation.

Feature F8. A lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for a winning combination in the main MPU 72);
Based on the predetermined lottery result (setting of the first BB winning data, setting of the second BB winning data, setting of the second RB winning data) in the lottery process, in a game after the game having the predetermined lottery result Predetermined response means (a function for executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) that establishes a predetermined response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB winning or the second BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB winning) )When,
Equipped with
The advantage setting means shifts to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding situation is reached in the situation where the second zone is continued due to the second zone continuation situation. The gaming machine according to any one of F7.

  According to the characteristic F8, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result in the second section continuation situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur again, and the game becomes the predetermined lottery result. The transition to the advantageous game state occurs again based on the occurrence of the predetermined corresponding situation in the later game triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section due to the second section continuation situation. This not only pays attention to the fact that a player who expects a transition to the advantageous game state again will have a predetermined lottery result, but also has a predetermined correspondence situation in a game after the game that has the predetermined lottery result. In this case, attention will be paid to whether or not it is the second section according to the second section continuation situation. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F9. The advantageous setting means shifts to the advantageous game state based on the start of the first game in the predetermined corresponding situation in the situation where the second section is continued due to the second section continuation situation. The gaming machine described in F8.

  According to the characteristic F9, since the first game in the predetermined corresponding situation is started in the second section due to the second section continuation situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs again, so the predetermined game is performed in the second section continuation situation. When the lottery result is obtained, the player expects that a predetermined corresponding situation will occur early.

Feature F10. A second section effect control means for executing a second section corresponding effect (advantageous maintenance effect) in the second section continuation situation (function for executing effect control processing for the advantageous maintenance section in the effect side MPU 92);
The second section effect control means prevents the second section corresponding effect from being executed in the final game when the predetermined lottery result has occurred in the final game in the second section continuation situation. The gaming machine according to F8 or F9.

  According to the characteristic F10, even if the trigger for the predetermined lottery result and the predetermined corresponding situation occurs in the final game of the second section continuation situation, the second section is ended in the predetermined correspondence situation, and therefore the advantageous game state is re-established. Does not occur. On the other hand, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game in the second section continuation situation, the second section corresponding effect is not executed in the final game. As a result, the predetermined lottery result is generated in the situation where the second section corresponding effect corresponding to the second section continuation situation is being executed, and the opportunity to become the predetermined corresponding situation is generated, but the advantage game state is re-established. The player will continue to get the impression that the transition has not occurred.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features F1 to F10. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. Expecting grant setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the main MPU 72) for setting an expected grant state (chance state ST7) that continues over a plurality of games,
When a trigger for granting occurs in the granting expected state, granting lottery means for executing granting lottery processing to determine whether or not to grant a privilege (transition to ART state ST9) (a chance state process in the main MPU 72 is performed. Function to execute)
A correspondence providing unit (a function of executing the process of step S1508 in the main MPU 72) for providing the privilege based on the fact that the addition corresponding lottery process has resulted in the addition corresponding win;
An expected addition effect control unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1714 and step S1722 in the effect side MPU 92 in the first embodiment) that causes an expected addition effect (chance effect) to be performed in each game in the expected addition state. ,
Equipped with
When the specified expected effect is controlled by the granted expected setting means in the situation where the specific effect (false aura effect) is being executed, the granted expected effect control means executes the specified expected effect by executing the specified expected effect. Equipped with a production priority means (function of making a positive determination in step S1713 in the production side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, and making negative determination in step S5005 in the production side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature G1, the grant corresponding opportunity is generated in the grant expected state, the grant corresponding lottery process is executed, and the privilege is granted based on the grant corresponding lottery process being the grant corresponding win. As a result, the player expects to be set to the grant expected state, and also expects to generate a grant handling opportunity in the grant expected state. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by performing the expected addition effect in each game in the expected addition state, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation for the expected addition state.

  In this case, when the specific expected effect is set in the situation where the specific effect is being executed, the execution of the specific effect being executed is prioritized over the execution of the expected expected effect. As a result, when the expected addition effect is started when the expected addition state is set, if the player feels uncomfortable due to the relationship with the contents of the specific effect until then, the specific effect is left as it is. It is possible to continue. In addition, even when the specific effect is continued without executing the imparted expected effect in this way, the game state is in the imparted expected state, so the benefit of being set in the imparted expected state is lost. It is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while preventing the occurrence of the mistake.

Features G2. A predetermined expectation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1524 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined expectation state (false premonition state ST5) that continues over a plurality of games;
Specific effect control means (step S1704 in effect-side MPU 92) that causes the player to expect the special effect to be given in each game in the predetermined expected state. , A function of executing the processing of steps S1705, S1710 and S1723),
The gaming machine described in the feature G1.

  According to the feature G2, the specific effect that makes it possible to expect the player to generate a privilege in each game by being in the predetermined expected state is executed, so that the player who confirms the specific effect receives the privilege. It is expected to be granted, and the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, when the specific expected effect is set in a situation where the specific effect is being executed and the specific effect is provided, the execution of the specific effect that is being executed is prioritized over the execution of the expected expected effect. As a result, when the expected addition effect is started when the expected addition state is set, if the player feels uncomfortable due to the relationship with the contents of the specific effect until then, the specific effect is left as it is. It is possible to continue.

Features G3. As the predetermined expected state, a first predetermined expected state (present omen state ST6) in which the privilege or another privilege is given after the game is continued over a plurality of games, and the privilege after the game is continued over a plurality of games or There is a second predetermined expected state (false aura state ST5) in which another privilege is not given,
The effect prioritizing means, when set to the imparting expected state by the imparting expectation setting means in a situation in which the specific effect corresponding to the second predetermined expected state is being executed, executes the particular producing effect by the imparting expectation. The gaming machine described in the feature G2, which is characterized by giving priority over execution of the effect.

  According to the feature G3, even if the specific effect corresponding to the second predetermined expected state in which the privilege is not given after the end is being executed, the execution of the specific effect that is being executed with respect to the setting of the expected state of grant Has priority over execution of the expected addition effect. As a result, even with the specific effect corresponding to the second predetermined expected state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution content of the effect.

  Features G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the benefit given by the correspondence giving means and the benefit given after the end of the first predetermined expected state are the same.

  If the configuration is such that the execution of the specific effect is continued even if the expected state of grant occurs in the middle of the second predetermined expected state, it is possible to win the grant of correspondence in the grant corresponding lottery process while the specific effect is being executed. Is assumed. On the other hand, according to the feature G4, since the privilege granted in that case is the same as the privilege granted after the end of the first predetermined expected state, the specific effect being executed corresponds to the first predetermined expected state. It is possible to make the player think that it is a specific effect.

  Features G5. Means for executing an effect corresponding to the addition-corresponding winning in the allocation-corresponding lottery process in a situation where the execution of the specific effect is prioritized by the effect-priority means (effect) The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S1814 in the side MPU 92.

  According to the feature G5, in a situation where the execution of the specific effect is prioritized, when the addition corresponding lottery process results in the addition corresponding winning, the corresponding effect is executed, so that the execution of the specific effect is prioritized. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the privilege is granted even in the situation where the player is present.

Features G6. The specific effects include a first specific effect (a false aura effect that is not a cancellation target in the sixth embodiment) and a second specific effect (a false aura effect that is a cancellation target in the sixth embodiment).
The effect priority means performs the execution of the first specific effect more than the execution of the expected expected effect when the expected expected setting means sets the expected expected state in the situation where the first expected effect is being executed. To prioritize,
In the situation where the second specific effect is being executed, the expected addition effect control unit ends the second specific effect and sets the expected addition effect when the expected addition state is set to the expected addition state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, which is provided with a means for starting (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S5005 in the effect-side MPU 92).

  According to the characteristic G6, there are cases where the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized and cases where a new start of the expected addition effect is prioritized depending on the type of the specific effect. This makes it possible to execute the effect in a preferable manner in each situation.

  Features G7. When the specific production is finished in a situation where the execution of the specific production is prioritized over the execution of the expected expected production in the situation of the expected state of application, the expected expected production is the expected production of additional production. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G6, which is provided with after-starting means (a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the production side MPU 92).

  According to the feature G7, since the expected addition effect is started after the specific effect is finished, it is possible to give the opportunity to execute the expected addition effect.

Features G8. When the number of games executed in the grant expected state without becoming the grant corresponding winning in the grant corresponding lottery process becomes the end reference game number, means for ending the grant expected state (step in main MPU 72) S1510 to the function of executing the processing of step S1512),
The post-termination starting means, when the specific effect is finished in a situation where the execution of the specific effect is prioritized over the execution of the expected expected effect in the situation of the expected addition state, the expected expected effect is The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the game can be continued until the game of the end reference number of games is executed.

  According to the feature G8, even if the expected addition effect is started after the end of the specific effect, the expected expected effect can be continued until the end reference number of games are executed, so the specific effect is executed. It is possible to execute the expected addition effect in the same manner as in the case where the expected application state is achieved in the situation where the application is not performed.

  Features G9. Even if the specific production is finished in a situation in which the execution of the specific production is prioritized over the execution of the expected expected production in the situation of the expected state of application The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G6, characterized in that the game machine is not started.

  According to the feature G9, it is possible to prevent the expected addition effect from being executed subsequent to the specific effect.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features G1 to G9, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. Special setting means for setting a special gaming state (pseudo bonus state) (function for executing pseudo bonus start processing in the main MPU 72),
At the start of the special game state and / or during the execution of the special game state, the total number of games (the value of the continuing game number counter 131) given to the player is the given reference number of games (of the transition condition game number counter 132). Value) and the number of games exceeds the reference number of grants, and a privilege granting means (mainly for transferring to ART state ST9) is granted to the player based on the satisfaction of a certain number of games condition. Function of executing the process of step S4505 in the side MPU 72),
A standard lottery means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4304 and S4305 in the main MPU 72) for deciding the number of games to be provided by lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic H1, if the total number of games given to the player in the special game state exceeds the given reference number of games or becomes equal to or more than the given reference number of games, the number of games is satisfied In the configuration in which the privilege is awarded, the number of games to be awarded is determined by lottery. As a result, when the special game state is entered, the player expects that a small number of given reference games will be selected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Features H2. It is provided with a game number giving means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4403 to S4413 in the main MPU 72) for giving the number of games to the player when the special giving condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game state. The gaming machine described in the feature H1.

  According to the characteristic H2, even if the number-of-games condition is not satisfied at the stage when the number-of-assignment-reference game is determined by lottery, the number of games is given to the player even during the execution of the special game state. Therefore, the number of games condition can be satisfied. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the degree of attention to the game in the special game state.

  Features H3. When the number-of-games condition is not satisfied after being given by the number-of-games giving means, means for allowing the number of games given to the player to be exhausted in the special game state (processing of step S4407 in the main MPU 72) The game machine according to feature H2, which is provided with a function for executing.

  According to the characteristic H3, it is possible to increase the number of continuous games in the special gaming state with the satisfaction of the special grant condition in a situation where the game number condition is not satisfied.

  Features H4. When the number-of-games condition is satisfied after being given by the number-of-games giving means, the number of games given this time by the number-of-games giving means is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends. The gaming machine described in the characteristic H2 or H3, which is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S4409 in the main MPU 72) to be digested in the (ART state ST9).

  According to the characteristic H4, when the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the number of games that triggers the satisfaction of the number-of-games condition is also consumed in the advantageous game state after the special game state is ended, so that the advantageous game state is continued. The number of games tends to increase.

  Features H5. The game number giving means gives a game number determination mode when the game number is given to the player after the game number condition is satisfied, and gives the game number to the player before the game number condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H4, which is different from the determination mode of the number of games in the case.

  According to the characteristic H5, the determination mode of the number of games when the number of games is given to the fact that the special grant condition is satisfied changes depending on whether or not the number of games condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to diversify the mode in relation to whether or not the game number condition is satisfied.

Features H6. The privilege granting means is configured to shift to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends as the grant of the privilege.
The game number giving means,
When the game number is given to the player before the game number condition is satisfied, a means for deciding the game number to be given according to the determination mode corresponding to the special game state (processing of steps S4403 to S4405 in the main MPU 72) Function to execute)
When the game number is given to the player after the game number condition is satisfied, means for deciding the game number to be given according to the determination mode corresponding to the advantageous game state (the processing of steps S4410 to S4412 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided.

  According to the feature H6, it is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a determination mode suitable for the special game state before the game number condition is satisfied, and after the game number condition is satisfied, an advantageous game state is set. It is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in an appropriate determination mode.

  Features H7. The privilege granting means shifts to an advantageous game state (ART state ST9) advantageous to the player after the special game state ends as the grant of the privilege, according to any one of features H1 to H6. Amusement machine.

  According to Feature H7, when the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the special game state ends and then the advantageous game state is entered, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention as to whether or not the number-of-games condition is satisfied. Become.

  Features H8. When the special game state is started, a means for determining the number of initial continued games in the special game state by a lottery (function of executing the processing of steps S4301 to S4303 in the main MPU 72) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7.

  According to Feature H8, not only the number of reference games to be given but also the number of initial continuing games in the special game state are determined by lottery, so that it is possible to diversify the patterns of the number of games when the game number condition is satisfied. Become.

  Features H9. Even if the number-of-games condition is satisfied by the initial number-of-games set when the special game state is started, the means for ensuring that the number of initial-game continuations is exhausted in the special game state (main MPU 72) Gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S4303 in step S4303.

  According to the feature H9, even if the number-of-games condition is satisfied at the stage when the number-of-initial-games is determined, the number of initial-continuous-games is exhausted in the special game state, so the number-of-games condition is satisfied at the start of the special game state. Even when the game is played, it is possible to allow the game to be digested to some extent in the special game state.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features H1 to H9, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. Special setting means for setting a special gaming state (pseudo bonus state) (function for executing pseudo bonus start processing in the main MPU 72),
A game number giving means for giving a game number to the player when the special giving condition is satisfied in the special game state (a function of executing steps S4403 to S4413 in the main MPU 72);
When the special game state ends in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, an advantageous transition means (in the main MPU 72) for shifting to the advantageous game state (ART state ST9) advantageous to the player after the special game state ends. A function of executing the processing of step S4505),
Equipped with
The game number giving means,
When the special grant condition is met in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not met, means for increasing the number of remaining games in the special game state (function of executing the process of step S4407 in the main MPU 72),
When the special grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, a unit for increasing the number of remaining games in the advantageous game state (a function of executing the process of step S4409 in the main MPU 72),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic I1, when the special game state ends in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is established, the state transitions to the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, so that the advantageous transition condition is established in the special game state. The player expects that, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this configuration, when the special grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not satisfied, the number of remaining games in the special game state increases. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of establishing the advantageous transition condition in the special game state. On the other hand, if the special grant condition is satisfied while the advantageous transition condition is already satisfied, the number of remaining games in the advantageous game state is increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the number of remaining games in the special game state increases and the game in the special game state is delayed even though the advantageous transition condition has already been established. At the same time, it is possible to give an opportunity to increase the number of remaining games in the advantageous game state.

  Feature I2. The number-of-games imparting means assigns the number of games to be given to the player after the advantageous transition condition is established, and the number of games is provided to the player before the advantageous transition condition is established. The gaming machine according to feature I1, which is different from the determination mode of the number of games in that case.

  According to the characteristic I2, the determination mode of the number of games in the case where the number of games is added to the fact that the special grant condition is satisfied changes depending on whether or not the advantageous transition condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to diversify the mode while relating it to whether or not the advantageous transition condition is established.

Feature I3. The game number giving means,
When the game number is given to the player before the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, a means for deciding the game number to be given according to the determination mode corresponding to the special game state (processing of steps S4403 to S4405 in the main MPU 72) Function to execute)
When the game number is given to the player after the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, a means for deciding the game number to be given according to the determination mode corresponding to the advantageous game state (the processing of steps S4410 to S4412 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic I3, it is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a determination mode suitable for the special game state before the advantageous transition condition is established, and after the advantageous transition condition is established, the advantageous game state is set. It is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in an appropriate determination mode.

  Feature I4. Features I1 to I1 characterized in that the game number granting mode after the advantageous transition condition is satisfied is more advantageous to the player than the game number granting mode before the advantageous transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

  According to the characteristic I4, it is advantageous for the player that the advantageous transition condition is established earlier in the special game state, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention as to whether or not the advantageous transition condition is established. ..

  Feature I5. The advantageous transition condition is satisfied when the number of games given to the player in the special game state exceeds the given reference number of games (the value of the transition condition game number counter 132) or becomes equal to or more than the given reference number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games given to the player in the special game state.

  Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the special game state and the advantageous game state have the same or substantially the same expected number of game media provided per unit number of games.

  According to the characteristic I6, the expected number of game media per unit number of games is the same or substantially the same in the special game state and the advantageous game state, so that the number of games given to the player is the special game state and the advantage. It is possible to prevent the advantage from being different regardless of whether the game is played.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features I1 to I6, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9),
In the predetermined game state, the predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for ending the predetermined game state when the remaining number of games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becomes 0 game. Function for executing the processing of S2703),
Of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state, the number-of-games notification unit (production) for notifying the number of games to be notified (the value of the display counter 126) to be notified to the player. Function of executing the processing of step S2806 and step S2810 in the side MPU 92),
A special correspondence effect (special addition effect) corresponding to the number of non-notification target games (the value of the stock game number counter 127), which is the difference between the number of notification target games and the number of remaining games in the predetermined gaming state, is executed. And a special correspondence executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S3018, step S3216 and step S3220 in the MPU 92 on the production side),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature J1, the number of notification target games to be notified among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state is notified to the player by the game number notification, but the number of non-notification target games that is not the number of notification target games is The player is not notified. Then, the special correspondence effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features J2. A game number increasing means (a function for executing the addition process in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of remaining games in the predetermined game state when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state,
When the number of remaining games in the predetermined game state is increased by the number-of-games increasing means, a means for adding at least a part of the number of games to be increased to the number of non-notification target games (step S3010 in the production side MPU 92). Function that executes the processing of
A gaming machine according to feature J1, comprising:

  According to the feature J2, since the non-notification target game number is added during the predetermined game state, it is possible to execute the special correspondence effect as a result of the addition.

Features J3. A notification addition unit (a function of executing the process of step S3204 in the production-side MPU 92) for adding the number of transfer target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-report target games, to the number of notification target games,
In the feature J1 or J2, the special correspondence performing means is configured to execute, as the special correspondence effect, an effect corresponding to the addition of the shift target game number to the notification target game number. The game machine described.

  According to the feature J3, at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is added to the number of notification target games, and an effect corresponding thereto is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the execution timing of the effect in which the number of games is added to the number of notification target games.

  Features J4. Even if the notification addition means is in a situation where the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference in the number of notification target games from the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state, is the same number of games, the non-notification target game The gaming machine according to feature J3, characterized in that the number of games to be transferred is selected from a plurality of types of games that do not exceed the number.

  According to the feature J4, it is possible to diversify the generation mode of the number of games to be transferred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Features J5. The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, wherein the special correspondence executing means can execute different kinds of special correspondence effects even in a situation where the number of games to be transferred is the same.

  According to the feature J5, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special correspondence effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features J6. The notification adding means sets the transfer target game number once in the game number selection process within a range not exceeding a non-notification target game number which is a difference of the notification target game number with respect to the remaining continuous game number in the predetermined game state. A plurality of selection means for selecting a plurality of processing times (function to execute the processing of step S3102 and step S3103 in the production side MPU 92),
The special handling execution means is means for causing the addition of the plurality of transition target games selected by the plurality of selecting means to the notification target game count to be performed in the special correspondence effect executed at different timings ( A function of executing the processing of step S3021 and step S3216 in the rendering side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J3 to J5, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J6, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special handling effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Features J7. The special correspondence execution means is provided with the number of games in each of a plurality of games as the one special correspondence effect, and the total of the number of games given is a trigger for executing the addition correspondence effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, which is characterized by executing a number of effects.

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to cause a situation in which the number of notification target games increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features J8. A game number increasing means (a function for executing the addition process in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of remaining games in the predetermined game state when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state,
When the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the situation where the special correspondence effect is being executed, the number of games added to the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state due to the satisfaction of the predetermined grant condition is the number of notification target games. Means for additionally performing an effect corresponding to the addition to the special corresponding effect (function of executing the process of step S2908 in the effect side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J3 to J7, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J8, even when the special correspondence effect is being executed, the number of notification target games is increased by a different effect from the increase of the notification target game number by the special correspondence effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player a surprise regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features J1 to J8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the inventions of the characteristic group D, the characteristic group E, the characteristic group F, the characteristic group G, the characteristic group H, the characteristic group I and the characteristic group J, the following problems can be solved. is there.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. First control means (main side MPU 72) for managing the progress of the game,
Second control means (production side MPU 92) for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9),
In the predetermined game state, the predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for ending the predetermined game state when the remaining number of games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becomes 0 game. Function for executing the processing of S2703),
A game number increasing means for increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state (function of executing the processes of step S2410, step S2501 and step S2601 in the main MPU 72) When,
A first transmission means (a function for executing the process of step S2309 in the main MPU 72) for transmitting first transmission information (ART start command) corresponding to the start of the predetermined game state;
When the number of remaining games is increased by the game number increasing means, the second transmission information (direct addition command, A loop addition command, B loop addition command) corresponding to the increased number of games is transmitted. Second transmission means (a function of the main MPU 72 to execute the processing of steps S2411, S2502, and S2603);
Equipped with
The second control means is
A predetermined effect starting means (a function of executing the process of step S2811 in the effect side MPU 92) for starting an effect corresponding to the predetermined game state based on the reception of the first transmission information;
Reception-corresponding means (reproduction-side MPU 92) for executing reception-corresponding processing for subsequently executing an effect corresponding to an increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state based on the reception of the second transmission information. In step S2907, step S2908, step S3010, and step S3302)).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic K1, the processing for increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state is executed in the first control means, and the effect corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games is executed in the second control means. The process is executed. As a result, while the first control means collectively controls the progress of the predetermined game state, the processing load of the first control means increases even if the production corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games is complicatedly performed. It is possible to prevent it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform the control regarding the predetermined game state.

Features K2. The first control means sets an increase state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined rush opportunity in the predetermined game state, and an increase state setting means (continue the increase state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied ( A function of executing the processing of step S2426 and step S2604 to step S2615 in the main MPU 72),
The game number increasing means is configured to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state by a predetermined increase game number each time the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the increase state,
The second control means notifies the player of notification target information corresponding to the increase in the predetermined increase game number that has occurred in the increase state for a plurality of times (the processing of step S3304 in the production side MPU 92 is executed. (A function) The gaming machine described in the feature K1.

  According to the characteristic K2, the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state is increased by the predetermined increase game number each time the predetermined grant condition is satisfied due to the increase state, so that the player expects to be in the increase state. It will be. Further, since the notification target information corresponding to the increase in the predetermined increased number of games that has occurred in the increased state is notified to the player, it is possible to notify at once that a large number of games have been given. Become.

  Features K3. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the total notifying unit notifies the player of notification target information corresponding to the number of games given in the increase state based on the end of the increase state.

  According to the characteristic K3, when the increase state occurs, the notification target information corresponding to the number of games given in the increase state is notified to the player based on the end of the increase state, so that many It is possible to notify once that the number of games has been given.

Features K4. The total notifying means notifies the player of the notification target information in a situation where it is possible to perform notification of a specific reference game number or more as the number of games given in the increasing state,
The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the specific reference number of games is a number of games that is a plurality of times greater than or equal to the predetermined increased number of games.

  According to the characteristic K4, when the notification target information is notified to the player, it is notified at once that the number of games more than the predetermined increased number of games has been given. It is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Features K5. The first control means is
In the increasing state, when the increasing state ends after the increase of the predetermined increasing number of games has reached a specific reference number of times or more, a means for setting a standby state for waiting the progress of the game based on the operation of the player (in the main MPU 72) A function of executing the process of step S2613),
Third transmitting means for transmitting third transmission information corresponding to the setting of the standby state (function of executing the process of step S2614 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to Feature K4, wherein the total notifying unit notifies the player of the notification target information based on the reception of the third transmission information.

  According to the characteristic K5, since the notification target information is notified to the player while the progress of the game based on the operation of the player is on standby, the attention degree of the player with respect to the notification target information being notified. It is possible to raise it.

  Features K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of times is a value larger than a quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increase number of games.

  According to the characteristic K6, when the notification target information is notified, it is possible to notify the player that the specific reference game number or more is provided, and therefore, with respect to the notification target information being notified. It is possible to give the player unexpectedness. Further, since the value of the specific reference number of times is set as a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increase number of games, the number of games given in the increased state is consumed during execution of the increased state. Even if it is done, it is possible to make the number of games not notified to the player at the timing of ending the increase state to be the specific reference number of games or more.

Features K7. The reception response means,
Notification means for adding to the number of games to be notified so that the player can recognize the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information (function to execute the processing of steps S2903 and S2905 in the production side MPU 92);
Non-notification means for adding the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information to the number of non-notification target games which are not made recognizable to the player (function of executing the processes of step S3010 and step S3302 in the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that

  According to the characteristic K7, when the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state is increased by the main control means, there are cases in which the number of games to be increased is immediately notified and a case in which it is not notified. .. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of notifying the increase in the number of remaining continuing games, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the control for diversifying the timing of the notification is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Features K8. The first control means includes a continuous game number storage means (ART game number counter 121) for storing the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state,
The number-of-games increasing means is the case in which the number of games to be notified is added by the means for notifying and the number of games to be non-notifying is added by the non-notifying means. The gaming machine according to feature K7, characterized in that the number of games given based on the establishment of a predetermined giving condition is added to the continued game number storage means.

  According to the characteristic K8, the first control means determines the number of games given based on the establishment of the given grant condition, no matter how the notification that the number of remaining games in the given game state increases will be given. Since it only needs to be added to the continuous game number storage means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

  Features K9. The second control means executes a special correspondence effect (special addition effect) corresponding to the number of non-notification target games (special steps execution means (steps S3018, S3216 and S3220 in the effect side MPU 92). The game machine according to the feature K7 or K8, which is provided with a function for executing.

  According to the characteristic K9, the number of notification target games to be notified of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state is notified to the player by the game number notification, but the number of non-notification target games that is not the number of notification target games is The player is not notified. Then, the special correspondence effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the execution control of the effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Features K10. The second control unit includes a notification addition unit (a function of executing the process of step S3204 in the production side MPU 92) that adds the number of transfer target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, to the number of notification target games. Prepare,
The special handling executing means is configured to execute, as the special handling effect, an effect corresponding to the addition of the number of games to be transferred to the number of games to be notified, according to a characteristic K9. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic K10, at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is added to the number of notification target games, and a corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the execution timing of the effect in which the number of games is added to the number of notification target games. Further, since the execution control of the effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

  Features K11. Even if the notification addition means is in a situation where the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference in the number of notification target games from the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state, is the same number of games, the non-notification target game The gaming machine according to Feature K10, wherein the number of games to be transferred is selected from a plurality of types of games that do not exceed the number.

  According to the characteristic K11, it is possible to diversify the generation mode of the number of games to be transferred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control for diversifying the number of games to be transferred is performed by the second control means, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

  Features K12. The gaming machine according to feature K10 or K11, wherein the special support execution means is capable of executing different types of special support effects even when the number of games to be transferred is the same.

  According to the characteristic K12, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special correspondence effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control for diversifying the execution mode of the special correspondence effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Become.

Features K13. The notification adding means sets the transfer target game number once in the game number selection process within a range not exceeding a non-notification target game number which is a difference of the notification target game number with respect to the remaining continuous game number in the predetermined game state. A plurality of selection means for selecting a plurality of processing times (function to execute the processing of step S3102 and step S3103 in the production side MPU 92),
The special handling execution means is means for causing the addition of the plurality of transition target games selected by the plurality of selecting means to the notification target game count to be performed in the special correspondence effect executed at different timings ( A function of executing the processing of step S3021 and step S3216 in the rendering side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K12, characterized in that

  According to the characteristic K13, it is possible to increase the frequency with which special correspondence effects are executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the control for increasing the execution frequency of the special correspondence effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

  Features K14. The special correspondence execution means is provided with the number of games in each of a plurality of games as the one special correspondence effect, and the total of the number of games given is a trigger for executing the addition correspondence effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K13, which is characterized by executing a number of effects.

  According to the characteristic K14, it is possible to cause a situation in which the number of notification target games increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

  Features K15. When the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the special correspondence effect is being executed, the second control means adds a game to the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state due to the satisfaction of the predetermined grant condition. A means (a function for executing the process of step S2908 in the production-side MPU 92) is additionally provided for the special correspondence production corresponding to the addition of a number to the notification target game number. The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K14.

  According to the characteristic K15, even when the special correspondence effect is being executed, the number of notification target games is increased by a different effect from the increase of the notification target game number by the special correspondence effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player a surprise regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified. Further, since the control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features K1 to K15. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the characteristic group K, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to suitably control the execution of the predetermined gaming state, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9),
In the predetermined game state, the predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for ending the predetermined game state when the remaining number of games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becomes 0 game. Function for executing the processing of S2703),
Increase state setting means for setting an increase state (B loop) based on occurrence of a predetermined rush opportunity in the predetermined game state, and continuing the increase state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
A game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2601 in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of remaining games in the predetermined game state by a predetermined increase number each time a predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the increase state.
Special effect process executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2613 in the main MPU 72) that executes a special effect process based on that the increase in the predetermined increase game number is satisfied a specific reference number of times or more in the increasing state.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature L1, the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state is increased by the predetermined increase game number each time the predetermined grant condition is satisfied due to the increase state, so the player expects to be in the increase state. It will be. In this case, since the special effect process is executed based on the fact that the increase in the predetermined increase game number has been established the specific reference number of times or more in the increase state, when a large number of remaining continuous game numbers in the predetermined game state are given. It is possible to provide the player with a corresponding effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the effect corresponding to the increased state is not executed until the special effect process is executed even if the increased effect is set.

  According to the feature L2, the special effect process is suddenly executed in a situation in which the player does not recognize that the player character is in the increasing state, so that it is possible to give a surprise.

  Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the special effect process executing means sets the special effect process to a standby state in which the progress of the game based on the operation of the player is on standby.

  According to the feature L3, when a large number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state is given, the progress of the game based on the operation of the player is waited for, and thus a large number of remaining continuous games is given in this way. It is possible to emphasize things.

  Feature L4. A feature L1 characterized in that the special effect process execution means executes the special effect process when the increase state ends after the increase of the predetermined increase game number has been satisfied the specific reference number of times or more in the increase state. The gaming machine according to any one of to L3.

  According to the feature L4, when the increase state occurs, the special effect process is executed based on the end of the increase state. Therefore, the special effect process is executed under the situation where a large number of games are given. It is possible to do so, and it is possible to notify the player that the increase state has been set and the increase state has ended by executing the special effect process.

  Feature L5. When the special effect process is executed, a total notifying unit (a function of executing the process of step S3304 in the effect side MPU 92) for notifying the player of the notification target information corresponding to the total number of games given in the increased state is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, which is characterized by being provided.

  According to the feature L5, it is possible to notify at once that a large number of games have been given.

  Feature L6. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of times is larger than a quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increase number of games.

  According to the feature L6, since the special effect process is executed when the number of specific reference games or more is given in the increased state, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the special effect process. .. Further, since the value of the specific reference number of times is set as a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increase number of games, the number of games given in the increased state is consumed during execution of the increased state. Even if it is done, it is possible to execute the special effect process in a situation where the number of games that has been given in the increased state and has not been digested is equal to or larger than the specific reference number of games.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features L1 to L6. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Features M1. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9),
In the predetermined game state, the predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for ending the predetermined game state when the remaining number of games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becomes 0 game. Function for executing the processing of S2703),
A non-notification target storage unit (stock game number counter 127) that stores the number of non-notification target games that have not been notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state,
A specific increase state setting means (in the main MPU 72) that sets a specific increase state (A loop) based on the occurrence of a specific rush opportunity in the predetermined game state and continues the specific increase state until a specific end condition is satisfied. A function of executing the processing of steps S2416 to S2418),
A game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2501 in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state by the specific increasing number each time the specific giving condition is satisfied in the specific increasing state.
When the specific increase state is set, the specific-correspondence effect control unit that executes the specific-correspondence effect (expected effect) over the number of the specific-effect games (executes the processing of step S3004 and step S3005 in the effect side MPU 92) Function)
Non-report target addition means for adding the specific increased game number increased by the game number increase means to the non-report target storage means in the situation where the specific corresponding effect is being executed (the process of step S3010 in the effect side MPU 92). Function to execute)
When the specific response effect is executed over the number of specific effect games, a special action corresponding to the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means even if the specific increase state has not ended Special correspondence executing means (function for executing the processing of step S3018, step S3216, and step S3220 in the production-side MPU 92) for executing the production (special addition production),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature M1, when the specific increase state is set in the predetermined game state, the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state is increased by the specific increase game number every time the specific grant condition is satisfied, so that the player is specified. Expect to increase. Further, while the number of games given in the specific increase state is once given as the number of non-notification target games, when the specific increase state is set, the specific corresponding effect is executed over the specific effect game number. It is possible to make the player expect how much the number of non-notification target games is increasing in the situation where the specific correspondence effect is being executed. Further, when the specific corresponding effect is executed over the number of specific effect games, the special corresponding effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games at that time is executed even if the specific increase state is not finished. .. As a result, during execution of the specific correspondence effect, the player expects the contents of the special correspondence effect executed thereafter. Further, the special handling effect can be started earlier than in the configuration in which the special handling effect is not executed until the specific increase state ends.

  Features M2. The specific increase state setting means may end the specific increase state if the specific end condition is satisfied even after the specific increase state is set and before the specific effect game count is exhausted. The gaming machine described in the characteristic M1.

  According to the feature M2, it is possible to cause a situation in which the specific increasing state ends before the specific corresponding effect is completed and a situation in which the specific increasing state continues even after the specific corresponding effect is completed.

  Features M3. As the special correspondence effect, the special correspondence executing means sets the number of games to be transferred, which is at least a part of the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means, to the number of notification target games to be notified to the player. The gaming machine according to the feature M1 or M2, characterized in that an effect corresponding to the addition is executed.

  According to the feature M3, as the special correspondence effect, the effect corresponding to the addition of the number of transfer target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, to the number of notification target games is executed. It is possible to increase the attention of the player.

Features M4. Multiple selection means (in the production side MPU 92) for selecting a plurality of the transfer target games in a single process of the game number selection processing within a range that does not exceed the number of the non-reported games stored in the non-reported storage means. A function of executing the processing of steps S3102 and S3103),
The special handling execution means is means for causing the addition of the plurality of transition target games selected by the plurality of selecting means to the notification target game count to be performed in the special correspondence effect executed at different timings ( The gaming machine according to feature M3, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S3021 and step S3216 in the rendering MPU 92.

  According to the feature M4, it is possible to increase the frequency with which special correspondence effects are executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Features M5. The special correspondence execution means is provided with the number of games in each of a plurality of games as the one special correspondence effect, and the total of the number of the granted games is the execution target game of the addition correspondence effect. The gaming machine described in the feature M3 or M4, which is characterized by executing a number of effects.

  According to the feature M5, it is possible to cause a situation in which the number of notification target games is increased over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features M6. A game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2410 in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of remaining games in the predetermined game state when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state,
When the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the situation where the special correspondence effect is being executed, the number of games added to the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state due to the satisfaction of the predetermined grant condition is the number of notification target games. Means for additionally performing an effect corresponding to the addition to the special corresponding effect (function of executing the process of step S2908 in the effect side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M3 to M5, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature M6, even if the special correspondence effect is being executed, the number of notification target games is increased by a different effect from the increase of the number of notification target games by the special correspondence effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player a surprise regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

  Features M7. The special handling execution means is configured to allow different special handling effects to be executed even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M6.

  According to the feature M7, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special correspondence effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Features M8. As the special correspondence effect, the special correspondence execution means sets the number of games to be transferred, which is at least a part of the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means, to the number of notification target games to be notified to the player. The effect corresponding to the addition is executed, and even if the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is the same number of games, The gaming machine according to feature M7, wherein the number of games to be transferred is selected from among a plurality of types of games that do not exceed the number of non-notification target games.

  According to the feature M8, it is possible to diversify the generation mode of the number of games to be transferred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features M1 to M8. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Features N1. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9),
In the predetermined game state, the predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for ending the predetermined game state when the remaining number of games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becomes 0 game. Function for executing the processing of S2703),
Of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state, the number-of-games notification unit (production) for notifying the number of games to be notified (the value of the display counter 126) to be notified to the player. Function of executing the processing of step S2806 and step S2810 in the side MPU 92),
A non-notification target storage unit (stock game number counter 127) that stores the number of non-notification target games that have not been notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state,
In the situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, if the number of notification target games is 0, it is stored in the non-notification target storage means. When the number of non-notification target games is greater than the end reference number of games (first release reference value, second release reference value), the predetermined game state of the predetermined game state is different from the case of less than the end reference number of games. Continuation effect execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S3406, step S3410 and step S3414 in the effect side MPU 92) to execute the continuation effect (first release effect, second release effect, third release effect). ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature N1, there is a non-notification target game number that has not been notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state, so that even if the notification target game number becomes 0 game, the predetermined number is given. It is possible to make the player expect that the game state will be continued. In this case, when the number of notification target games is 0 in a situation where the number of non-notification target games is 1 or more, it varies depending on whether the number of non-notification target games is the end reference game number or more. Continuation effect of a predetermined game state is executed in a mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the continuous effect according to the number of non-notification target games, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Features N2. In the situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, the continuation effect executing means determines the non-notification target when the number of notification target games is 0. When the number of non-notification target games stored in the storage unit is larger than the end reference number of games, the number of games that is at least a part of the non-notification target games is set as the notification target game as the continuous effect. It is characterized by comprising a game number notification executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S3410 and step S3414 in the production side MPU 92) for executing an effect (second emission effect, third emission effect) to be added to the number. The gaming machine described in the feature N1.

  According to the characteristic N2, when the number of games to be notified is 0 and the number of non-notification target games is equal to or more than the ending reference number of games, the predetermined game state is continued to some extent. In such a case, by notifying the player of at least part of the number of non-notification target games, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of security that the predetermined game state continues.

Features N3. The continuous effect executing means,
In a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, the number is stored in the non-notification target storage means when the number of notification target games is 0. When the number of non-notification target games is less than the number of end-time reference games, an effect (second emission effect) of adding all the non-notification target games to the notification target game is executed as the continuation effect. A first continuous effect executing means (a function of executing the process of step S3410 in the effect side MPU 92),
In a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, the number is stored in the non-notification target storage means when the number of notification target games is 0. When the number of non-notification target games is greater than the end reference number of games, as the continuation effect, the effect of adding the number of transfer target games, which is a part of the number of non-notification target games, to the number of notification target games ( Second continuous effect executing means (a function of executing the process of step S3414 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing (3 release effect),
The gaming machine according to the feature N1 or N2, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N3, when the number of games to be notified is 0, at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is notified to the player, so that the player feels reassured that the predetermined game state is continued. It is possible to give. In this case, when the number of non-notification target games is larger than the end reference number of games, only a part of the number of non-notification target games is notified to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the continuous effect of the predetermined game state is executed, and to make the player expect that the predetermined game state will continue even if the number of games to be notified approaches 0 games. Is possible.

  Features N4. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the second continuous effect executing means selects the number of games to be transferred from a plurality of types of games within a range not exceeding the number of non-notification target games.

  According to the feature N4, it is possible to diversify the number of games to be transferred.

  Features N5. In the situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, the continuation effect executing means determines the non-notification target when the number of notification target games is 0. When the number of non-notification target games stored in the storage means is smaller than the end reference number of games, the predetermined number in the situation where the player is not notified of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state as the continuation effect. Features N1 to N4 characterized by including means (a function of executing the process of step S3406 in the production-side MPU 92) for executing an effect (first release effect) for consuming the remaining number of continuous games in the gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature N5, when the number of games to be notified is 0 and the number of non-notification target games is less than the ending reference number of games, the player is not notified of the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the continuation of the predetermined game state from being lowered.

  For the configurations of the features N1 to N5, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the inventions of the characteristic L group, the characteristic M group, and the characteristic N group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature O group>
Feature O1. A first lottery means for executing the first lottery process using the numerical information when the first lottery opportunity has occurred (for example, a function for executing the transition lottery process for the false precursor state in the main MPU 72);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process using the numerical information when the second lottery opportunity has occurred (for example, a function for executing the transition lottery process for the chance state in the main MPU 72),
A predetermined storage unit (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) for updating the numerical information when an update opportunity occurs;
Equipped with
The numerical information of the predetermined storage means may be obtained by the first lottery means and may be obtained by the second lottery means.

  According to the characteristic O1, the numerical value information updated in the predetermined storage means is used in the first lottery process and the second lottery process. As a result, the number of means for storing the updated numerical information can be suppressed, and the configuration can be simplified.

Feature O2. A plurality of numerical value information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) for updating the numerical value information are provided, including the predetermined storage means,
This gaming machine is
Reference information storage means (random number pointer of the main side RAM 74) for storing identification reference information that is referred to for identifying the numerical information storage means from which the numerical information is to be acquired;
When the numerical value information storage unit corresponding to the specific reference information is the acquisition target of the numerical value information, the specific reference information is updated so that the numerical value information acquisition target is the numerical information storage unit in the next order. Means (function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S411 in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
The first lottery means acquires numerical value information from the numerical value information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information when the first lottery trigger has occurred,
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical value information from the numerical value information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information when the second lottery opportunity has occurred.

  According to the characteristic O2, since the plurality of numerical value information storage means are targets of numerical value information acquisition in a predetermined order, it is possible to prevent the numerical value information acquisition targets from being biased toward one numerical value information storage means. It will be possible. Further, since the numerical information is acquired from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information, the processing structure for specifying the numerical information storage means to be the acquisition target of the numerical information is not complicated. It becomes possible to do.

Features O3. A plurality of numerical value information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) for updating the numerical value information are provided, including the predetermined storage means,
There are a plurality of acquisition target lottery means that are targets for acquiring the numerical value information from the plurality of numerical value storage means, including the first lottery means and the second lottery means,
The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the number of acquisition target lottery means is greater than the number of numerical value information storage means.

  According to the characteristic O3, the number of lottery processes for obtaining the numerical information from the plurality of numerical information storage means is larger than the number of the numerical information storage means, so that the increase of the numerical information storage means is suppressed. It is possible to increase the number of lottery processes.

  Features O4. The gaming machine according to feature O3, wherein the number of the numerical value information storage means is equal to or larger than the maximum number of the acquisition target lottery means to be executed in one game.

  According to the characteristic O4, since the number of numerical value information storage means is equal to or more than the maximum number of acquisition target lottery processing to be executed in one game, a plurality of numerical value information storage means can perform a plurality of acquisition target lottery processing. With the configuration used jointly, it is possible to prevent the numerical information of the same numerical information storage means from being used in a plurality of lottery processes in one game.

Features O5. Another numerical value information storage unit (first dedicated random number circuit 102a) which is provided separately from the predetermined storage unit and which updates the numerical value information when an update trigger occurs.
Separate lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S501 to S513 in the main MPU 72) that executes the different lottery processing by using the numerical value information acquired from the different numerical value information storage means when a predetermined lottery trigger has occurred. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O4, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic O5, in the separate lottery process, the numerical value information is acquired from the separate numerical value information storage means provided separately from the predetermined storage means. As a result, the separate lottery process can be performed strictly.

Features O6. Numerical value information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) for updating the numerical value information when an update trigger occurs as a target for acquiring numerical value information in each of the first lottery means and the second lottery means. Is provided, including the predetermined storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein all the plurality of numerical value information storage means have the same number of bits.

  According to the feature O6, since the plurality of numerical value information storage means commonly used in the plurality of lottery processing have the same number of bits, whichever numerical value storage means is used in one lottery processing. It is possible to acquire and use numerical information having the same number of bits.

Features O7. The first lottery means acquires numerical information from one of the numerical information storage means when the first lottery opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine according to feature O6, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical value information from a plurality of the numerical value information storage means when the second lottery opportunity has occurred.

  According to the feature O7, even if the lottery means uses numerical value information of different numbers of bits in the lottery processing, it is possible to use a plurality of numerical value information storage means in cooperation with other lottery means.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features O1 to O7. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. The first specific lottery means (first MPU 72 in the main MPU 72) that executes the lottery process (additional lottery process) by collating the numerical information obtained when the acquisition opportunity occurs with the first lottery information group (first addition table 141) (1) A function of executing the addition lottery process using the addition table 141),
Second specific lottery means (first MPU 72 in the main MPU 72) that executes the lottery process (additional lottery process) by collating the numerical information obtained when the acquisition opportunity occurs with the second lottery information group (second addition table 142) 2) A function of executing the addition lottery process using the addition table 142),
Equipped with
The first lottery information group,
Multiple identification information (additional index),
Lottery correspondence information (the number of winning random numbers) that is set in correspondence with the identification information and enables the first specific lottery means to specify whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information. When,
Has
The second lottery information group is
Multiple identification information (additional index),
Lottery correspondence information (the number of winning random numbers) that is set in correspondence with the identification information and allows the second identification lottery means to specify whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information. When,
Has
In the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the same information is set as the plurality of identification information,
In the first lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that predetermined identification information of the plurality of identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means. Has been done,
In the second lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that the predetermined identification information can be selected in the lottery process of the second specific lottery means,
This gaming machine is
Information storage means (main side ROM 73) for storing a correspondence information group (index correspondence table 145) in which lottery result information (number of additional games) is set in association with each of the plurality of identification information.
Information grasping means for grasping the lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected by the first specific lottery means or the second specific lottery means from the corresponding information group (the processing of step S4708 in the main MPU 72 is executed. Function)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic P1, although the predetermined identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means when the first lottery information group is referred to, the predetermined identification information is included in the first lottery information group. A plurality of identification information is set so as to be the same as the second lottery information group including. Further, the corresponding information group in which the lottery result information is set in association with each of the plurality of identification information is stored in the information storage means, and the lottery processing of the first specific lottery means or the lottery processing of the second specific lottery means. The lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected in is grasped from the corresponding information group. With this configuration, since it is not necessary to store the corresponding information group corresponding to each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group in the information storage means, the correspondence information group is stored in the information storage means. It is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature P2. The plurality of pieces of identification information are set to be serial numbers,
In the lottery processing, it is characterized in that determination processing (processing of steps S4804 to S4806 in the main MPU 72) of whether or not to select each piece of identification information as a lottery result is executed in accordance with the number order of the plurality of pieces of identification information. The gaming machine described in Feature P1.

  According to the feature P2, the lottery process can be appropriately performed because the identification information is set in the serial number. In this case, if the identification information is treated as different information between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the corresponding information groups are associated with the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, respectively. It will be necessary to prepare. On the other hand, since the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group are provided with the same identification information having the configuration of the characteristic P1, the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group are combined. It is possible to share the corresponding information group.

Feature P3. In the second lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that specific identification information of the plurality of identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the second specific lottery means. Has been done,
In the first lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that the specific identification information can be selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means. The gaming machine described in the characteristic P1 or P2.

  According to the characteristic P3, the same identification information is set in spite that the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group have different identification information that is not selected in the lottery process. It is possible to share the corresponding information group between the lottery information group and the second lottery information group.

Feature P4. The information storage means stores first compressed information (first compressed data 146) corresponding to the first lottery information group,
This gaming machine is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4702 to S4704 in the main MPU 72) for generating the first lottery information group by executing the expansion processing on the first compression information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, wherein the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is not set in the first compression information.

  According to the feature P4, even if the predetermined identification information that is not selected in the lottery process is set in the first lottery information group, the predetermined identification information is set in the first compressed information corresponding to the first lottery information group. The corresponding lottery correspondence information is not set. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of information necessary for using the first lottery information group.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features P1 to P4. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to each invention of the above-mentioned characteristic O group and the above-mentioned characteristic P group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing the lottery in the gaming machine as exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Features Q1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history information of the game corresponding thereto is stored in the history storage means (the total game number counter 74a, the advantageous game number counter 74b), the history storage execution means (in the main MPU 72). A function of executing the processing of steps S4001 to S4004),
Information derivation means (function for executing the process of step S4007 in the main MPU 72) for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means,
Information display control means (step S4008 in main side MPU 72) for controlling display of the information display means (combined display section 66, advantageous section display section 67) so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed. Function that executes the processing of
Equipped with
The information display control means executes the processing of step S4010 in the main MPU 72 so that the display corresponding to the aspect information in the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of the termination trigger. A gaming machine characterized by having functions).

  According to the feature Q1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of the termination trigger. This makes it possible to prevent the mode information from being displayed on the information display means in a situation where it is not necessary to display the mode information.

  Features Q2. The game machine according to the feature Q1, wherein there are a plurality of types of the termination triggers.

  According to the feature Q2, since there are a plurality of types of termination triggers, it is possible to improve the operability when the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display unit is terminated.

Features Q3. The information display control means executes the processing of step S4008 in the main MPU 72 so that the display corresponding to the aspect information in the information display means is started based on the occurrence of the start trigger. Function),
The game machine described in the feature Q2, wherein the start trigger is one type.

  According to the feature Q3, since there is only one start trigger, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display unit from being unintentionally started.

  Features Q4. The end control means has a corresponding event (output of ON signal of the start detection sensor 41a, output of ON signal of the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, credit insertion detection sensor 47a) that may occur in order to satisfy the condition for starting the game. ~ 49a ON signal output) is generated based on the occurrence of the end trigger is specified, the gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3.

  According to the feature Q4, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of the target event that may occur when the game is started, so the mode information is displayed on the information display means. It is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is.

Features Q5. A predetermined output means (start detection sensor 41a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a) which becomes a predetermined output state when a corresponding event occurs,
Means for executing valid response control based on the fact that the predetermined output means is in the predetermined output state in the valid state (function of executing the process of step S302 in the main MPU 72, affirmative determination in step S304 of the main MPU 72) Function),
Equipped with
Any one of features Q1 to Q4 characterized in that the termination control means specifies that the termination trigger has occurred based on the predetermined output means being in the predetermined output state in a situation other than the valid situation. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature Q5, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is terminated by the predetermined output means being in the predetermined output state even in the situation that is not the valid situation, so that it is not necessary to wait for the valid situation. Even then, the display corresponding to the aspect information can be ended.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to the configurations of the features Q1 to Q5. Any of H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, and features Q1 to Q5. One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the characteristic Q group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

  Rotating drum type game machines such as slot machines: The rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is responsive to the design after the stop. A gaming machine that gives benefits to.

  10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 41 ... Start lever, 41a ... Start detection sensor, 42-44 ... Stop button, 45a ... Inserted medal detection sensor, 47a-49a ... Credit insertion detection sensor, 72 ... Main side MPU, 73 ... Main side ROM, 74 ... Main side RAM, 74a ... Total game number counter, 74b ... Advantageous game number counter, 92 ... Production side MPU, 93 ... Production side ROM, 94 ... Production side RAM, 101a-101l ... 1st -Twelfth shared random number circuit, 102a ... First dedicated random number circuit, 111 ... Offset table, 121 ... ART game number counter, 126 ... Display counter, 127 ... Stock game number counter, 132 ... Transition condition game number counter, 141 ... 1st additional table, 142 ... 2nd additional table, 145 ... index The corresponding table, 146 ... first compressed data.

Claims (1)

Section setting means for setting a game section in a second section which is more advantageous to the player than the first section,
First state setting means for setting a first expected state in which a benefit is provided after the end of a plurality of games,
Second state setting means for setting a second expected state that continues for a plurality of games and is not granted the privilege after the end,
Expected production control means for performing expected production that enables the player to expect the privilege to be given in each of the games in the first expected state and the second expected state,
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the section setting means includes means for making the second section in the second expected state.

Images